Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 469

GBSS V900R012C01

Reconfiguration Guide
Issue Date 05 2011-03-07

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Purpose
This document describes how to reconfigure the BSC6900 during network optimization and how to configure the optional features.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name BSC6900 BTS3900 BTS3000 BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3012II/ BTS3006C/BTS3002E DBS3900 BTS3900/BTS3900A BTS3900B/BTS3900E BTS30/BTS312/BTS3012A BTS30 and macro BTS312 (EDGE) BTS30 and macro BTS312 (PCS1900) Macro BTS3X (AMR) Product Version V900R012C01 BTS3900V100R002C00SPC011 BTS3000V100R009C00SPC011 BTS3000V100R008C11SP03 and later versions BTS3000V100R008C11 and later versions BTS3000V100R008C11 and later versions V100R008 and later versions V302R007 and later versions G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and later versions G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and later versions G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and later versions

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

About This Document

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

l l l l

Technical support engineers Maintenance engineers Field engineers Network optimization engineers

Organization
1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide. 2 Introduction to Reconfiguration This chapter defines reconfiguration and describes the reconfiguration tools. 3 Checking the License This chapter describes how to check the newly granted license. 4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900 This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running BSC6900 or expand its capacity. 5 Reconfiguring a BTS This chapter describes how to reconfigure a BTS. In the case of traffic imbalance, you can adjust the distribution of hardware resources. Reconfiguring BTSs can help to balance the traffic. 6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running base station subsystem (BSS) as required. 7 Configuring GBSS Features This section describes how to configure the features of the GBSS.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

About This Document

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Convention Boldface >

Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

vi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide.....................................................................1-1 2 Introduction to Reconfiguration.............................................................................................2-1
2.1 Definition........................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Tools................................................................................................................................................................2-2

3 Checking the License.................................................................................................................3-1 4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900......................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Changing Signaling Points..............................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Adding Boards and Subracks..........................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.1 Adding a Subrack...................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.2 Adding the XPUa/XPUb Board ............................................................................................................4-8 4.2.3 Adding Interface Boards......................................................................................................................4-11 4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface...................................................................................4-13 4.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the Ater Interface.......................................................................4-15 4.5 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface.................................................................................4-17 4.6 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface..............................................................................4-18

5 Reconfiguring a BTS..................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTS......................................................................................................5-3 5.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTS...........................................................................................5-3 5.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment Mode....................................................................................5-4 5.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis Timeslots................................................................................................5-5 5.2 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated Mode...................................................................5-5 5.3 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base Stations................................................................5-6 5.3.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU Ring.............................................................................................5-6 5.3.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU Chain.........................................................................................5-8 5.4 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSs.........................................................5-9 5.5 Changing the Frequency Hopping.................................................................................................................5-10 5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FH..............................................................................................................5-11 5.5.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FH....................................................................................................5-11 5.5.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH........................................................................................................5-12 5.5.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH........................................................................................................5-13 Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Contents

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide 5.5.5 Changing RF FH to None FH..............................................................................................................5-13 5.5.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FH....................................................................................................5-14 5.5.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH............................................................................................................5-14 5.5.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH........................................................................................................5-15

5.6 Adjusting the BTS Ring Topology................................................................................................................5-15 5.7 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard...................................................................................................5-16 5.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario)..................................................................................5-16 5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission Data.....................................................................................................5-19 5.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-Static IP Scenario)..........................................................................5-21

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network...........................................................................................6-1


6.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches..........................................6-2 6.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface.................................................................6-3 6.3 Reconfiguring a Cell.......................................................................................................................................6-4 6.3.1 Changing the TRX Power......................................................................................................................6-5 6.3.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a Cell.....................................................................................................6-5 6.3.3 Changing TRX Frequencies...................................................................................................................6-6 6.3.4 Changing Neighboring Cell Relations...................................................................................................6-7 6.4 Reconfiguring Channels..................................................................................................................................6-9 6.4.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHs.............................................................................................................6-9 6.4.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half Rate...........................................................................6-10

7 Configuring GBSS Features.....................................................................................................7-1


7.1 Overview of Feature Configuration..............................................................................................................7-15 7.2 Activating the GSM License.........................................................................................................................7-45 7.3 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)...............................................................................................7-46 7.4 Configuring IMSI Detach..............................................................................................................................7-46 7.5 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover...............................................................................................................7-47 7.6 Configuring Directed Retry...........................................................................................................................7-53 7.7 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment..................................................................................7-54 7.8 Configuring Call Reestablishment................................................................................................................7-55 7.9 Configuring TCH Re-assignment..................................................................................................................7-57 7.10 Configuring Radio Link Management........................................................................................................7-58 7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs.................................................................7-59 7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.................................................................7-64 7.13 Configuring System Information Sending..................................................................................................7-65 7.14 Configuring Daylight Saving Time.............................................................................................................7-66 7.15 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment................................................................................................7-67 7.16 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)............................................................................................7-69 7.17 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code................................................................................................7-72 7.18 Configuring DRX........................................................................................................................................7-73 7.19 Configuring BTS Power Management........................................................................................................7-74 7.20 Configuring Connection with TMA............................................................................................................7-75 7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt.............................................................................................................7-78 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Contents

7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity..................................................................................................7-79 7.23 Configuring BTS Clock..............................................................................................................................7-80 7.24 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)................................................................7-81 7.25 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology)..............................................................................................7-83 7.26 Configuring Transmit Diversity..................................................................................................................7-85 7.27 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity......................................................................................................7-86 7.28 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity..................................................................................................7-88 7.29 Configuring Dynamic PBT.........................................................................................................................7-89 7.30 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage.....................................................................................................7-91 7.31 Configuring Extended Cell..........................................................................................................................7-93 7.32 Configuring Concentric Cell.......................................................................................................................7-94 7.33 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell........................................................................................................................7-95 7.34 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC.................................................................................................7-98 7.35 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network...............................................................................................7-99 7.36 Configuring Flex MAIO............................................................................................................................7-102 7.37 Configuring ICC........................................................................................................................................7-103 7.38 Configuring EICC.....................................................................................................................................7-104 7.39 Configuring Frequency Hopping..............................................................................................................7-106 7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping......................................................................................7-107 7.41 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping................................................................................................7-109 7.42 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.................................................................................7-110 7.43 Configuring IBCA.....................................................................................................................................7-111 7.44 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network.................................................................................................7-114 7.45 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization...................................................................................................7-117 7.46 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet...........................................................................................................7-118 7.47 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm...............................................................................7-119 7.48 Configuring DTX......................................................................................................................................7-123 7.49 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown........................................................................7-125 7.50 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.........................................7-127 7.51 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass................................................................................................7-128 7.52 Configuring Active Backup Power Control..............................................................................................7-129 7.53 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.......................................................................7-130 7.54 Configuring PSU Smart Control...............................................................................................................7-131 7.55 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization...........................................................7-131 7.56 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off......................................................................................................7-133 7.57 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment......................................................................................7-134 7.58 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment......................................................................7-135 7.59 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management................................................................................7-135 7.60 Configuring Flex Abis...............................................................................................................................7-136 7.61 Configuring BTS Local Switch.................................................................................................................7-138 7.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization..........................................................................................7-140 7.63 Configuring Flex Ater...............................................................................................................................7-140 Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Contents

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.64 Configuring BSC Local Switch.................................................................................................................7-141 7.65 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission...........................................................................................7-143 7.66 Configuring BTS Ring Topology..............................................................................................................7-145 7.67 Configuring TRX Mutual Aid...................................................................................................................7-146 7.68 Configuring MSC Pool..............................................................................................................................7-148 7.69 Configuring the SGSN Pool......................................................................................................................7-150 7.69.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)..............................................................................................7-150 7.69.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)............................................................................................7-152 7.70 Configuring Abis Bypass..........................................................................................................................7-154 7.71 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup...................................................................................................7-157 7.72 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy........................................................................................................7-158 7.73 Configuring TC Pool.................................................................................................................................7-161 7.73.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)...........................................................................................7-161 7.73.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)................................................................................................7-164 7.74 Configuring OML Backup........................................................................................................................7-168 7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)..............................................................................7-170 7.76 Configuring Fast Move Handover.............................................................................................................7-171 7.77 Configuring Chain Cell Handover............................................................................................................7-173 7.78 Configuring Multi-Site Cell......................................................................................................................7-174 7.79 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability...........................................................................................7-176 7.80 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability......................................................................................7-177 7.81 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover............................................................................7-181 7.82 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover................................................................................7-182 7.83 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.........................................................................7-183 7.84 Configuring Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.........................................................................7-185 7.85 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface...........................................................................7-186 7.86 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface................................................................................7-188 7.87 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface...........................................................................7-189 7.88 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface..............................................................................7-190 7.89 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface..............................................................................7-192 7.90 Configuring High Speed Signaling ..........................................................................................................7-193 7.91 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points...........................................................................................7-194 7.92 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection................................................................................................7-196 7.93 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.......................................................................................7-197 7.94 Configuring Active Power Control...........................................................................................................7-198 7.95 Configuring Ciphering..............................................................................................................................7-199 7.96 Configuring Speech Version.....................................................................................................................7-201 7.97 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR..........................................................................7-202 7.98 Configuring the Cell Broadcast.................................................................................................................7-203 7.98.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)............................................................7-204 7.98.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast............................................................................................7-205 7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)..........................................................................................7-206 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Contents

7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)....................................................................................7-208 7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)......................................................................................7-209 7.102 Configuring TFO.....................................................................................................................................7-210 7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).............................................................................7-212 7.104 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)...............................................................7-212 7.105 Configuring Voice Quality Index............................................................................................................7-214 7.106 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report......................................................................................7-215 7.107 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation..............................................................................................7-217 7.108 Configuring VQE3.0...............................................................................................................................7-219 7.109 Configuring KPIs Based on User Experience ........................................................................................7-219 7.110 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment..........................................................7-221 7.111 Configuring WB AMR............................................................................................................................7-223 7.112 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR).........................................................................................................7-224 7.113 Configuring QoS ARP&THP..................................................................................................................7-226 7.114 Configuring PS Active Package Management........................................................................................7-228 7.115 Configuring PoC QoS.............................................................................................................................7-229 7.116 Configuring PS Service in Priority..........................................................................................................7-230 7.117 Configuring NC2.....................................................................................................................................7-231 7.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)......................................................................7-233 7.119 Configuring GPRS..................................................................................................................................7-235 7.120 Configruing Network Operation Mode I.................................................................................................7-236 7.121 Configuring EGPRS................................................................................................................................7-237 7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access........................................................................................................7-238 7.123 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding...............................................................7-242 7.124 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching...............................................................................................7-243 7.124.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.............7-244 7.124.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel.........................................................................................7-245 7.124.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario...............................................7-246 7.125 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination...................................................................................................7-247 7.126 Configuring PS Handover.......................................................................................................................7-248 7.127 Configuring PS Power Control...............................................................................................................7-251 7.128 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds...........................................................7-252 7.129 Configuring EDA....................................................................................................................................7-254 7.130 Configuring DTM...................................................................................................................................7-255 7.131 Configuring Class11 DTM......................................................................................................................7-257 7.132 Configuring HMC DTM.........................................................................................................................7-258 7.133 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data.......................................................................................7-259 7.134 Configuring Resource Reservation.........................................................................................................7-261 7.135 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)...........................................7-262 7.136 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call...............................................................................................7-263 7.137 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority..................................................................................7-265 7.138 Configuring Network Support SAIC.......................................................................................................7-266 Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

Contents

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.139 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)..........................................................................................7-268 7.140 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)..........................................................................................7-269 7.141 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (cell ID + TA)......................................................................................7-270 7.142 Configuring Lb Interface.........................................................................................................................7-271 7.143 Configuring Abis over IP........................................................................................................................7-275 7.144 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1.............................................................................................................7-276 7.145 Configuring Abis MUX..........................................................................................................................7-278 7.146 Configuring A over IP.............................................................................................................................7-279 7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1..................................................................................................................7-281 7.148 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission..........................................................................................7-283 7.149 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface....................................................................7-284 7.150 Configuring Gb over IP...........................................................................................................................7-286 7.151 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD........................................................................................7-287 7.152 Configuring Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................................7-288 7.153 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning............................................7-290 7.154 Configuring PICO Synchronization........................................................................................................7-292 7.155 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.........................................................................................7-293 7.156 Configuring PICO USB Encryption .......................................................................................................7-296 7.157 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode..........................................................................................................7-296 7.158 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization...........................................................................................7-298 7.159 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.....................................................................7-299 7.160 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization................................7-300 7.161 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off.......................................................................................7-302 7.162 Configuring Local User Management.....................................................................................................7-304 7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS.........................................................................................................................7-305 7.164 Configuring GSM-T Relay......................................................................................................................7-307 7.165 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover........................................................................................................7-308 7.166 Configuring Handover Re-establishment................................................................................................7-315 7.167 Configuring RAN Sharing......................................................................................................................7-316 7.168 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell.............................................................................................................7-318 7.169 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover........................................................................................................7-320 7.170 Configuring MSRD.................................................................................................................................7-322 7.171 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink..................................................................................................7-323 7.172 Configuring the EGPRS2-A....................................................................................................................7-324 7.173 Configuring Latency Reduction..............................................................................................................7-326 7.174 Configuring License Control for Urgency..............................................................................................7-327 7.175 Configuring Access Control Class..........................................................................................................7-328 7.176 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g....................................................................7-329 7.177 Configuring NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS......................7-331 7.178 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g .............................................................7-333 7.179 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g..............................................................7-337 7.180 Configuring GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority .......................................7-340 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Contents

7.181 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE..........................................................................7-341 7.182 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage...............................................7-343 7.183 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality...................................................7-345 7.184 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load...............................................7-348 7.185 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE...........................................................................................7-351 7.186 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE........................................................................................7-352 7.187 Configuring SRVCC...............................................................................................................................7-353 7.188 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA................................................................7-355 7.189 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g...........7-357 7.190 Configuring Multiple CCCHs.................................................................................................................7-358 7.191 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).....................................................................7-359 7.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).............................................7-361 7.192.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.........................7-361 7.192.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.............................7-367 7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)................7-371 7.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).........................................................7-377 7.194.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference Clock............................................................7-377 7.194.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference Clock................................................................7-384

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Figures

Figures
Figure 4-1 Floating nuts installation....................................................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-2 Checking the subrack configuration mode.........................................................................................4-7 Figure 5-1 RXU ring and RXU chain examples..................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-2 RXU ring and RXU chain examples..................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-3 Adjusting BTS connection data between BSCs...............................................................................5-17 Figure 5-4 Adjusting BTS connection data within a BSC.................................................................................5-18 Figure 7-1 Signaling messages...........................................................................................................................7-56 Figure 7-2 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.............................................................................7-60 Figure 7-3 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups.........................................................................................7-61 Figure 7-4 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface......................................................7-82 Figure 7-5 Connections between the DTRU and DDPU in PBT mode.............................................................7-84 Figure 7-6 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell................................................................................7-94 Figure 7-7 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell..........................................................................7-94 Figure 7-8 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled......................................................7-157 Figure 7-9 Position of the SMLC in the network.............................................................................................7-272 Figure 7-10 Assignment request message in TDM transmission.....................................................................7-285 Figure 7-11 Assignment request message in IP transmission..........................................................................7-285 Figure 7-12 Messages traced on the interface between BSCs..........................................................................7-358 Figure 7-13 IP-over-FE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side.............................................7-362 Figure 7-14 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side........................................7-362 Figure 7-15 IP-over-GE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side............................................7-363 Figure 7-16 IP-over-FE/GE GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side...........................................7-367 Figure 7-17 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side............................................7-368 Figure 7-18 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission..................................................7-372 Figure 7-19 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission..........................................7-373 Figure 7-20 Common GPS reference clock.....................................................................................................7-378 Figure 7-21 Common BITS reference clock....................................................................................................7-379 Figure 7-22 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU).......................................................7-379 Figure 7-23 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT).....................................................7-380 Figure 7-24 Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT).................................................7-380 Figure 7-25 Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)...........................................................7-381

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Tables

Tables
Table 2-1 Reconfiguration tools...........................................................................................................................2-2 Table 4-1 Boards Supporting the Ater Interface................................................................................................4-16 Table 5-1 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3012...........................5-9 Table 5-2 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3006C.........................5-9 Table 5-3 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number when cabinet groups are configured between the BTS3012 and BTS312....................................................................................................................5-10 Table 7-1 GBSS Basic Feature List....................................................................................................................7-15 Table 7-2 GBSS Optional Feature List...............................................................................................................7-20 Table 7-3 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3012 series)..............7-92 Table 7-4 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3900E)......................7-92 Table 7-5 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control.........................................................................7-120 Table 7-6 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S4...............................................................................7-155 Table 7-7 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S5...............................................................................7-155 Table 7-8 KPIs that are based on user experience............................................................................................7-220

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1
05 (2011-03-07)

Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide.

This is the fifth commercial release of V900R012C01. Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30), this issue incorporates the following changes. Content 4.1 Changing Signaling Points Description The description of the procedure are modified.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2010-11-30)
This is the fourth commercial release of V900R012C01. Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20), this issue includes the following new topics: l Adjusting OMU Slots

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20), this issue incorporates the following changes. Content Changing the Work Mode of a Board Description The description of the procedure are modified.

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-1

1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

03 (2010-09-20)
This is the third commercial release of V900R012C01. Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue includes the following new topics: l l l 5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FH 5.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario) 4.2 Adding Boards and Subracks

Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue does not incorporate any changes. Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2010-06-21)
This is the second commercial release of V900R012C01. Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue incorporates the following changes. Content 4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface 4.5 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface 4.6 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface Description The description of the prerequisites are modified. The description of the prerequisites are modified. The description of the prerequisites are modified.

Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2010-04-10)
This is the first commercial release of V900R012C01. Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new topics: l l l l l l l l l
1-2

7.10 Configuring Radio Link Management 7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs 7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure 7.20 Configuring Connection with TMA 7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt 7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity 7.23 Configuring BTS Clock 7.37 Configuring ICC 7.38 Configuring EICC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

l l l l l l l l l

7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping 7.45 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization 7.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS) 7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS) 7.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS) 7.70 Configuring Abis Bypass 7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) 4.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the Ater Interface 6.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not incorporate any changes. Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2 Introduction to Reconfiguration

Introduction to Reconfiguration

About This Chapter


This chapter defines reconfiguration and describes the reconfiguration tools. 2.1 Definition Reconfiguration refers to a process of adding, deleting, or modifying the data of the BSS system (consisting of at least one BSC6900 and one base station) after it starts operating. 2.2 Tools The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Configuration Management Express (CME) can be used to configure the BSC6900.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Introduction to Reconfiguration

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2.1 Definition
Reconfiguration refers to a process of adding, deleting, or modifying the data of the BSS system (consisting of at least one BSC6900 and one base station) after it starts operating. The BSS is reconfigured in the following scenarios: l Network optimization Network optimization is a process of adjusting and optimizing the network performance based on the data that is obtained from performance measurements or drive tests when the network is in service. l System capacity expansion System capacity expansion enables the BSC system to serve more users through hardware addition or configuration modification in the existing network. l Feature configuration Feature configuration is a process of activating an optional feature by configuring its key parameters. This document focuses on the data to be prepared and reconfiguration procedures. However, it does not focus on the data analysis process of network optimization and the number of boards and links for capacity expansion that are subject to actual network conditions. Feature configuration provides guidelines for activating a feature, but it cannot guarantee the optimum feature performance in the network.

2.2 Tools
The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Configuration Management Express (CME) can be used to configure the BSC6900. Table 2-1 describes the tools used in reconfiguration. This document describes only the data reconfiguration through MML commands on the LMT. Table 2-1 Reconfiguration tools Data Configuration Tool LMT CME Function Online or offline configuration of the BSC6900 can be performed through MML commands. BSC6900 configuration can be performed through the CME graphic user interface. l In integrated mode, the configuration data can be sent to the BSC6900 through the M2000 immediately or at a specified time. This mode is used for data reconfiguration. l In standalone mode, the configuration file needs to be exported after the configuration and then loaded to the BSC6900 through the LMT or M2000 for the data to take effect. This mode applies to BSC6900 initial configuration.
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2 Introduction to Reconfiguration

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3 Checking the License

3
Prerequisite
l l l A new license is granted.

Checking the License

This chapter describes how to check the newly granted license.

The BSC6900 is in the minimum configuration. The license file is loaded. For details, see FTP Server.

Context
A new license is required in the following situations: l l l A network is deployed. New license control items are introduced to the C version to be upgraded. These license control items, however, are not defined in the license file of the earlier version. New license control items are introduced to the C version to be upgraded. These license control items are defined in the license file of the earlier version, but their values are incorrect. The R version is upgraded. The Equipment Serial Number (ESN) is changed. The functions restricted by the license need to be enabled. The license is about to expire.

l l l l

Procedure
Step 1 Run the CHK DATA2LIC command to check the license. In this step, set File Name. ----End

Example
/*Check the license file named ON1020691_GU2.dat*/
CHK DATA2LIC: FN="ON1020691_GU2.dat";

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

3 Checking the License

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Follow-up Procedure
After checking the license, run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the license.

3-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

4
About This Chapter

Reconfiguring the BSC6900

This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running BSC6900 or expand its capacity. 4.1 Changing Signaling Points When the BSC6900 is relocated or network optimization is performed, the originating signaling point code (OPC) and destination signaling point code (DPC) are changed. In this case, the related settings must be changed. 4.2 Adding Boards and Subracks As traffic volume increases, the BSC6900 cannot meet the increasing service requirements. In this case, you can add boards or subracks to expand system capacity. 4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface To improve the transmission efficiency and speech quality on the A interface, you can change the transmission mode on the A interface from TDM to IP. 4.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the Ater Interface The TDM transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adjusted to IP transmission mode based on the service requirements. 4.5 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface To improve the transmission efficiency, increase the throughput, and reduce the transmission delay on the Gb interface, you can change the transmission mode on the Gb interface from FR to IP. 4.6 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface To improve the transmission resource utilization, you can change the transmission mode on the Abis interface from TDM to IP.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4.1 Changing Signaling Points


When the BSC6900 is relocated or network optimization is performed, the originating signaling point code (OPC) and destination signaling point code (DPC) are changed. In this case, the related settings must be changed.

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC6900 properly. A BSC license is ready.

Context

CAUTION
Changing signaling points will interrupt BSC6900 services. Therefore, change signaling points at midnight when the traffic load is light. l When an Originating Signaling Point Code (OPC) or Destination Signaling Point Code (DPC) changes, the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of the BSC changes. The ESN of the BSC is bound with a license. Therefore, after the OPC or DPC changes, you must apply for a new BSC license based on the new ESN and then activate it.
NOTE

Run the LST ESN command with the Query Type parameter set to CUSTOM(Custom ESN) to query the new ESN corresponding to the new signaling point.

l l l

Deactivate all the GSM cells before changing a signaling point. When an OPC is used by an M3UA local entity (M3LE), set all subracks to ineffective mode and then change the OPC. If the OPC to be changed is not used by an M3LE, change the OPC in online mode.

Procedure
l Change an OPC. 1. Run the LST M3LE command to query whether the OPC to be changed is used by an M3LE. If the OPC to be changed is used by an M3LE, change the OPC as follows: (1) Run the DEA GCELL command to deactivate all the GSM cells. (2) Run the SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE command to set all subracks to ineffective mode. (3) Run the MOD OPC command to change OSP name and OSP code. (4) Run the MOD GCELLOSPMAP command to set the OPCs mapping the GSM cells. (5) Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to set all subracks to effective mode.
4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

(6) Run the FMT DATA command to create a data configuration file. (7) Run the RST BSC command to reset the BSC6900. (8) Activate GSM licenses by referring to 7.2 Activating the GSM License. (9) Run the ACT GCELL command to activate all the GSM cells. If the OPC to be changed is not used by an M3LE, change the OPC as follows: (1) Run the DEA GCELL command to deactivate all the GSM cells. (2) Run the MOD OPC command to change OSP name and OSP code. (3) Run the MOD GCELLOSPMAP command to set the OPCs mapping the GSM cells. (4) Activate GSM licenses by referring to 7.2 Activating the GSM License. (5) Run the ACT GCELL command to activate all the GSM cells. l Change a DPC. 1. 2. ----End Run the MOD N7DPC command to change DSP name and DSP code. Activate GSM licenses by referring to 7.2 Activating the GSM License.

Example
//Change an OPC. // To query whether the OPC to be changed is used by an M3LE, run the following command: DSP M3LE: // To deactivate a GSM cell, run the following command: DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1; // To set a subrack to ineffective mode, run the following command: SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE: // To change an OPC, run the following command: MOD OPC: SPX=1, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=10001; // To set an OPC mapping a GSM cell, run the following command: MOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, OPC=10001; // To set a subrack to effective mode, run the following command: SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE: // To create a data configuration file, run the following command: FMT DATA:; // To reset the BSC6900, run the following command: RST BSC: BSCID=1; // To reactivate the BSC license, run the following command: ACT LICENSE: FN="license.dat"; // To activate a GSM cell, run the following command: ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;

// To change a DPC, run the following command:

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900


MOD N7DPC: DPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=1002;

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

// To reactivate the BSC license, run the following command: ACT LICENSE: FN="license.dat";

4.2 Adding Boards and Subracks


As traffic volume increases, the BSC6900 cannot meet the increasing service requirements. In this case, you can add boards or subracks to expand system capacity. 4.2.1 Adding a Subrack This section describes procedures and precautions for adding subracks. 4.2.2 Adding the XPUa/XPUb Board This section describes procedures and precautions for adding the XPUa/XPUb board. 4.2.3 Adding Interface Boards This section describes procedures and precautions for adding interface boards.

4.2.1 Adding a Subrack


This section describes procedures and precautions for adding subracks.

Prerequisite
l Network design is complete. Network design involves planning of traffic volume in each subrack, planning of the quantity of subracks, and planning of the quantity of boards and types of boards. Contact Huawei to obtain the detailed network design and planning scheme. l l l l l Tools required for adding subracks are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, straight screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner. The parts needed for adding subracks are all ready. The parts include subracks, screws, power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables connecting new subracks and NEs. Subracks to be added are ready. If there is space in the cabinet, add a subrack there. If idle space is not available, another cabinet is needed. Check whether the program files of the OMU board in the OMU active workspace installation directory\bin\fam are correct.

4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves. l It is recommended that you use a board of the same type to replace the board. To use a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, the board of version a replace the board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support. When original subracks are in effective mode, adding subracks does not affect ongoing service. When original subracks are in ineffective mode, the BSC6900 needs restarting to add a subrack. Restarting the BSC6900 interrupts the ongoing services. Therefore, adding new subracks when original subracks are in effective mode is recommended.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DIP switches according to the location of the new subrack, by referring to DIP Switch on the Subrack.

CAUTION
l Checking and Setting the Subrack DIP Switch; then, power on the subracks. Set the DIP switches before powering on the subrack. Settings of the DIP switches after powering on the subrack are invalid. l Set the DIP switches for the new subrack by referring to Checking and Setting the Subrack DIP Switch. Different subracks must have different settings of DIP switches. If two subracks in the BSC6900 share the same settings of the DIP switches, services on the two subracks will be disrupted. Step 2 Turn off the power switch for the new subrack by referring to Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box. Step 3 Make sure floating nuts are installed in the mounting bar at the front side of the cabinet. If no floating nuts are available, take floating nuts out of the ESD bag at the bottom of the cabinet and install them in the place highlighted in yellow shown in Figure 4-1.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Figure 4-1 Floating nuts installation

NOTE

Three holes in the mounting bar are known as one U space. One subrack occupies 36 holes. One subrack is fixed by 4 pairs of floating nuts installed symmetrically. The floating nuts are installed in the 3rd, the 12th, the 25th, and the 34th holes in the mounting bar where the subrack will be installed.

Step 4 Two people hold the mounting ears and support the base of the subrack. Slide the subrack along the guiding rail into the cabinet, and then fasten the screws to fix the subrack. Step 5 Install the power cables for the new subrack by referring to Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet. Step 6 Install the boards in the new subrack by referring to Installing Boards and Setting Board DIP Switches. Step 7 Install the total four network cables connecting the active/standby SCUa in the MPS subrack with the active/standby SCUa in the new subrack by referring to Installing the Inter-SCUa Cables Between Different Subracks. Step 8 Install other connecting cables for the new subrack by referring to Installing the Signal Cables. Step 9 Check whether cables in the new subrack are connected correctly. Step 10 Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables. Step 11 Turn on the power switch for the new subrack. Step 12 Log in to the LMT, and check the subrack configuration mode at the top right corner of the GUI as shown in a red circle in Figure 4-2.

4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

If... Some subracks are in ineffective mode.

Then... 1. Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command in MML to set all the subracks in effective mode. 2. Go to step Step 13.

All the subracks are in ineffective Go to step Step 13. mode.

Figure 4-2 Checking the subrack configuration mode

Step 13 Run the ADD SUBRACK MML command to add a subrack. Step 14 Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command in MML to set the new subrack to effective mode. After adding the subrack by running the ADD SUBRACK command, Data Configuration Modes of the new subrack is set to ineffective mode by default. Step 15 Add the XPUa/XPUb board. Step 16 Add the DPU board. Step 17 Add the interface board. Step 18 Check the process of adding the boards in the Device Maintenance window on the LMT. When all the boards in the subrack are added ten minutes later, the subrack begins to work normally. Open the Device Maintenance window on the LMT, and check whether all the boards work normally in the BSC Device Panel tab page. Step 19 In the Browse Alarm tab page on the LMT, check whether alarms such as board fault alarms are reported.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

If... Alarms such as board fault alarms are reported.

Then... 1. Find out the reason according to the alarms and clear them. 2. Go back to step Step 19.

Alarms such as board fault alarms are not Go to step Step 20. reported. Step 20 Run the DSP BRDVER to query the software version of the new board. Compare the query results with the version configuration information file of the boards to check whether software versions of the new boards follow the version mapping of the boards. If... Then...

Software versions of the new boards Go to step Step 21. follow the version mapping of the boards. Software versions of the new boards do not follow the version mapping of the boards. 1. Check whether the program files of the OMU board in the OMU active workspace installation directory\LoadData are correct. If the program files are not correct, contact engineers in Huawei to obtain the correct files. 2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the board. 3. Go back to step Step 19.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version mapping table by referring to section "Board Versions" in the release notes.

Step 21 Perform dialing tests and browse webpages to check that the boards provide functions properly. ----End

4.2.2 Adding the XPUa/XPUb Board


This section describes procedures and precautions for adding the XPUa/XPUb board.

Prerequisite
l Network design is complete. Network design involves planning of the quantity of NodeBs carried by each subrack, planning of the quantity of NodeBs carried by the XPUa/XPUb board or by each subsystem, and planing of slots for holding the boards. Contact Huawei to obtain the detailed network design scheme. l
4-8

The XPUa/XPUb board is ready.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

Tools required for installing boards are ready. Tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, straight screwdriver, ESD box or bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves. l It is recommended that you use a board of the same type to replace the board. To use a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, the board of version a replace the board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support. When binding the boards, various boards must be evenly bound to the MPU subsystem.

WARNING
When the board types bound to the MPU subsystem are not complete or when the proportion of the boards is inappropriate, the exchange message through the MPU subsystems surges, which affects the system stability. If the board types bound to the MPU are not complete, either of the following situations exists: l l l SPU boards are bound, not DPU boards or interface boards. DPU boards are bound, not SPU boards or interface boards. Interface boards are bound, not SPU or DPU boards.

Inappropriate proportion of boards indicates that the SPU, DPU and interface boards are not properly arranged in the MPU subsystem. In the case of two MPU subsystems, three pairs of SPUs, three pairs of DPUs and three pairs of GOUcs in one subrack, Inappropriate proportion is as follows: l l Two pairs of SPUs, one pair of DPUs and one pair of GOUcs are bound to one MPU subsystem. One pair of SPUs, two pairs of DPUs and two pairs of GOUcs are bound to the other MPU subsystem.

Appropriate proportion is as follows: l l Two pairs of SPUs, two pairs of DPUs and two pairs of GOUcs are bound to one MPU subsystem. One pair of SPUs, one pair of DPUs and one pair of GOUcs are bound to the other MPU subsystem.

The principles for the binding boards to the MPU subsystem are as follows:
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-9

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

l l

At least one MPU subsystem must be configured in each subrack. If there are two pairs or more XPUb boards, two MPU subsystems must be configured in the subrack. It is recommended that you configure the MPU subsystem in slot 0 and slot 2. According to the load balancing principle, bind XPUb boards to two MPU subsystems respectively for load sharing. For example, MPU subsystems are configured in slot 0 and slot 2. Bind the XPU boards in slot 4 and 8 to the MPU subsystem in slot 0. Bind the XPU boards in slot 10 and 12 to the MPU subsystem in slot 2.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the SPUb boards by referring to Inserting a Board. Step 2 Run the ADD BRD command to add the XPUa/XPUb board. For example,
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=SPUb, LGCAPPTYPE=UCP, SN=4, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

Step 3 When the RUN on the board blinks every second (1s on, 1s off), run the DSP BRD command to query the new board status. If... Then...

The XPUb board does not work in active/standby mode. CPU status Go to step Step 5. is Active normal. The XPUb boards work in active/standby mode. CPU status is Standby normal. CPU status is set to another value. Go to step Step 5.

Go to step Step 4.

Step 4 In the Browse Alarm tab page on the LMT, check whether alarms such as board fault alarms are reported. If... Alarms such as board fault alarms are reported. Then... 1. Find out the reason according to the alarms and clear them. 2. Go back to step Step 4. Alarms such as board fault alarms are not Go to step Step 5. reported. Step 5 Run the ADD BRD command to add the next XPUa/XPUb board. l Add the XPUa/XPUb board one by one. l Check board status after adding the board. If the board is normal and no alarm is generated, add the next board. Step 6 Configure the new board by referring to Configuring the BTS.
4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

If the BTSs need to be reparented from another SPUa/SPUb to the new board, perform the reparenting by referring to section "Reparenting GSM BTSs" in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide (CME-Based). Visit http://support.huawei.com to download the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide (CME-Based). ----End

4.2.3 Adding Interface Boards


This section describes procedures and precautions for adding interface boards.

Prerequisite
l Network design is complete. Network design involves planning of transmission methods of connecting the interface boards to other NEs, planning of types of interface boards, planning of overloads in each interface board, and planning of slots for holding interface boards. Contact Huawei to obtain the detailed network design and planning scheme. l Cables for connecting the interface boards are ready.
NOTE

Cables for connecting the interface boards are prepared according to the site survey report. Check cables used in the BSC6900 by referring to Cables.

l l

Peer equipment and transmission equipment connected to interface boards are ready. Tools required for installation are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, straight screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

Context

CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves. l It is recommended that you use a board of the same type to replace the board. To use a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, the board of version a replace the board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support. l l When the Data Configuration Modes of the subrack is effective mode, adding interface boards does not interrupt ongoing services of the BSC6900. When the subrack is in ineffective mode, the subrack needs to be restarted to add boards. Restarting subracks interrupts ongoing services.

Procedure
Step 1 If the new interface board adopts E1/T1 transmission or transmission over channelized STM-1 ports, the DIP switch for the board must be set. For example: AEUa/PEUa/EIUa, AOUa/POUa.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-11

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

See DIP Switches on Components to obtain the rules for setting the DIP switches. Step 2 Install the signal cable (Ethernet cable or optical fiber) and cables for extracting clock signals by referring to Installing the Signal Cables. Step 3 Install interface boards by referring to Inserting a Board. Step 4 Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables. Step 5 Configure the new interface boards by referring to Configuring the Interfaces. Step 6 Check the port according to the board type. For example, if the AOUa board is added, run the DSP OPT command to query the optical port status. Step 7 When the RUN on the board blinks every second (1s on, 1s off), run the DSP BRD command to query the new board status. If... The CPU Status is ACTIVE or STANDBY. The CPU Status is other status. Then... Go to step Step 9. Go to step Step 8.

Step 8 In the Browse Alarm tab page on the LMT, check whether alarms such as board fault alarms are reported. If... Alarms such as board fault alarms are reported. Then... 1. Find out the reason according to the alarms and clear them. 2. Go back to step Step 7. Alarms such as board fault alarms are not Go to step Step 9. reported. Step 9 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether software versions of the new boards follow the version mapping of the boards. If... Then...

The software versions of the new boards Go to Step 10. follow the version mapping of the boards. The software versions of the new boards 1. Check whether the program files of the OMUa board in the OMU active workspace do not follow the version mapping of the installation directory\bin\fam are correct. If boards. the program files are incorrect, contact Huawei engineers to obtain the correct files. 2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the board. 3. Go back to step Step 7.
4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

You can obtain the correct board version mapping table by referring to section "Board Versions" in the release notes.

Step 10 Perform dialing test and browse websites to check that the new board provides functions properly. Step 11 Verifying Network Reliability. ----End

4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface


To improve the transmission efficiency and speech quality on the A interface, you can change the transmission mode on the A interface from TDM to IP.

Prerequisite
l l l l l The peer end supports the A over IP mode. The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured in the MPS/EPS subrack. Networking planning is complete. The license A over IP has been activated. The DPUc board is configured in MPS/EPS ofBSC6900.

Context

CAUTION
In A over IP mode, only system clock is supported. The line clock is not supported. Changing the transmission mode on the A interface involves the following scenarios: l l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1

Procedure
l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE 1. Optional: Run the RMV ATERCONSL/RMV ATERSL, RMV ATEROML, and RMV ATERE1T1/RMV ATERCONPATH commands to remove Ater interface data.
NOTE

This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode.

2. 3.

Run the RMV MTP3RT/RMV MTP3LNK, RMV MTP3LKS, and RMV AE1T1 commands to remove A interface data. Run the RMV BRD command to remove the TDM-based interface boards from all the subracks and other service processing boards from the TCS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-13

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Before removing the A interface board, ensure that the line clock carried on the A interface board in the TCS is removed. For details on how to remove the line clock and the clock source, see the description of the SET CLK command and the RMV CLKSRC command.

4.

Optional: Run the RMV SUBRACK command to remove TCS data.


NOTE

This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode. A subrack can be removed only after all the service processing boards in the subrack are removed.

5.

Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Service mode to AIP(AIP).
NOTE

After the service mode of the BSC is changed, the resources to each subrack need to be reloaded. Therefore, you need to run the RST BSC to reset the BSC.

6. 7. 8. 9.

Run the ADD BRD in the MPS/ESP subrack to add an IP-based board. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board. Perform the operations in Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP). Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.

10. Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP). l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1 1. Optional: Run the RMV ATERCONSL/RMV ATERSL, RMV ATEROML, and RMV ATERE1T1/RMV ATERCONPATH commands to remove Ater interface data.
NOTE

This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode.

2. 3. 4.

Run the RMV MTP3RT/RMV MTP3LNK, RMV MTP3LKS, and RMV AE1T1 commands to remove A interface data. Run the RMV BRD command to remove the TDM interface boards and other service processing boards from the TCS. Run the RMV SUBRACK command to remove TCS data.
NOTE

This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode. Before removing the A interface board, ensure that the line clock carried on the A interface board in the TCS is removed. For details on how to remove the line clock and the clock source, see the description of the SET CLK command and the RMV CLKSRC command. A subrack can be removed only after all the service processing boards in the subrack are removed.

5. 6. 7.

Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Service mode to AIP(AIP). Run the ADD BRD in the MPS/ESP subrack to add an IP-based board. Configure the physical layer and the data link layer. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.

4-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

8. 9.

Run the ADD ADJNODE command. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to A(A Interface). Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.

10. Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP). ----End

Example
/*Change the transmission mode on the A interface*/
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=AIP;

/*Configure the physical layer, data link layer, and network layer on the A interface*/
ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, IPADDR="162.4.5.12", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=24, PN=4, IPTYPE=PRIMARY, IPADDR="161.70.2.104", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD IPRT: DSTIP="161.66.2.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="161.70.2.201", PRIORITY=HIGH;

/*Configure the control plane on the A interface*/


ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="BSC"; ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc0", DPX=11, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=H'1000, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=11, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="dpc0"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="M3UALINKSET0"; ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="RT0"; ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCPN=2004, LOCIP1="162.4.5.12", PEERIP1="161.66.2.210", PEERPN=2004, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, NAME="link0";

/*Configure the user plane on the A interface*/


ADD ADJNODE: ANI=5, NAME="A", NODET=A; ADD IPPATH: ANI=5, PATHID=1, ITFT=A, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="162.4.5.12", PEERIPADDR="161.66.2.213", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; ADD TRMMAP: TMI=13, ITFT=A; ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=1, REMARK="A IP"; ADD ADJMAP: ANI=5, ITFT=A, TMIGLD=13, FTI=1;

Follow-up Procedure
Verifying Network Reliability.

4.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the Ater Interface


The TDM transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adjusted to IP transmission mode based on the service requirements.

Prerequisite
l l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The POUc board is configured in the TCS and the MPS/EPS. The optical cable on the POUc board is connected. Network planning is complete.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-15

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context

CAUTION
Reconfiguring the transmission mode applied over the Ater interface will interrupt the services of the BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is low, for example, in the early morning. The whole process (including board restart) takes about 20 minutes. The Ater interface does not support IP over E1/T1/FE/GE. It supports only IP over STM-1, and only the POUc board supports IP over Ater. Table 4-1 Boards Supporting the Ater Interface Board POUc OIUa EIUa Logical Function IP TDM TDM Transmission Mode STM-1 STM-1 E1/T1

Procedure
l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over STM-1 1. 2. Run the RMV ATEROML command to remove the Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS. Remove the Ater connection path. (1) Run the RMV ATERCONPATH command to remove the Ater connection path between the MPS and the main TCS. (2) In TC Pool scenarios, run the RMV ATERE1T1 command to remove the Ater connection path between the BSC6900 and the TC. 3. Add an Ater connection path. (1) Run the ADD ATERCONPATH command to add an Ater connection path between the MPS and the main TCS. (2) In TC Pool scenarios, run the ADD ATERE1T1 command to add an Ater connection path between the BSC6900 and the TC. 4. Run the ADD ATEROML command to add the Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS.
NOTE

l The Ater OML must use four or more successive timeslots, excluding timeslot 1 l It is recommended that an active Ater OML and a standby Ater OML are configured. l When the BIOS version of the EIUa/OIUa board is lower than V215, the active Ater OML must be configured on the Ater connection path of port 0. l In TC Pool scenarios, there is no need to configure the Ater OML for the slave BSC6900.

4-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

5.

Run the ADD ATERSL command to add an Ater signaling link between the MPS/ EP and the TCS.
NOTE

l Timeslot 1 of the local main subrack or remote main subrack is reserved and not allowed for configuration, whereas timeslot 1 of other subracks is allowed for configuration. l The Ater signaling links on each Ater interface board can occupy up to 64 timeslots.

----End

Example
/*Remove the Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS.*/
RMV ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=1;

/*Remove the Ater connection path.*/


RMV ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0;

/*Add an Ater connection path.*/


ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=18, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=14, TCPN=0;

/*Add the Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS.*/
ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1;

/*Add the Ater signaling link between the MPS/EPS and the TCS.*/
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS120&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS2 4-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS; ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=0, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS120&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS2 4-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;

Follow-up Procedure
Verifying Network Reliability.

4.5 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface


To improve the transmission efficiency, increase the throughput, and reduce the transmission delay on the Gb interface, you can change the transmission mode on the Gb interface from FR to IP.

Prerequisite
l l l l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd board is configured. The peer end supports the Gb over IP mode. A PEUa board is replaced by FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board. Networking planning is complete. The license Gb over IP has been activated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-17

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Run the RMV PTPBVC command to remove the PTPBVC corresponding to the cell. Step 2 Run the RMV NSVC command to remove NSVC data. Step 3 Run the RMV BC command to remove BC data. Step 4 Run the RMV NSE command to remove NSE data. Step 5 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the interface board for FR transmission mode. Step 6 Run the ADD NSE command to add the NSE. Step 7 Configure the NSVL. 1. 2. Run the ADD NSVLLOCAL command to add an NSVL at the BSC6900 side. Optional: When the NSE is in static configuration mode, run the ADD NSVLREMOTE command to add the NSVL at the SGSN side.

Step 8 Run the ADD PTPBVC command to add the PTPBVC and to bind the GPRS cell with the NSE. ----End

Example
ADD NSE: NSEI=18013, SRN=0, SN=0, PT=GB_OVER_IP, ISNCMODE=STATIC, CNOPNAME="46000", CNID=0; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=130, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13000, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=131, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13001, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=132, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13002, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=133, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13003, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=134, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13004, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=135, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13005, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=136, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13006, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=137, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13007, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=130, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13000; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=131, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13001; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=132, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13002; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=133, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13003; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=134, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13004; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=135, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13005; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=136, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13006; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=137, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13007;

4.6 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface


To improve the transmission resource utilization, you can change the transmission mode on the Abis interface from TDM to IP.

Prerequisite
l l l l l
4-18

The peer end supports the Abis over IP mode. The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured. Networking planning is complete. The license Abis over IP has been activated. The built-in PCU is used.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

The DPUc board is configured in MPS/EPS of BSC6900.

Context
Changing the transmission mode on the Abis interface consists of the following scenarios: l l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1

Procedure
l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Run the RST BTS command to set the Reset Level to 4-LEVEL to perform a level-4 reset for a BTS. Run the DEA BTS command to deactivate a BTS. Run the RMV BTSCONNECT command to remove the connection to the BTS. Run the ADD BRD command to add the IP-based interface board on the BSC. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board. Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node. Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane.
NOTE

When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTS in L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at the BSC side.

8. 9.

Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Service mode to IP and IP Phy Trans Type to IP_OVER_FE/GE. Run the ADD BTSESN command to add the ESN of the BTS.
NOTE

10. Run the ADD BTSBRD command to add a board for IP transmission mode to a BTS.
Perform this step only when the BTS is a double-transceiver BTS.

11. Run the SET BTSETHPORT command to set the port IP address of the BTS. 12. Run the SET BTSIP command. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC.
NOTE

When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTS in L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at the BTS side.

13. Run the SET BTSIPCLKPARA command to configure the IP clock for the BTS. 14. Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS. l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1 1. 2. 3.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Run the RST BTS command to set the Reset Level to 4-LEVEL to perform a level-4 reset for a BTS. Run the DEA BTS command to deactivate the BTS. Run the ADD BRD command to add the IP-based interface board on the BSC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-19

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4.

Configure the physical layer and the data link layer. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.

5. 6.

Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node. Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane.
NOTE

When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTS in L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at the BSC side.

7. 8. 9.

Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Service mode to IP and IP Phy Trans Type to IP_OVER_E1. Run the MOD BTSCONNECT command to connect the BTS to the port on the new IP-based interface board. Run the ADD BTSESN command to add the ESN of the BTS.

10. Run the SET BTSIP command. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC. 11. Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS. ----End

Example
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/GE; ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, SRN=0, SN=3, BT=PTU; ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=1, IPADDR="11.12.13.14", MASK="255.255.255.0"; SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, CLKPRTTYPE=HW_DEFINED, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT, MASTERIPADDR="10.22.13.22", SYNMODE=CONSYN; ADD BTSESN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, MAINDEVTAB="030GMU1085000422", BAKDEVTAB="1111111111111111"; SET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, PN=0; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, BTSIP="11.12.13.15", BSCIP="11.12.13.14"; ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="BTS3900", NODET=ABIS, BTSID=8; ACT BTS:IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=8; ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;

Follow-up Procedure
Verifying Network Reliability.

4-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

5
About This Chapter

Reconfiguring a BTS

This chapter describes how to reconfigure a BTS. In the case of traffic imbalance, you can adjust the distribution of hardware resources. Reconfiguring BTSs can help to balance the traffic. 5.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTS Changing timeslot assignment on a BTS consists of changing the BTS multiplexing mode and changing the Abis timeslot assignment mode. 5.2 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated Mode When a multi-transceiver unit is used in system capacity expansion, you need to change the BTS from the non-separated mode to the separated mode. 5.3 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base Stations Changing the networking mode of the 3900 series base stations consists of changing the RXU chain into an RXU ring and changing an RXU ring into an RXU chain. 5.4 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSs A single BTS cabinet has limited capacity. To deploy a site of high capacity, you can configure combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs. 5.5 Changing the Frequency Hopping Frequency hopping (FH) is a commonly used spread spectrum communication technology. It is characterized by strong anti-interference, strong anti-attenuation, and high security. The application of FH in the GSM can reduce the interference and increase the system capacity. 5.6 Adjusting the BTS Ring Topology This section describes how to change the non-ring topology to ring topology for a BTS. 5.7 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard This section describes how to adjust the multi-carrier BTS standard. 5.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario) This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data in the scenario using static IP addresses. 5.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-Static IP Scenario)

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data within a BSC6900 in the scenario using non-static IP addresses.

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

5.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTS


Changing timeslot assignment on a BTS consists of changing the BTS multiplexing mode and changing the Abis timeslot assignment mode. 5.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTS When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for timeslots also changes. You can change the multiplexing mode on the Abis interface of a BTS to maximize the resource utilization. 5.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment Mode When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for Abis timeslots also changes. You can change the Abis timeslot assignment mode to maximize the utilization of Abis timeslot resources. 5.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis Timeslots This describes the manual timeslot assignment on the Abis interface. Timeslot assignment on the Abis interface is required when you add BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots. By default, the timeslots are assigned automatically. You can also manually assign timeslots on the Abis interface if required.

5.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTS


When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for timeslots also changes. You can change the multiplexing mode on the Abis interface of a BTS to maximize the resource utilization.

Prerequisite
l The BTS is configured and works properly.

Context

CAUTION
Changing the BTS multiplexing mode may reset the BTS and affect the ongoing services on the BTS. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. Multiplexing mode of Abis timeslots on a BTS is classified into 64 kbit/s statistical multiplexing mode and 16 kbit/s physical multiplexing mode. In addition, the 64 kbit/s statistical multiplexing mode is further classified into the following modes: 1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, and 6:1. It is recommended that the BTS multiplexing mode be changed in the following situations: l l l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

A channel is changed from full rate to half rate. A channel is changed from half rate to full rate. Flex Abis Mode is changed from FIX_16K_ABIS to FLEX_ABIS. Flex Abis Mode is changed from FLEX_ABIS to FIX_16K_ABIS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-3

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to change the multiplexing mode of a BTS. Step 2 Optional: If the command execution in Step 1 fails, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection to the BSC, and then repeat Step 1. ----End

Example
// To add a connection to the BSC, run the following command: ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1; // To change the BTS multiplexing mode, run the following command: MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MPMODE=MODE4_1;

5.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment Mode


When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for Abis timeslots also changes. You can change the Abis timeslot assignment mode to maximize the utilization of Abis timeslot resources.

Prerequisite
l The BTS is configured and works properly.

Context

CAUTION
When Flex Abis Mode is changed from FIX_16K_ABIS to FLEX_ABIS, the BTS is reset, thus affecting the BSC services. When enabling or disabling the flex Abis function, you need to change the Abis timeslot assignment mode. The Abis timeslot modes are as follows: l l l FIX_16K_ABIS FLEX_ABIS FIX_64K_ABIS

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to change the Abis timeslot assignment mode. Step 2 Optional: If the command execution in Step 1 fails, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection to the BSC, and then repeat Step 1. ----End

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

Example
// To add a connection to the BSC, run the following command: ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1; // To change the Abis timeslot assignment mode, run the following command: MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS;

5.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis Timeslots


This describes the manual timeslot assignment on the Abis interface. Timeslot assignment on the Abis interface is required when you add BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots. By default, the timeslots are assigned automatically. You can also manually assign timeslots on the Abis interface if required.

Prerequisite
l The BTS is configured and works properly.

Context

CAUTION
Manually assigning Abis timeslots may reset the BTS and affect the ongoing services. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. Among the timeslots on the Abis interface, only the timeslot for OML can be assigned manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLTS to set Time Slot NO. and Sub Timeslot No. for the OML of the BTS. ----End

Example
// To set the OML timeslot distribution of a BTS, run the following command: SET BTSOMLTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PN=1, TS=31, SUBTS=0;

5.2 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated Mode


When a multi-transceiver unit is used in system capacity expansion, you need to change the BTS from the non-separated mode to the separated mode.

Prerequisite
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The BTS is configured and works properly.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-5

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The current BTS supports the separated mode and is configured with a multi-transceiver unit.

Context

CAUTION
Only the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3012 II support this operation. After this operation, the BTS is reset. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. In non-separated mode, the binding between the TRX board and the logical TRX in a BTS is fixed. In separated mode, the binding between the TRX board and the logical TRX on a BTS is dynamic. When a BTS is changed from the non-separated mode to the separated mode, a QTRU can be configured. In one QTRU, a physical TRX can be bound to six logical TRXs.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSPTMODE to change a BTS from non-separated mode to separated mode. ----End

Example
// To change a BTS from non-separated mode to separated mode, run the following command: SET BTSSPTMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2047;

5.3 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base Stations
Changing the networking mode of the 3900 series base stations consists of changing the RXU chain into an RXU ring and changing an RXU ring into an RXU chain. 5.3.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU Ring To improve the system reliability when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can change RXU chains into an RXU ring. 5.3.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU Chain To expand the system capacity when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can split an RXU ring into an RXU chain.

5.3.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU Ring


To improve the system reliability when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can change RXU chains into an RXU ring.
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

Prerequisite
l l The BTS is configured and works properly. There are idle ports on the GTMU.

Context
The 3900 series base stations consist of the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900B GSM, BTS3900E GSM, and BTS3900L GSM. Only the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, and BTS3900A GSM support this operation. RXU chain and RXU ring indicate the networking modes of the BBUs and RRUs. The BTS3900 GSM is taken as an example. Figure 5-1 shows an RXU chain and an RXU ring. Figure 5-1 RXU ring and RXU chain examples

RXU Chain

RXU ring

UEL P INSIDE OUTSIDE

UELP INSIDE OUTSIDE

The RXU chain can be changed into an RXU ring in the following ways: l l Combining two RXU chains into an RXU ring Changing an RXU chain into an RXU ring

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command CBN BTSRXUCHAIN to combine two RXU chains into an RXU ring or change an RXU chain into an RXU ring. ----End

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Example
// To change an RXU chain into an RXU ring, run the following command: CBN BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CHAINTORING=CHAINTORING, RCN1=0, TCN=0, TSRN=0, TSN=6, TPN=3; // To combine two RXU chains into an RXU ring, run the following command: CBN BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CHAINTORING=COMBINECHAINS, RCN1=0, RCN2=2;

5.3.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU Chain


To expand the system capacity when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can split an RXU ring into an RXU chain.

Prerequisite
l l The BTS is configured and works properly. There is a breaking point in the RXU ring to be split.

Context
Only the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, and BTS3900A GSM support this operation. RXU chain and RXU ring indicate the networking modes of the BBUs and RRUs. The BTS3900 GSM is taken as an example. Figure 5-2 shows an RXU chain and an RXU ring. Figure 5-2 RXU ring and RXU chain examples

RXU Chain

RXU ring

UEL P INSIDE OUTSIDE

UELP INSIDE OUTSIDE

5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SPT BTSRXUCHAIN to split an RXU ring into an RXU chain. ----End

Example
// To split RXU ring 0 on a BTS named 3900 into an RXU chain at breaking point 1, run the following command: SPT BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="3900", RCN=0, SEPARATEPOS=1;

5.4 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSs
A single BTS cabinet has limited capacity. To deploy a site of high capacity, you can configure combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs.

Prerequisite
l The BTS is configured and works properly.

Context
Combined cabinets and cabinet groups can be configured between BTSs to expand the capacity of a site. The common configurations of combined cabinets and cabinet groups are: l l l Combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s. For details, see Table 5-1. Combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3006Cs. For details, see Table 5-2. Cabinet groups between a BTS3012 and a BTS312. For details, see Table 5-3.

Table 5-1 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3012 Cabinet Group No. 0 1 2 Port No. 0~7 8~15 16~23

Table 5-2 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3006C Cabinet Group No. 0 1 Port No. 03 (connected to the BSC6900), 47 (internal connection) 811 (connected to the BSC6900), 1215 (internal connection)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-9

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Cabinet Group No. 2

Port No. 1619 (connected to the BSC6900), 2023 (internal connection)

Table 5-3 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number when cabinet groups are configured between the BTS3012 and BTS312 Cabinet Group No. 0 1 2 Port No. 0~7 8~11 16~19

The configuration of the combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s is taken as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to change the configuration of combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s. ----End

Example
// To change the combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs, run the following command: ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=8, DESTNODE=BTS, UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=0, FPN=1;

5.5 Changing the Frequency Hopping


Frequency hopping (FH) is a commonly used spread spectrum communication technology. It is characterized by strong anti-interference, strong anti-attenuation, and high security. The application of FH in the GSM can reduce the interference and increase the system capacity. 5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FH This section describes how to change none FH to RF FH. 5.5.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FH This section describes how to change none FH to baseband FH. 5.5.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH This section describes how to change RF FH to baseband FH. 5.5.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH This section describes how to change baseband FH to RF FH. 5.5.5 Changing RF FH to None FH
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

This section describes how to change RF FH to none FH. 5.5.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FH This section describes how to change baseband FH to none FH. 5.5.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH This section describes how to change the FH mode to hybrid FH. 5.5.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH This section describes how to change hybrid FH to none FH.

5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FH


This section describes how to change none FH to RF FH.

Prerequisite
l l The BTS is configured and works properly. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

Context
After the FH mode of a none FH cell is changed to RF FH, the system automatically changes the FH mode of all the TRXs in the cell to RF FH.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency. Note that RF_FH(RF_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode for the FH group. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to RF_FH(RF frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different.

Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.5.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FH


This section describes how to change none FH to baseband FH.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-11

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l The BTS is configured and supports baseband FH. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency. Note that BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode for the FH group. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different.

Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.5.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH


This section describes how to change RF FH to baseband FH.

Prerequisite
l l The BTS is configured and supports baseband FH. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP to modify the FH group of the cell. Note that BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of the cell. Specify the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that BaseBand_FH(Baseband_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different.

Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.5.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH


This section describes how to change baseband FH to RF FH.

Prerequisite
l l The BTS is configured and works properly. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP to modify the FH group of the cell. Note that RF_FH(RF FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of the cell. Specify the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to RF_FH(RF frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that RF_FH(RF Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different.

Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.5.5 Changing RF FH to None FH


This section describes how to change RF FH to none FH.

Prerequisite
None

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELLMAGRP to remove the FH group of the cell.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-13

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to NO_FH(No frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that NO_FH(No Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index to 255 and Channel MAIO to 0. Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.5.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FH


This section describes how to change baseband FH to none FH.

Prerequisite
None

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELLMAGRP to remove the FH group of the cell. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to NO_FH(No frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that NO_FH(No Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index to 255 and Channel MAIO to 0. Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.5.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH


This section describes how to change the FH mode to hybrid FH.

Prerequisite
l l The BTS is configured and works properly. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency. Note that RF_FH(RF_FH) or BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode for the FH group. To add more FH groups, repeat this step. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to Hybrid_FH(Hybrid frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE

l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different. l The Hop Mode of the FH group specified by the Channel Hop Index must be consistent with the Hop Type.

Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.5.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH


This section describes how to change hybrid FH to none FH.

Prerequisite
None

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELLMAGRP to remove the FH group of the cell. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to NO_FH(No frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that NO_FH(No Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index to 255 and Channel MAIO to 0. Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End

5.6 Adjusting the BTS Ring Topology


This section describes how to change the non-ring topology to ring topology for a BTS.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-15

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l The EIUa/OIUa/PEUa board is configured. The BTSs are configured in non-ring topology. The BTSs must be in the chain topology, and port 1 of the upper-level BTS must be connected to port 0 of the lower-level BTS.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to YES. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to set the ring topology attributes of the BTS. ----End

5.7 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard


This section describes how to adjust the multi-carrier BTS standard.

Context
By default, the CLASS2 standard is used as the GSM multi-carrier BTS standard. If the CLASS0 standard is recommended at a local site, adjust the standard accordingly.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the GSM multi-carrier BTS standard. In this step, l set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES). l Then adjust GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard as required. ----End

Example
// To deactivate a BTS, run the following command: DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; // To set the parameters related to Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure, run the following command. Assume that the BTS index is 1 and that GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard needs to be set to CLASS0(Class0): SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, MCSTANDARD=CLASS0;

5.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario)


This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data in the scenario using static IP addresses.
5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

Prerequisite
l l l The BTS is a 3900 series base station except the 3900B and 3900E. The BTS software is not earlier than V100R009C00SPC079. The physical connection is complete.

Context
Adjusting BTS connection data in the static IP scenario consists of the following typical scenarios: l l BTS data is reparented between BSCs. BTS data is relocated within a BSC.

Procedure
l BTS data is reparented between BSCs. Figure 5-3 shows an example of how to adjust BTS connection data between BSCs. Figure 5-3 Adjusting BTS connection data between BSCs

1. 2.

As Figure 5-3 shows, create the configuration data of BTS 1 at BSC 2. For details, see Configuring the BTS. At BSC 1, deliver the created BTS 1 configuration data to BTS 1. For details, see 5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission Data.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

5 Reconfiguring a BTS
NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

l After receiving the configuration data from BSC 1, BTS 1 saves the data in the active area and the original configuration data in the standby flash area. l All the MML commands from the BSC belong to O&M commands. After the BTS is reset, the configuration data will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended that the data be delivered before the BTS is reparented. l Before the BTS is reset, you are advised to check whether the delivered data is correct by running the related EXP command. For example, the EXP BTSIPRT command corresponds to the IMP BTSIPRT command. l If the delivered data is different from the BTS 1 configuration data created at BSC 2, BTS 1 may fail to connect to BSC 2 after being reset.

3.

Reset BTS 1.
NOTE

l After BTS 1 is reset, it establishes a connection to BSC 2 by using the configuration data in the active flash area. l If BTS 1 cannot connect to BSC 2 by using the configuration data in the active area in a specified period of time, BTS 1 switches over the active and standby areas and then uses the original configuration data to connect to BSC 1. The time of connection attempts can be set by specifying Retry Number in the ACT BTSIMPDATA command. Each attempt lasts for 25 minutes. l After BTS 1 is successfully connected to BSC 2, the configuration data in the standby area is deleted once an OML is established. This avoids intermittent disruption of transmission. If a transmission fault occurs after data transmission returns to normal, solve the transmission problem immediately. Otherwise, the BTS configuration data cannot be rolled back.

4.

Delete the BTS 1 configuration data from BSC 1. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to remove the BTS connections data.

BTS data is relocated within a BSC. Figure 5-4 shows an example of how to adjust BTS connection data within a BSC. If the ports are on different interface boards, the operation is the same. Figure 5-4 Adjusting BTS connection data within a BSC

1.

As Figure 5-4 shows, deliver data of BTS 1 connected to port 2 through port 1 to BTS 1. For details, see 5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission Data.

5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

l After receiving the configuration data, BTS 1 saves the data in the active area and the original configuration data in the standby flash area. l All the MML commands from the BSC belong to O&M commands. After the BTS is reset, the configuration data will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended that the data be delivered before the BTS is relocated. l Before the BTS is reset, you are advised to check whether the delivered data is correct by running the related EXP command. For example, the EXP BTSIPRT command corresponds to the IMP BTSIPRT command. l If the delivered data is different from the adjusted BTS configuration data that is adjusted in Step 3, the BTS may fail to connect to the BSC after being reset.

2.

Reset BTS 1.
NOTE

l After BTS 1 is reset, it establishes a connection to the BSC by using the configuration data in the active area. l If BTS 1 cannot connect to the BSC by using the configuration data in the active area in a specified period of time, BTS 1 switches over the active and standby areas and then uses the original configuration data to connect to the BSC. The time of connection attempts can be set by specifying Retry Number in the ACT BTSIMPDATA command. Each attempt lasts for 25 minutes. l After BTS 1 is successfully connected to the BSC, the configuration data in the standby area is deleted once an OML is established. This avoids intermittent disruption of transmission. If a transmission fault occurs after data transmission returns to normal, solve the transmission problem immediately. Otherwise, the BTS configuration data cannot be rolled back.

3.

Adjust BTS connection data. For the detailed operation procedure, see the procedure for adjusting IP transmission in 5.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-Static IP Scenario).

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1. 2. Check whether any alarm is reported by the BTS after BTS connection data is adjusted. If any alarm is reported, clear the alarm according to the alarm handling procedure. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to query the state of a specified LAPD link. In this step, set Query type to ABIS(Abis Link). The expected result: The status of all the links is normal. This indicates that the BTS works properly.

5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission Data


This section describes how to deliver BTS transmission data to the destination BSC6900 by running MML commands when static IP addresses are used.

Prerequisite
l l l The BTS is a 3900 series base station except the 3900B and 3900E. The BTS software is not earlier than V100R009C00SPC079. The physical connection is complete.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
According to the transmission mode, the BTS data delivery can be classified into the following scenarios: l l l When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode When IP over E1 is used at a MP site When IP over E1 is used at a PPP site

Procedure
l When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. l Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPPARA to deliver basic IP parameters of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSDEVIP to deliver the IP address of the BTS Ethernet port. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPRT to deliver the BTS route. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSVLAN to deliver the BTS VLAN. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIMPDATA to activate the delivered data. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPPARA to deliver basic IP parameters of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSMPGRP to deliver the BTS MLPPP (MP) group data. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSMPLNK to deliver the BTS MP link data. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPRT to deliver the BTS route. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIMPDATA to activate the delivered data. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPPARA to deliver basic IP parameters of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSPPPLNK to deliver parameters related to the BTS PPP link. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPRT to deliver the BTS route. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIMPDATA to activate the delivered data.

When IP over E1 is used at a MP site 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

When IP over E1 is used at a PPP site 1. 2. 3. 4.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the BTS data is delivered and activated, you need to reset the BTS to make the delivered data take effect.

5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

5.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-Static IP Scenario)


This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data within a BSC6900 in the scenario using non-static IP addresses.

Prerequisite
l l l The physical connection is modified. There are idle ports on the target BTS. The target BSC6900 port is available.

Context
l According to the transmission mode, adjustment of BTS connection data can be classified into the following scenarios: When the BTS uses the TDM/HDLC transmission mode When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode When the BTS uses the IP over E1 transmission mode l l l l If a BTS needs to be adjusted as a lower-level BTS in TDM transmission, it must be connected to the EIUa/OIUa board through the active port of the upper-level BTS. If a BTS needs to be adjusted as a lower-level BTS in HDLC transmission, it must be connected to the PEUa board through the active port of the upper-level BTS. A BTS in IP transmission mode cannot be configured as a lower-level BTS under another BTS. If a BTS needs to be adjusted as a lower-level BTS, a maximum of seven cascading levels are allowed.

Procedure
l When the BTS uses the TDM/HDLC transmission mode 1. 2. 3. l 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT to modify the transmission connection data on the BTS side. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT to set the Ethernet port attributes of the BTS if necessary. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the BTS. Optional: When the BSC6900 and the BTS are on different network segments, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSIPRT to modify the IP route on the BTS side. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSVLAN to modify the VLAN ID and VLAN priority on the BTS side if necessary.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-21

When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode

5.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6. l 1. 2. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT to modify the transmission connection data on the BTS side. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link group). If the type of link carried on the E1/ T1 link is... PPP link Then... Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSPPPLNK to modify the PPP link on the BTS side. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSMPGRP to modify the MLPPP link group on the BTS side. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSMPLNK to modify the PPP link of the BTS if necessary.

When the BTS uses the IP over E1 transmission mode

MLPPP link group

4. 5. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

Reconfiguring the GSM Network

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running base station subsystem (BSS) as required. 6.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches To modify the settings of the network optimization parameters such as frequencies, power control parameters, and power levels of multiple cells at the same time, batch configuration can be applied. 6.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface When the traffic of the BSC6900 increases, the existing signaling links may not meet the traffic load requirement. In this case, the narrowband signaling links at 64 kbit/s can be adjusted to the high-speed signaling links at 2 Mbit/s. 6.3 Reconfiguring a Cell You can modify the cell parameter settings and the neighboring cell relations according to the requirements of service adjustment and capacity expansion. 6.4 Reconfiguring Channels When new features, such as half rate and dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs, are activated on the BSC, you can modify channel attributes to optimize network performance.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches


To modify the settings of the network optimization parameters such as frequencies, power control parameters, and power levels of multiple cells at the same time, batch configuration can be applied.

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context
Batch configuration of network optimization parameters of multiple cells improves the configuration efficiency.

Procedure
Step 1 Get ready the command script of configuring the network optimization parameters of multiple cells in batches, and save the script in the .txt format to the local PC. Step 2 Run the LCK CMCTRL command to lock the system configuration rights.
NOTE

Before the batch execution of the command script, lock the configuration rights to prevent the conflict with other commands.

Step 3 Run the RUN BATCHFILE command to execute the command script in batches. Step 4 Run the ULK CMCTRL command to release the system configuration rights. ----End

Example
/*Lock the system configuration rights*/
LCK CMCTRL: RSNDES=UPGRADE;

/*Execute the command script bat.txt in batches and save the result to the file rst.txt*/
RUN BATCHFILE:SRCF="bat.txt",TYPE=ALL_END_RETURN,RSTF="rst.txt",RCDT=REC_ERR;

/*Release the system configuration rights*/


ULK CMCTRL:;

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

6.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface
When the traffic of the BSC6900 increases, the existing signaling links may not meet the traffic load requirement. In this case, the narrowband signaling links at 64 kbit/s can be adjusted to the high-speed signaling links at 2 Mbit/s.

Prerequisite
l l l l l Network planning is complete. The MSC supports the signaling data rate of 2 Mbit/s. The TDM transmission mode is applied over the A interface. The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. The license for the high-speed signaling link is activated.

Context
A license is required to activate the high-speed signaling link feature. The high-speed signaling link refers to the 2 Mbit/s signaling link. Compared with the 64 kbit/ s signaling link, the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is configured with more timeslots; thus, the signaling transmission capacity of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is greatly enhanced. Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmission does not use high-speed signaling links.

CAUTION
Reconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will interrupt the services of the BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is low, for example, in the early morning. The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.
NOTE

The signaling link rate over the A interface must be negotiated between the BSC6900 and MSC. After adjusting the signaling link rate over the A interface, you must adjust the signaling link rate at the MSC. For details about the configuration at the MSC, see relevant documents of the MSC.

Procedure
l Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface 1. 2.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Run the LST MTP3LNK command to query the configuration data of an MTP3 signaling link over the A interface. Run the RMV MTP3LNK command to remove the MTP3 signaling link.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-3

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

CAUTION
l Removing the signaling link over the A interface will interrupt the services of the BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is low, for example, in the early morning. l The rates of the A interface signaling links in the same link set must be identical. If the rate of one signaling link must be changed from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s, all the signaling links in the link set must be deleted. In addition, the A interface signaling links in the same link set must be configured with the same. 3. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set Link Bear type to MTP2. To set the data rate of the MTP3 signaling link to 2 Mbit/s, set Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s). To set the data rate of the MTP3 signaling link to 64 kbit/s, set Link rate type to 64k(kbit/s). In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set Ater Mask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to other values rather than TS1. 4. Run the RST BRD command to reset the interface board that handles MTP2. The board is the Ater interface board (BM/TC separated) or the A interface board (BM/ TC combined) in the BM subrack to which the SS7 signaling link belongs. When the EIUa/OIUa is in active/standby mode, reset the standby EIUa/OIUa before resetting the active EIUa/OIUa. l Verifying the High-Speed Signaling Links 1. 2. Run the LST MTP3LNK command to query the configuration of an MTP3 signaling link. The Link rate type is 2Mbit/s. Run the DSP N7DPC command to query the status of an SS7 DSP. If the SCCP DSP state included in the returned message is Available, the DSP is reachable, and the newly established signaling link can function properly. If the SCCP DSP state included in the returned message is Unavailable, the newly established signaling link cannot function properly. In this case, check the timeslot settings at the BSC6900 and MSC by referring to the alarm reference on the LMT. ----End

Example
LST MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=3, SIGSLC=0; RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=3, SIGSLC=0; ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=3, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=14, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=16, ATSMASK=TS6-0, LKTATE=2M, NAME="name1"; RST BRD: SRN=0, SN=14, SSN=0; DSP N7DPC: DPX=1, TOSPECSSN=NO;

6.3 Reconfiguring a Cell


You can modify the cell parameter settings and the neighboring cell relations according to the requirements of service adjustment and capacity expansion. 6.3.1 Changing the TRX Power
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

You can change the TRX power in a cell when the cell coverage needs to be adjusted according to network optimization. 6.3.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a Cell To balance traffic load in different cells under one BTS without adding TRXs, you can release the TRX resources in a low-traffic cell, and then assign the TRX resources to a high-traffic cell. 6.3.3 Changing TRX Frequencies When co-channel interference or adjacent-channel interference is generated in a cell, or when frequency replanning is required in the network, you need to change the TRX frequencies. 6.3.4 Changing Neighboring Cell Relations When a cell has redundant neighboring cells or missing neighboring cells, traffic imbalance may occur among cells. Therefore, you need to change the neighboring cell relations. If call drops occur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you can modify the settings of neighboring cell relation parameters.

6.3.1 Changing the TRX Power


You can change the TRX power in a cell when the cell coverage needs to be adjusted according to network optimization.

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context

CAUTION
Changing the TRX power in a cell may affect the ongoing calls in the cell. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET GTRXDEV command to change the TRX power in a cell. ----End

Example
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=5;

6.3.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a Cell


To balance traffic load in different cells under one BTS without adding TRXs, you can release the TRX resources in a low-traffic cell, and then assign the TRX resources to a high-traffic cell.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-5

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context

CAUTION
If timeslots are insufficient after TRXs are added to a cell, run the TID BTSABISTS command to arrange timeslots. Running this command affects the services of the BTS that serves the cell and the services of the lower-level BTSs. After a TRX is removed, the TRX board does not work. After the last TRX of a cabinet group without any configuration data is removed, the cabinet group does not exist in the LMT. The BCCH TRX board cannot be removed.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the RMV GTRX command to remove the logical TRX in a low-traffic cell. Step 2 Run the ADD GTRX command to add a logical TRX. Step 3 Run the ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD command to bind the new logical TRX with the TRX board. Step 4 Run the ACT GTRX command to activate the new logical TRX. ----End

Example
/*Remove a TRX*/
RMV GTRX: TRXID=0;

/*Add a logical TRX*/


ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=0, FREQ=49;

/*Bind the logical TRX with the TRX board*/


ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=0, SN=0;

/*Activate the new logical TRX*/


ACT GTRX: TRXID=0;

6.3.3 Changing TRX Frequencies


When co-channel interference or adjacent-channel interference is generated in a cell, or when frequency replanning is required in the network, you need to change the TRX frequencies.
6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context
NOTE

If you change the TRX frequencies that do not participate in frequency hopping, the cell is not reset. If you change the TRX frequencies that participate in frequency hopping or the BCCH TRX frequency, the cell is reset 10 seconds later. That is, the BSC6900 resets the cell 10 seconds after frequencies are changed. If the services in the cell are not handed over to another cell within 10 seconds, the services in the cell are affected.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD GCELLFREQ command to add a TRX frequency based on the network planning. Step 2 Run the MOD GTRX command to change the TRX frequencies. ----End

Example
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=50, FREQ2=75; MOD GTRX: TRXID=0, FREQ=50;

6.3.4 Changing Neighboring Cell Relations


When a cell has redundant neighboring cells or missing neighboring cells, traffic imbalance may occur among cells. Therefore, you need to change the neighboring cell relations. If call drops occur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you can modify the settings of neighboring cell relation parameters.

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context
Redundant neighboring cell: If cell A is a neighboring cell of cell B but the services in cell B are never or rarely handed over to cell A, cell A is a redundant neighboring cell. Missing neighboring cell: If cell A needs to have cell B as its neighboring cell for service handover but cell B is not configured as a neighboring cell of cell A, cell B is a missing neighboring cell. Through the analysis of related performance measurement counters, you can determine whether a cell is a redundant neighboring cell or missing neighboring cell of the originating cell.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-7

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

You can determine whether a cell is a redundant neighboring cell of the originating cell by measuring the counters related to Outgoing Internal Inter-Cell Handover Measurement per Cell. You can determine whether a cell is a missing neighboring cell of the originating cell by measuring the counters related to Neighbor Cell Level Measurement per Cell.

Procedure
l If a cell has redundant bidirectional neighboring cells, remove them from the neighboring cell list of the cell. 1. Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove a redundant neighboring cell.
NOTE

Running this command can add or remove the neighboring cell only in the originating cell. For redundant bidirectional neighboring cells, you need to perform Step 1 in the originating cell and the neighboring cell.

If a cell has redundant unidirectional neighboring cells, remove them from the neighboring cell list of the originating cell. 1. 2. Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove the redundant neighboring 2G cells. Run the RMV G3GNCELL command to remove the redundant neighboring 3G cells.

If there is a missing bidirectional neighboring cell, add it to the neighboring cell list of the originating cell. 1. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 2G cell. If there is a missing unidirectional neighboring cell, add it to the neighboring cell list of this cell. 1. 2. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 2G cell. Run the ADD G3GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 3G cell.

If call drops occur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you need to modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring cell relations. 1. 2. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command to modify the settings of the parameters related to neighbor relations between 2G cells. Run the MOD G3GNCELL command to modify the settings of the parameters related to neighbor relations between 3G cells.

----End

Example
/*Remove redundant bidirectional neighboring cells*/
RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=0;

/*Remove redundant unidirectional neighboring cells*/


RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; RMV G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;

/*Add missing bidirectional neighboring cells*/


ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=0;

/*Add missing unidirectional neighboring cells*/


6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;

/*Modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring cell relations*/


MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, MINOFFSET=5; MOD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRC3GNCELLNAME="cell1", NBR3GNCELLNAME="TDD-0", RSCPOFF=52, ECNOOFF=35;

6.4 Reconfiguring Channels


When new features, such as half rate and dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs, are activated on the BSC, you can modify channel attributes to optimize network performance. 6.4.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHs You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between the TCH and the SDCCH and to optimize network performance. 6.4.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half Rate You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between full-rate TCHs and half-rate TCHs and thus to optimize network performance.

6.4.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHs


You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between the TCH and the SDCCH and to optimize network performance.

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context
When the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to access the network because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, you need to convert some TCHs to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network. When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs. The dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs can increase the system capacity.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command to set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES. Step 2 Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command to set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 and TCH Minimum Recovery Time. ----End

Example
//Set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES// SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDDYN=YES;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

//Set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 to 3, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum to 100, and TCH Minimum Recovery Time to 80// SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IDLESDTHRES=3, CELLMAXSD=100, MINRESTIMETCH=80;

6.4.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half Rate


You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between full-rate TCHs and half-rate TCHs and thus to optimize network performance.

Prerequisite
l l l The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context
When the traffic volume increases, the half-rate feature can be applied to the CS service to double the number of users without adding TRXs. This helps to fully utilize the existing network resources and reduce costs. When the half-rate CS feature is activated, you need to set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed to YES to avoid timeslot arrangement for half-rate TCHs.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET GTRXDEV command to set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES. Step 2 Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command to set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold. Step 3 Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command to set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed to YES. ----End

Example
/*Set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES*/
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;

/*Set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold*/


SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=60;

/*Set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed to YES*/


SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENTCHADJALLOW=YES;

6-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7
About This Chapter

Configuring GBSS Features

This section describes how to configure the features of the GBSS. 7.1 Overview of Feature Configuration GBSS features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. 7.2 Activating the GSM License This describes how to activate the GSM license. 7.3 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12). 7.4 Configuring IMSI Detach This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach. 7.5 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover. 7.6 Configuring Directed Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607 Directed Retry. 7.7 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment. 7.8 Configuring Call Reestablishment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment. 7.9 Configuring TCH Re-assignment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-1

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.10 Configuring Radio Link Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do not need to be configured. 7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group. 7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure. 7.13 Configuring System Information Sending This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101 System Information Sending. 7.14 Configuring Daylight Saving Time This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving Time (DST). 7.15 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment. 7.16 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806 Signaling Transport Point (STP). 7.17 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code. 7.18 Configuring DRX This section describes how to configure and verify the DRX. 7.19 Configuring BTS Power Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management. 7.20 Configuring Connection with TMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). 7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. 7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity. 7.23 Configuring BTS Clock This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 BTS Clock. 7.24 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).
7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.25 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology) This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology). 7.26 Configuring Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity. 7.27 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115903 4-Way Receive Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines the 4-way receive signals to optimize the quality of uplink signals. 7.28 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity. 7.29 Configuring Dynamic PBT This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT. 7.30 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage. 7.31 Configuring Extended Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001 Extended Cell. 7.32 Configuring Concentric Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell. 7.33 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell. 7.34 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC. 7.35 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network. 7.36 Configuring Flex MAIO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO. 7.37 Configuring ICC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801 ICC. 7.38 Configuring EICC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821 EICC. 7.39 Configuring Frequency Hopping
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-3

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping. The function consists of radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping (FH) and baseband FH. 7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping. 7.41 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping. 7.42 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing. 7.43 Configuring IBCA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002 Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA). 7.44 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network. 7.45 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization. 7.46 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet. 7.47 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm. 7.48 Configuring DTX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801 DTX. 7.49 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. 7.50 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level. 7.51 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass. 7.52 Configuring Active Backup Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control. 7.53 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.
7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.54 Configuring PSU Smart Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control. 7.55 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization. 7.56 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off. 7.57 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111611 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment. 7.58 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment. 7.59 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111613 Weather Adaptive Power Management. 7.60 Configuring Flex Abis This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. 7.61 Configuring BTS Local Switch This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch. 7.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization. 7.63 Configuring Flex Ater This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Flex Ater. 7.64 Configuring BSC Local Switch This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch. 7.65 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission. 7.66 Configuring BTS Ring Topology This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117801 BTS Ring Topology. 7.67 Configuring TRX Mutual Aid This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aid. 7.68 Configuring MSC Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-5

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.69 Configuring the SGSN Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. 7.70 Configuring Abis Bypass This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass. 7.71 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup. 7.72 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy. 7.73 Configuring TC Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission. 7.74 Configuring OML Backup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728 OML Backup. When the OML backup function of the BTS is enabled, the BTS is automatically switched to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML is disconnected, therefore reducing the duration of service disruption. 7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC). 7.76 Configuring Fast Move Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover. 7.77 Configuring Chain Cell Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover. 7.78 Configuring Multi-Site Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell. 7.79 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability. 7.80 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability. 7.81 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover. 7.82 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322 GSM/ WCDMA Load Based Handover.
7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.83 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State. 7.84 Configuring Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114325 Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release. 7.85 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface. 7.86 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface. 7.87 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface. 7.88 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface. 7.89 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface. 7.90 Configuring High Speed Signaling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling. 7.91 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points. 7.92 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection. 7.93 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing. 7.94 Configuring Active Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602 Active Power Control. 7.95 Configuring Ciphering This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate ciphering. 7.96 Configuring Speech Version This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the speech version. 7.97 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR. 7.98 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-7

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can receive the short messages. 7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC). 7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC). 7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR). 7.102 Configuring TFO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701 TFO (Tandem Free Operation). 7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC). 7.104 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC). 7.105 Configuring Voice Quality Index This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index. 7.106 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report. 7.107 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation. 7.108 Configuring VQE3.0 Voice Quality Enhancement 3.0 (VQE3.0) is a feature set that contains five voice quality enhancing features: Automatic Level Control (ALC), Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and Anti-clip (ACLP). The five features improve the user experience when A over TDM transmission is applied. 7.109 Configuring KPIs Based on User Experience This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115707 KPIs Based on User Experience. 7.110 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment. 7.111 Configuring WB AMR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507 WB AMR.
7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.112 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR). 7.113 Configuring QoS ARP&THP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP. 7.114 Configuring PS Active Package Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management. 7.115 Configuring PoC QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905 PoC QoS. 7.116 Configuring PS Service in Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority. 7.117 Configuring NC2 This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2). 7.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC). 7.119 Configuring GPRS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. 7.120 Configruing Network Operation Mode I This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I. 7.121 Configuring EGPRS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS. 7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access. 7.123 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding. 7.124 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching. 7.125 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination. 7.126 Configuring PS Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-9

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.127 Configuring PS Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504 PS Power Control. 7.128 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds. 7.129 Configuring EDA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA). 7.130 Configuring DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151 DTM. 7.131 Configuring Class11 DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM. 7.132 Configuring HMC DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404 HMC DTM. 7.133 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data. 7.134 Configuring Resource Reservation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation. 7.135 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP). 7.136 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call. 7.137 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority. 7.138 Configuring Network Support SAIC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC. 7.139 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115401 NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA). 7.140 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402 BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA). 7.141 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (cell ID + TA) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115403 simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA).
7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.142 Configuring Lb Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404 Lb Interface. 7.143 Configuring Abis over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP. 7.144 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1. 7.145 Configuring Abis MUX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604 Abis MUX. 7.146 Configuring A over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602 A over IP. 7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. 7.148 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission. 7.149 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface. 7.150 Configuring Gb over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603 Gb over IP. 7.151 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118609 IP Fault detection based on BFD. 7.152 Configuring Ethernet OAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM. 7.153 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning. 7.154 Configuring PICO Synchronization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization. 7.155 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning. 7.156 Configuring PICO USB Encryption
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-11

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption. 7.157 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode. 7.158 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization. 7.159 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning. 7.160 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization. 7.161 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off. 7.162 Configuring Local User Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706 Local User Management. 7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate VGCS/VBS. 7.164 Configuring GSM-T Relay This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay. 7.165 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover. 7.166 Configuring Handover Re-establishment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment. 7.167 Configuring RAN Sharing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing. 7.168 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell. 7.169 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based Handover. 7.170 Configuring MSRD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801 Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD). 7.171 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink
7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC). 7.172 Configuring the EGPRS2-A This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A. 7.173 Configuring Latency Reduction This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction. 7.174 Configuring License Control for Urgency This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency. 7.175 Configuring Access Control Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002 Access Control Class(ACC). 7.176 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g. 7.177 Configuring NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS. 7.178 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g. 7.179 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g. 7.180 Configuring GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511206 GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority. 7.181 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE. 7.182 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage. 7.183 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality. 7.184 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load. 7.185 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-13

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.186 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted Cell Change. 7.187 Configuring SRVCC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC). 7.188 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA. 7.189 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402 Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g. 7.190 Configuring Multiple CCCHs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs. 7.191 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM). 7.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501 IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS). 7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504 TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS). 7.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601 Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).

7-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.1 Overview of Feature Configuration


GBSS features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. Table 7-1 lists the GBSS basic features. Table 7-2 lists the GBSS optional features. Table 7-1 GBSS Basic Feature List Feature ID GBFD-110000 GBFD-110001 GBFD-110030 GBFD-110101 GBFD-110201 GBFD-110202 Feature Name GBSS9.0 System Improvement GBSS12.0 System Improvement 3GPP Protocol Compliance Frequency Band Telephone Service (TS11) Emergency Call Service (TS12) Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22) G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) Bearer Service Location Updating IMSI Detach CS Paging Authentication HUAWEI I Handover Direct Retry SDCCH Handover Basic Cell Selection Basic Cell Re-selection Configuration Method None None None None None 7.3 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12) None

GBFD-110203

GBFD-110204 GBFD-110205 GBFD-110301 GBFD-110302 GBFD-110303 GBFD-110304 GBFD-110601 GBFD-110607 GBFD-110608 GBFD-110401 GBFD-110402

None None None 7.4 Configuring IMSI Detach None None 7.5 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover 7.6 Configuring Directed Retry None None None

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID GBFD-110501 GBFD-110502

Feature Name Call Control Assignment and Immediate Assignment Call Reestablishment TCH Re-assignment TRX Management Radio Link Management Radio Common Channel Management Radio Dedicated Channel Management Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm Configuration Management Performance Management Inventory Management Faulty Management Security Management DBS Topology Maintenance BTS/NodeB Software USB Download O&M of BTS O&M of BSC BTS Test Function Integrated Network Management Interface Man Machine Language (MML) BSC/RNC Software Management

Configuration Method None 7.7 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment 7.8 Configuring Call Reestablishment 7.9 Configuring TCH Reassignment None 7.10 Configuring Radio Link Management None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None

GBFD-110503 GBFD-112501 GBFD-111001 GBFD-111002 GBFD-111003 GBFD-111004 GBFD-111005 MRFD-210301 MRFD-210302 MRFD-210303 MRFD-210304 MRFD-210305 MRFD-210309 MRFD-210310 GBFD-111202 GBFD-111203 GBFD-111207 GBFD-111210 GBFD-116501 MRFD-210401

7-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID MRFD-210402 GBFD-111213 MRFD-210403 GBFD-111501

Feature Name BTS/NodeB Software Management Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software License Management BTS Combined Cabinet

Configuration Method None None None 7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs 7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs None None None None None None None None None

GBFD-111502

BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group

GBFD-118801 MRFD-210204 MRFD-210205 MRFD-210206 GBFD-111701 GBFD-111705 GBFD-112301 GBFD-111214 GBFD-111211

BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing Star Topology Chain Topology Tree Topology Board Switchover GSM Flow Control Remote EAC Maintenance Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room System Redundancy Operate System Security Management Link aggregation BSC/RNC Resource Sharing Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance Processing of Measurement Report

MRFD-210101 MRFD-210102 MRFD-210103 MRFD-210104 GBFD-117804

None None None None 7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure None None

GBFD-110901 GBFD-110801

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID GBFD-110802 GBFD-111101 GBFD-111102 GBFD-111901 GBFD-116101 GBFD-113001 GBFD-112401 GBFD-111806 GBFD-111802 MRFD-210801 MRFD-210802 GBFD-112203 GBFD-111301 GBFD-114802 GBFD-111601 GBFD-110703 GBFD-111801 GBFD-119001 GBFD-111803 GBFD-111804 GBFD-111805

Feature Name Pre-processing of Measurement Report System Information Sending Forced System Information Sending by OMC Supporting Three-Digit MNC Support of Daylight Saving Time SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment Cell Frequency Scan STP (Signaling Transport Point) 14-Digit Signaling Point Code Interface Message Tracing User Signaling Tracing Cell Tracing LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface Discontinuous Reception (DRX) BTS Power Management Enhanced Power Control Algorithm Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing Gb Interface Function A Interface Circuit Management A Interface Protocol Process A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring

Configuration Method None 7.13 Configuring System Information Sending None None 7.14 Configuring Daylight Saving Time 7.15 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment None 7.16 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP) 7.17 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code None None None None 7.18 Configuring DRX 7.19 Configuring BTS Power Management None None None None None None

7-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID GBFD-119101 GBFD-119102 GBFD-119103 GBFD-119104 GBFD-119105 GBFD-119106 GBFD-119107 GBFD-119108 GBFD-119109 GBFD-119110 GBFD-119111 GBFD-119112 GBFD-119113 GBFD-119115 GBFD-119116 GBFD-119117 MRFD-210601 MRFD-210602 MRFD-210604 MRFD-210501 MRFD-210502 GBFD-119301 MRFD-210701 MRFD-210001

Feature Name Packet Channel Combination Type Packet System Information MS Types MAC Mode RLC Mode Coding Scheme Networking Control Mode Network Operation Mode Support QoS(Best Effort) Access Assignment PS Paging Timing Advance Update Power Control Packet Uplink Flow Control Flow Control on Gb Interface Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) Remote Electrical Tilt 2-Antenna Receive Diversity BTS/NodeB Clock BSC/RNC Clock Voice Fault Diagnosis Documentation Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface(GBTS)

Configuration Method None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None 7.20 Configuring Connection with TMA 7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt 7.22 Configuring 2Antenna Receive Diversity 7.23 Configuring BTS Clock None None None 7.24 Configuring Multimode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-19

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID MRFD-210002

Feature Name Multi-mode BS RRU/RFU star-connection with separate CPRI interface(GBTS)

Configuration Method None

Table 7-2 GBSS Optional Feature List Feature ID Feature Name License Control Item Multitransceivers supporting PBT transmit Resource (per TRX) Multitransceivers supporting diversity transmit Resource (per TRX) Multitransceivers supporting 4way receive diversity Resource (per TRX) Dynamic PBT Resource (per TRX) License Configured on... BSC6900 Configuration Method 7.25 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology) 7.26 Configuring Transmit Diversity

GBFD-115901

PBT(Power Boost Technology)

GBFD-115902

Transmit Diversity

BSC6900

GBFD-115903

4-Way Receiver Diversity

BSC6900

7.27 Configuring 4Way Receiver Diversity

GBFD-118101

Dynamic Transmit Diversity

BSC6900

7.28 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity 7.29 Configuring Dynamic PBT 7.30 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage

GBFD-118102

Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology) Enhanced EDGE Coverage

Dynamic PBT Resource (per TRX) Enhanced EDGE Coverage(per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-118104

BSC6900

7-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Extended cell Resource (per Cell) Concentric Cell Function (per TRX) Co-BCCH Cell Function (per TRX) Multi-band sharing one BSC Function (per TRX) Enhanced DualBand Network Function (per TRX) Flex MAIO Function (per TRX) ICC(Inference Counteract Combine) Function (per TRX) the EICC Function (per TRX) Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX) BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.31 Configuring Extended Cell 7.32 Configuring Concentric Cell 7.33 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell 7.34 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC 7.35 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network 7.36 Configuring Flex MAIO 7.37 Configuring ICC

GBFD-114001

Extended Cell

GBFD-113201

Concentric Cell

BSC6900

GBFD-114501

Co-BCCH Cell

BSC6900

GBFD-114401

Multi-band Sharing One BSC

BSC6900

GBFD-114402

Enhanced DualBand Network

BSC6900

GBFD-117001

Flex MAIO

BSC6900

GBFD-115801

ICC

BSC6900

GBFD-115821

EICC

BSC6900

7.38 Configuring EICC 7.39 Configuring Frequency Hopping 7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

GBFD-113701

Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

BSC6900

GBFD-113702

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-21

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Antenna Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX) BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing Function (per TRX) E-GSM and RGSM RF Band Function (per TRX) IBCA Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.41 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping 7.42 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing None

GBFD-113703

Antenna Frequency Hopping

GBFD-118001

BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

BSC6900

GBFD-114901

Support for EGSM and RGSM Frequency Band IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation) SoftSynchronized Network

BSC6900

GBFD-117002

BSC6900

7.43 Configuring IBCA 7.44 Configuring SoftSynchronized Network 7.45 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronizatio n None

GBFD-118201

Soft Synchronizatio n Function (per TRX) BTS GPS Synchronizatio n Function (per TRX) Clock over IP Function (per TRX) Clock over IP support 1588V2 Function (per TRX) Synchronous Ethernet(per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-510401

BTS GPS Synchronizatio n

BSC6900

GBFD-118606

Clock over IP

BSC6900

GBFD-118620

Clock over IP support 1588v2

BSC6900

None

GBFD-118202

Synchronous Ethernet

BSC6900

7.46 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

7-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Huawei III Power Control Algorithm(per TRX) Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Downlink Function (per TRX) Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Uplink Function (per TRX) Dynamic Shutdown Trx PA Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.47 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm 7.48 Configuring DTX

GBFD-117601

HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm

GBFD-114801

Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)Downlink

BSC6900

GBFD-114803

Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink

BSC6900

7.48 Configuring DTX

GBFD-111602

TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

BSC6900

7.49 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown 7.50 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level 7.51 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass 7.52 Configuring Active Backup Power Control 7.53 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
7-23

GBFD-111603

TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level

Time slot Intelligent Power Optimization Function (per TRX) Intelligent Combiner Bypass Function (per TRX) Active Backup Power Control Function (per TRX) Power Optimization Based on Channel Type Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-111604

Intelligent Combiner Bypass

BSC6900

GBFD-111605

Active Backup Power Control

BSC6900

GBFD-111606

Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item PSU Smart Control Function (per TRX) Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization Function (per TRX) Dynamic Cell Power Off Function (per TRX) TRX Working Voltage Adjustment Function(per TRX) Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Function (per TRX) Weather Adaptive Power Management (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.54 Configuring PSU Smart Control 7.55 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization 7.56 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off 7.57 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment 7.58 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment 7.59 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management None

GBFD-111608

PSU Smart Control

GBFD-111609

Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization

BSC6900

GBFD-111610

Dynamic Cell Power Off

BSC6900

GBFD-111611

TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

BSC6900

GBFD-111612

Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation

BSC6900

GBFD-111613

Weather Adaptive Power Management

BSC6900

GBFD-116701

16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface Flex Abis

16K LAPD Function (per TRX) Flex Abis Resource (per TRX) BTS local switching Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-117301

BSC6900

7.60 Configuring Flex Abis 7.61 Configuring BTS Local Switch

GBFD-117702

BTS Local Switch

BSC6900

7-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Transmission optimization on the Abis interface Resource (per TRX) Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution Function (per TRX) Flex Ater Function (per TRX) BSC Local Switching Resource (per TRX) Ater Compression Transmission Function (per TRX) TrFO Function (per TRX) Multi-Cell Function Function (per TRX) Ring topology Function (per TRX) TRX Cooperation Function (per TRX) MSC POOL Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization None

GBFD-118401

Abis Transmission Optimization

GBFD-112013

Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

BSC6900

GBFD-116901

Flex Ater

BSC6900

7.63 Configuring Flex Ater 7.64 Configuring BSC Local Switch 7.65 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission None None

GBFD-117701

BSC Local Switch

BSC6900

GBFD-116902

Ater Compression Transmission

BSC6900

GBFD-115702 GBFD-114601

TrFO Multi-Cell Function

BSC6900 BSC6900

GBFD-117801

Ring Topology

BSC6900

7.66 Configuring BTS Ring Topology 7.67 Configuring TRX Mutual Aid 7.68 Configuring MSC Pool

GBFD-113801

TRX Cooperation

BSC6900

GBFD-117401

MSC Pool

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-25

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Gb Flex Function (per 64Kbps) Abis Bypass Function (per TRX) Fast Ring Network Switch Function (per TRX) Robust Air Interface Signalling Function (per TRX) Abis Transmission Backup Function (per TRX) BSC Node Redundancy Function (per TRX) TC Pool Function (per TRX) OML Backup Function (per TRX) AFC Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.69 Configuring the SGSN Pool 7.70 Configuring Abis Bypass None

GBFD-119701

SGSN Pool

GBFD-116601

Abis Bypass

BSC6900

GBFD-117802

Fast Ring Network Switch

BSC6900

GBFD-113721

Robust Air Interface Signalling

BSC6900

None

GBFD-117803

Abis Transmission Backup

BSC6900

7.71 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup 7.72 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy 7.73 Configuring TC Pool 7.74 Configuring OML Backup 7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) 7.76 Configuring Fast Move Handover

GBFD-113725

BSC Node Redundancy

BSC6900

GBFD-113726

TC Pool

BSC6900

GBFD-113728

OML Backup

BSC6900

GBFD-510101

AFC(Automatic Frequency Correction)

BSC6900

GBFD-510102

Fast Move Handover

High Speed PBGT Switch

BSC6900

7-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Chain Cell Handover Function (per TRX) Multi-site Cell Function (per TRX) Intersystem Handover & Reselection Function (per TRX) Intersystem Handover & Reselection Function (per TRX) Intersystem Handover due to Service Function (per TRX) Intersystem Handover due to Load Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.77 Configuring Chain Cell Handover 7.78 Configuring Multi-Site Cell 7.79 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Interoperabilit y 7.80 Configuring GSM/TDSCDMA Interoperabilit y 7.81 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Service Based Handover 7.82 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Load Based Handover 7.83 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State 7.84 Configuring Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

GBFD-510103

Chain Cell Handover

GBFD-510104

Multi-site Cell

BSC6900

GBFD-114301

GSM/WCDMA Interoperability

BSC6900

GBFD-114302

GSM/TDSCDMA Interoperability

BSC6900

GBFD-114321

GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

BSC6900

GBFD-114322

GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

BSC6900

GBFD-114323

2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State Function (per TRX) Fast 3G Reselection at 2G Cs Call Release Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-114325

Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-27

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Site Supporting Satellite Transmission Resource (per Site) Satellite Transmission over A Interface Function (per TRX) Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface Function (per TRX) Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface Function (per TRX) Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface Function (per 64Kbps) High Speed Signaling Function (per TRX) Local Multiple Signaling Points Function (per TRX) Semipermanent Connection Resource (per LINK)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.85 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface 7.86 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface 7.87 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface 7.88 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface 7.89 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface 7.90 Configuring High Speed Signaling 7.91 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points 7.92 Configuring SemiPermanent Connection
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBFD-113901

Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface

GBFD-113902

Satellite Transmission over A Interface

BSC6900

GBFD-113903

Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

BSC6900

GBFD-113904

Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface

BSC6900

GBFD-113905

Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

BSC6900

GBFD-115201

High Speed Signaling

BSC6900

GBFD-115301

Local Multiple Signaling Points

BSC6900

GBFD-114701

SemiPermanent Connection

BSC6900

7-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing Function (per TRX) Maintenance Mode Alarm Function (per TRX) Active Power Control Function (per TRX) Encryption (A5/1,A5/2) Function (per TRX) Encryption (A5/3) Function (per TRX) Enhanced Encryption Function (per TRX) Encrypted Network Management Function (per TRX) NAT Beside OM Function (per TRX) Enhanced Full Rate Function (per TRX) Half Rate Resource (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.93 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing None

GBFD-116401

End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

GBFD-116402

Maintenance Mode Alarm

BSC6900

GBFD-117602

Active Power Control

BSC6900

7.94 Configuring Active Power Control None

GBFD-113501

A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization Encrypted Network Management

BSC6900

GBFD-113503

BSC6900

7.95 Configuring Ciphering None

GBFD-113521

BSC6900

GBFD-113522

BSC6900

None

GBFD-113523

NAT Beside OM Enhanced Full Rate Half Rate Speech

BSC6900

None

GBFD-113301

BSC6900

7.96 Configuring Speech Version 7.96 Configuring Speech Version

GBFD-113401

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-29

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function (per TRX) Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) Function (per TRX) Simplified Cell Broadcast Function (per TRX) Automatic Level Control Function (per TRX) Acoustic Echo Cancellation Function (per TRX) Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) Function (per TRX) TFO Function (per TRX) Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.97 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR 7.98.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) 7.98.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast 7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC) 7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) 7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) 7.102 Configuring TFO 7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)

GBFD-113402

Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

GBFD-113601

Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)

BSC6900

GBFD-113602

Simplified Cell Broadcast

BSC6900

GBFD-115601

Automatic Level Control (ALC)

BSC6900

GBFD-115602

Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)

BSC6900

GBFD-115603

Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)

BSC6900

GBFD-115701

TFO

BSC6900

GBFD-115703

Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)

BSC6900

7-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) Function (per TRX) Voice Quality Index (VQI) Function (per TRX) Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR) Function (per TRX) BTS power lift for handover Function (per TRX) Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation Function (per TRX) VQE3.0 (per TRX) KPIs Based on User Experience (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.104 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) 7.105 Configuring Voice Quality Index 7.106 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report None

GBFD-115704

Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)

GBFD-116801

Voice Quality Index (Uplink VQI) Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR)

BSC6900

GBFD-117501

BSC6900

GBFD-117101

BTS power lift for handover

BSC6900

GBFD-115522

Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation

BSC6900

7.107 Configuring Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation 7.108 Configuring VQE3.0 7.109 Configuring KPIs Based on User Experience 7.96 Configuring Speech Version 7.96 Configuring Speech Version 7.96 Configuring Speech Version

GBFD-115705

VQE3.0

BSC6900

GBFD-115707

KPIs Based on User Experience

BSC6900

GBFD-115501

AMR FR

AMR Resource (per TRX) AMR HR Function (per TRX) AMR Power Control Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-115502

AMR HR

BSC6900

GBFD-115503

AMR Power Control

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-31

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment Function (per TRX) AMR Wireless Link Timer Function (per TRX) AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment Function (per TRX) WB AMR Resource (per TRX) GBR Qos Function (per 64Kbps) QoS Function (per 64Kbps)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.96 Configuring Speech Version

GBFD-115504

AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment

GBFD-115505

AMR Wireless Link Timer

BSC6900

7.96 Configuring Speech Version 7.110 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment 7.111 Configuring WB AMR 7.112 Configuring Streaming QoS (GBR) 7.113 Configuring QoS ARP&THP 7.114 Configuring PS Active Package Management 7.115 Configuring PoC QoS None

GBFD-115506

AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment

BSC6900

GBFD-115507

WB AMR

BSC6900

GBFD-119901

Streaming QoS (GBR)

BSC6900

GBFD-119902

QoS ARP&THP

BSC6900

GBFD-119904

PS Active Package Management

PS Active Queue Management Function (per 64Kbps) PoC QoS Function (per TRX) Conversational Qos Function (per 64Kbps) PS Service in Priority (Per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

GBFD-119905

PoC QoS

BSC6900

GBFD-119906

Conversational QoS PS Service in Priority

BSC6900

GBFD-119907

BSC6900

7.116 Configuring PS Service in Priority

7-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item NACC Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.117 Configuring NC2 7.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) 7.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) 7.119 Configuring GPRS 7.120 Configruing Network Operation Mode I None

GBFD-116201

NetworkControlled Cell Reselection (NC2) Intra BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) Packet SI Status

GBFD-116301

NC2 Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-119801

Packet SI Status (PSI) Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

GBFD-114101

GPRS

GPRS Software Function (per TRX) Network operation mode I Function (per 64Kbps) CS3/CS4 Function (per 64Kbps) EDGE Resource (per TRX) GB Over FR Resource (per 64Kbps) 11-Bit EGPRS Access Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

GBFD-510001

Network Operation Mode I

BSC6900

GBFD-118901

CS-3/CS-4

BSC6900

GBFD-114201

EGPRS

BSC6900

7.121 Configuring EGPRS None

GBFD-510002

Gb Over FR

BSC6900

GBFD-119201

11-Bit EGPRS Access

BSC6900

7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-33

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS Function (per 64Kbps) Extended Uplink TBF Function (per 64Kbps) Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding Function (per 64Kbps) Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency Function (per 64Kbps) Packet Channel Dispatching Function (per 64Kbps) Load Sharing Function (per 64Kbps) Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels Function (per 64Kbps) BSS Paging Coordination Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access

GBFD-119202

Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS

GBFD-119203

Extended Uplink TBF

BSC6900

7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access 7.123 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding None

GBFD-119204

Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding

BSC6900

GBFD-119205

Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency

BSC6900

GBFD-119302

Packet Channel Dispatching

BSC6900

7.124 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching None

GBFD-119303

Load Sharing

BSC6900

GBFD-119501

Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels

BSC6900

None

GBFD-119305

BSS Paging Coordination

BSC6900

7.125 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination

7-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item PS Handover Function (per 64Kbps) Early TBF Establishment Function (per 64Kbps) PS Power Control (Per 64Kbps) Two Thresholds PDCH Dynamic Adjustment (Per 64Kbps)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.126 Configuring PS Handover None

GBFD-119502

PS Handover

GBFD-119503

Early TBF Establishment

BSC6900

GBFD-119504

PS Power Control

BSC6900

7.127 Configuring PS Power Control 7.128 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds 7.129 Configuring EDA None

GBFD-119505

PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds

BSC6900

GBFD-119401

Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) MS High Multislot Classes DTM

EDA Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

GBFD-119402

Terminal multislot classes Function (per TRX) DTM Function (per 64Kbps) DTM High Multi-slot class 11 Function (per 64Kbps) HMC DTM Function (per 64Kbps) 14.4Kbps Circuit Switched Data Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-114151

BSC6900

7.130 Configuring DTM 7.131 Configuring Class11 DTM 7.132 Configuring HMC DTM 7.133 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data

GBFD-119403

Class11 DTM

BSC6900

GBFD-119404

HMC DTM

BSC6900

GBFD-119405

14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-35

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Channel Reserved Function (per TRX) eMLPP Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.134 Configuring Resource Reservation 7.135 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) 7.136 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call 7.137 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority 7.138 Configuring Network Support SAIC 7.139 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) 7.140 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) 7.141 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (cell ID + TA)

GBFD-116001

Resource Reservation

GBFD-115001

Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP)

BSC6900

GBFD-110521

Guaranteed Emergency Call

Guaranteed Emergency Call Function (per TRX) Flow Control Based on Cell Priority Function (per TRX) SAIC Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-115002

Flow Control Based on Cell Priority

BSC6900

GBFD-118103

Network Support SAIC

BSC6900

GBFD-115401

NSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)

NSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA) Function (per TRX) LCS(CELL ID +TA) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-115402

BSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)

BSC6900

GBFD-115403

Simple Mode LCS(Cell ID + TA)

Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

7-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Lb Interface

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.142 Configuring Lb Interface 7.143 Configuring Abis over IP 7.144 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1 7.145 Configuring Abis MUX 7.146 Configuring A over IP 7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1 7.148 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission 7.149 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface 7.150 Configuring Gb over IP None None

GBFD-115404

Lb Interface

GBFD-118601

Abis over IP

Abis Over IP Resource (per TRX) Abis IP Over E1/T1 Resource (per TRX) Abis MUX Function (per TRX) A Over IP Function (per TRX) A IP over E1 Function (per TRX) UDP MUX for A Transmission Function (per TRX) TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-118611

Abis IP over E1/ T1

BSC6900

GBFD-118604

Abis MUX

BSC6900

GBFD-118602

A over IP

BSC6900

GBFD-118622

A IP over E1/T1

BSC6900

GBFD-118610

UDP MUX for A Transmission

BSC6900

GBFD-118623

TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface

BSC6900

GBFD-118603

Gb over IP

GB Over IP Resource (per 64Kbps) IP QoS Function (per TRX) IP Performance Monitor Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-118605 GBFD-118607

IP QOS IP Performance Monitor

BSC6900 BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-37

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item IP Fault Detection based on BFD(per TRX) Ethernet OAM Function (per TRX) PICO Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.151 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD 7.152 Configuring Ethernet OAM 7.153 Configuring PICO/ Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning 7.154 Configuring PICO Synchronizatio n 7.155 Configuring PICO Dualband Autoplanning 7.156 Configuring PICO USB Encryption None

GBFD-118609

IP Fault Detection Based on BFD Ethernet OAM

GBFD-118630

BSC6900

GBFD-510601

PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning

BSC6900

GBFD-510602

PICO Synchronizatio n

PICO Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-510603

PICO Dualband Autoplanning

PICO Dualband Autoplanning(per TRX) PICO USB Encryption(per TRX) PICO Access Control List (ACL)(per TRX) PICO Sleeping Mode(per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-510604

PICO USB Encryption

BSC6900

GBFD-510605

PICO Access Control List (ACL) PICO Sleeping Mode

BSC6900

GBFD-510606

BSC6900

7.157 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode 7.158 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization

GBFD-510607

PICO Automatic Optimization

PICO Automatic Optimization (per TRX)

BSC6900

7-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Easy GSM Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.153 Configuring PICO/ Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning 7.159 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning 7.160 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization 7.161 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off 7.162 Configuring Local User Management 7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS

GBFD-510701

Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning

GBFD-510702

Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

Easy GSM Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-510704

Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization

Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-510705

Compact BTS Timing Power Off

Compact BTS Timing Power Off(per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-510706

Local User Management

Local User Management (per TRX) Basic Voice Group Call Service(VGCS) Resource (per TRX) Late Group Call Channel Assignment Function (per TRX) Single Channel Group Call Originating Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

GBFD-510301

Public Voice Group Call Service

BSC6900

GBFD-510303

Late Broadcast Channel Assignment

BSC6900

7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS

GBFD-510305

Single Channel Group Call Originating

BSC6900

7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-39

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Talker Identification function (per TRX) Group Call EMLPP Function (per TRX) Fast Group Call Setup Function (per TRX) Group Call Reliability Enhancing Function (per TRX) Basic Voice Broadcast Service(VBS) Resource (per TRX) Late Broadcast Channel Assignment Function (per TRX) GSM-T Relay (per TRX) HUAWEI II Handover Function (per TRX) Handover Reestablishment Function (per TRX) RAN Sharing Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS 7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS 7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS 7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS

GBFD-510306

Talker Identification

GBFD-510307

Group Call EMLPP

BSC6900

GBFD-510308

Fast Group Call Setup Group Call Reliability Enhancing

BSC6900

GBFD-510309

BSC6900

GBFD-510302

Public Voice Broadcast Service

BSC6900

7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS

GBFD-510304

Late Broadcast Channel Assignment

BSC6900

7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS

GBFD-510310

GSM-T Relay

BSC6900

7.164 Configuring GSM-T Relay 7.165 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover 7.166 Configuring Handover Reestablishment 7.167 Configuring RAN Sharing

GBFD-510501

HUAWEI II Handover

BSC6900

GBFD-510502

Handover Reestablishment

BSC6900

GBFD-118701

RAN Sharing

BSC6900

7-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item MOCN Common Cell (per TRX) IMSI Based Handover(per TRX) MSRD Function (per TRX) Dual Carriers in Downlink Function (per TRX) Uplink EGPRS2-A Resource (per TRX) Downlink EGPRS2-A Resource (per TRX) Latency Reduction Function (per 64Kbps) 2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization Function (per TRX) License Control for Urgency Function (per TRX) Access Control Class(per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.168 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell 7.169 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover 7.170 Configuring MSRD 7.171 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink 7.172 Configuring the EGPRS2-A 7.172 Configuring the EGPRS2-A 7.173 Configuring Latency Reduction None

GBFD-118702

MOCN Shared Cell

GBFD-118703

IMSI-Based Handover

BSC6900

GBFD-510801

MSRD

BSC6900

GBFD-510802

Dual Carriers in Downlink

BSC6900

GBFD-510803

Uplink EGPRS2-A

BSC6900

GBFD-510804

Downlink EGPRS2-A

BSC6900

GBFD-510805

Latency Reduction

BSC6900

GBFD-510901

2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization

BSC6900

GBFD-511001

License Control for Urgency

BSC6900

7.174 Configuring License Control for Urgency 7.175 Configuring Access Control Class

GBFD-511002

Access Control Class(ACC)

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-41

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Handover Based on Load on Iur-g Function (per TRX) NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g Function (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.176 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g 7.177 Configuring NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS 7.178 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g 7.179 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g 7.180 Configuring GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority 7.181 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE

GBFD-511101

Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

GBFD-511102

NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS

BSC6900

GBFD-511103

GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

BSC Load Balancing Based on Iur-g Function (per TRX) BSC Service Distribution Based on Iur-g Function (per TRX) None

BSC6900

GBFD-511104

GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

BSC6900

GBFD-511206

GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority

None

GBFD-511301

Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE

Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE(per TRX)

BSC6900

7-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage (per TRX) PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality(per TRX) PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load (per TRX) PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Mode Priority (per TRX) GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover (per TRX) eNC2 Between GSM and LTE (per TRX) eNACC Between GSM and LTE (per TRX) SRVCC (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.182 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage 7.183 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality 7.184 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load None

GBFD-511302

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage

GBFD-511303

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality

BSC6900

GBFD-511304

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load

BSC6900

GBFD-511305

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Mode Priority GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover eNC2 Between GSM and LTE

BSC6900

GBFD-511306

BSC6900

None

GBFD-511307

BSC6900

7.185 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE 7.186 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE 7.187 Configuring SRVCC

GBFD-511308

eNACC Between GSM and LTE

BSC6900

GBFD-511309

SRVCC

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-43

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TDSCDMA(per TRX) Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/ TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g (per TRX)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 7.188 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TDSCDMA 7.189 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/ TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g 7.190 Configuring Multiple CCCHs 7.191 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM) 7.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS side (GBTS) 7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)

GBFD-511401

Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TDSCDMA

GBFD-511402

Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/ TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g

BSC6900

GBFD-511501

Multiple CCCHs

Multiple CCCH (per TRX)

BSC6900

MRFD-211801

Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM)

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing

BSC6900

MRFD-211501

IP-Based Multimode CoTransmission on BS side (GBTS)

None

None

MRFD-211504

TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)

None

None

7-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission (per Site) None

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method None

MRFD-211505

Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission (GBTS) Multi-mode BS Common Reference Clock(GBTS)

MRFD-211601

None

7.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)

7.2 Activating the GSM License


This describes how to activate the GSM license.

Prerequisite
l l l The BSC6900 is in service. The LMT is started and you are logged in to the BSC6900. The valid BSC6900 license is obtained and stored in the OMU active workspace \FTP \License

Procedure
Step 1 Run LST LICENSE and enter the name of the license file to be activated to query the file information. If... Then...

The file information comply with the information of the Go to step Step 2. file that you apply for, The file information does not comply with the information of the file that you apply for, Exit the task and contact Huawei.

Step 2 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the subrack configuration status. If the subrack is offline, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to online. Step 3 Run the ACT LICENSE command to active the License. ----End
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-45

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.3 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12).

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
The emergency call service takes precedence over other services in accessing the network even if the MS requesting the service is suspended or the telephone charge is overdue.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to enable emergency call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC. The expected result: Emergent Call Disable is set to No. 2. 3. 4. Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In the Trace Type area, click BSSAP. The MS dials an emergency call and hears a voice prompt. View the signaling messages traced on the A interface. The expected result: The EMERGENCY_SETUP message is traced on the A interface, which indicates that the emergency call service is enabled. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to disable emergency call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC. The expected result: Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes.

Verification Procedure 1.

7.4 Configuring IMSI Detach


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach.
7-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
After the IMSI is detached, the MS is marked as an invalid MS by the network. The network does not send any paging message to this MS. The network informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the system information type 3 message.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set Attach-detach Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, query the setting of Attach-detach Allowed. The expected result: Attach-detach Allowed is set to YES. 2. 3. Trace messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Click all trace types. Power off the MS. The expected result: The IMSI DETACH INDICATION message is traced on the A interface. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set Attach-detach Allowed to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, query the setting of Attach-detach Allowed. The expected result: Attach-detach Allowed is set to NO. ----End

Verification Procedure 1.

7.5 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover.

Prerequisite
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Hardware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-47

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

None l l l Dependency on Other Features None License None Other Prerequisites 2G neighboring cell has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Neighboring Cell Relations.

Context
Handover is used to keep the call continuity of the UE during its movement. It also helps optimize the network performance by balancing the traffic between cells. Huawei I handover is classified into high-speed railway quick handover, emergency handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and normal handover. The emergency handover is classified into TA handover, bad quality (UL/DL) handover, quick level drop handover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The normal handover is classified into edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, concentric cell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover.

CAUTION
l After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to the old cell. l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited. l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cell handover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified duration. l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same underlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handover of a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell on the network. l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered between the enhanced dual-band network cells. l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all the neighboring micro cells. l SDCCH handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover, quick level drop handover, interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, edge handover, and fast-moving micro cell handover. It does not support the enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover, better 3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and tight BCCH handover.

7-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). Activating the quick handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes) and set Chain Neighbour Cell Type as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set MR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing(BSC preprocessing). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to YES(Yes). (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration as required.
NOTE

If a neighboring cell is an external neighboring cell, you need to run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL Frequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reported by the base station. 6. Activating the TA handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set TA HO Allowed to YES(Yes). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set TA Threshold as required. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Penalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO as required. 7. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set BQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-49

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

(2) Optional. For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual. Threshold as required. (3) Optional. For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL Qual. Limit for AMR HR as required. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Penalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO as required. 8. Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and set Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set Filter Parameter A1, Filter Parameter A2, Filter Parameter A3, Filter Parameter A4, Filter Parameter A5, Filter Parameter A6, Filter Parameter A7, Filter Parameter A8, and Filter Parameter B as required. 9. Activating interference handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Interference HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Intracell HO Allowed, Forbidden time after MAX Times, and Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR as required. 10. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set No Dl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit and Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Filter Length for TCH Qual and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual as required. 11. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell) and then set Cell Inner/ Extra Property, Same Group Cell Index Type, Same Group Cell Index, and Same Group Cell Name as required.
7-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA. In this step, set Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious Overload Threshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells, and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries as required. 12. Activating the load handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Load Handover Support to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HO Threshold and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set System Flux Threshold for Load HO, Load HO Threshold, Load handover Load Accept Threshold, Load HO Bandwidth, Load HO Step Period, and Load HO Step Level as required.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Load handover Load Accept Threshold as required. If this cell is configured with external 3G neighboring cells, you need to run the MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL to set Load handover Load Accept Threshold as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required. 13. Activating the edge handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Edge HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Valid Time as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required. 14. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Layer of The Cell as required.
NOTE

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MS Fast-moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fastmoving Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO as required.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-51

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell, Inter-layer HO Threshold, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required. 15. Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Level HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Layer HO Watch Time, Layer HO Valid Time, and Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required. 16. Activating the PBGT handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set PBGT HO Allowed to YES(Yes). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set PBGT Watch Time, PBGT Valid Time, and PBGT HO Threshold as required. 17. Activating the AMR handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F HO Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last Time as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(Yes). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. (5) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold as required. 18. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm
7-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set SDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F HO Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last Time as required. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed as required. l Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query the setting of Current HO Control Algorithm. The expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). 2. Start the task by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. The expected result: The expected result: The BSC sends the MSC a Handover performed message with any of the following handover cause values: better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or downlinkstrength. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

7.6 Configuring Directed Retry


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607 Directed Retry.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSC automatically initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell. This feature helps reduce the call access failure due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, thereby increasing the access success rate. It can also balance the traffic load between different cells, thereby avoiding the traffic load imbalance among cells.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-53

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Directed Retry to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLQUICKSETUP to quickly add GSM cells 0 and 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL for two times to configure cell 0 and cell 1 as neighboring cells. Block the TCHs in cell 0. Meanwhile, ensure that the SDCCHs in cell 0 are available for use. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and the RSL messages on the Abis interface in cells 0 and 1 by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Make a call in cell 0. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on the Abis interface in cells 0 and 1. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The Handover Detection message is traced on the Abis interface in cell 0. The Assignment Complete message is traced on the A interface in cell 1.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Directed Retry to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, view the setting of Directed Retry. The expected result: Directed Retry is set to No.

----End

7.7 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
Assignment and immediate assignment are two important procedures during call setup. Normal immediate and immediate assignment procedures do not require setting of any parameter. Parameter setting is required only in the immediate assignment of TCHs. The following section describes how to configure the function of immediate TCH assignment.
7-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH Immediate Assignment to YES(Yes). Use an MS to initiate an emergency call. Trace messages over the Abis interface. The expected result: On the GUI of Abis interface message tracing, the CHANNEL ACTIVATION message is traced. The field Channel Rate and Type under the information element Channel mode indicates that the TCH, instead of the SDCCH, is assigned during immediate assignment. During assignment, the messages Mode Modify Request and Mode Modify Acknowledge are traced. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH Immediate Assignment to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the setting of TCH Immediate Assignment. The expected result: TCH Immediate Assignment is set to NO(No). ----End

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Example
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=YES;

7.8 Configuring Call Reestablishment


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
When the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedure can be performed to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed. This mechanism shortens call interruption and improves user experience.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-55

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to NO(No). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, set TREESTABLISH to a proper value. If this parameter is set to a great value, the radio resources assigned previously are reserved for a long time, which results in network congestion. Select a cell for test. The test cell must have two TRXs. Where, TRX 1 is the BCCH TRX and TRX 2 is the non-BCCH TRX. TRX 2 requires an independent variable attenuator or a device that can dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink signals of TRX 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the setting of Call Reestablishment Forbidden. The expected result: The value of Call Reestablishment Forbidden is NO(No). Use an MS to make a call on the test cell. Block all the TCHs on TRX 1 so that the MS uses a TCH on TRX 2. Then, unblock all the TCHs on TRX 1. Attenuate the signals of TRX 2 sharply by using the variable attenuator or other devices, trace the signaling on the A and Abis interfaces, and monitor the channel status of the test cell. The expected result: As displayed in the channel status monitoring window, the MS reestablishes a call on TRX 1 of the test cell. You can trace the signaling messages shown in Figure 7-1 during the signaling tracing.

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3.

4. 5.

Figure 7-1 Signaling messages

l
7-56

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the setting of Call Reestablishment Forbidden. The expected result: The value of Call Reestablishment Forbidden is YES(Yes).

----End

Example
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=NO; SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSIPFAILINDDELAY=10000;

7.9 Configuring TCH Re-assignment


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
TCH re-assignment is a procedure in which the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after the MS returns to the SDCCH because a TCH fails to be assgined to the MS.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow Reassign to YES(Yes). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Frequency Band of Reassign to Same_Band(Same Band).
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1.

This parameter indicates the frequency band to be assigned during TCH re-assignment. If the parameter is set to Same_Band(Same Band), then a channel of the same frequency band as the originally assigned TCH is assigned preferentially.

2. 3.

Reserve an idle TCH on the BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the BCCH TRX. Reserve an idle TCH on the non-BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the non-BCCH TRX. In addition, degrade the uplink signal transmitted on the TRX, for example, remove the uplink antenna for the non-BCCH TRX.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-57

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The expected result: Initiate a call in the cell. In the first assignment, a TCH on the non-BCCH TRX is assigned. The call is re-assigned onto the TCH of the BCCH TRX, because the assignment over the Um interface fails for this TRX. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow Reassign to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query the setting of Allow Reassign. The expected result: The value of Allow Reassign is No. ----End

Example
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=YES;

7.10 Configuring Radio Link Management


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do not need to be configured.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
The procedures involved in the radio link management are as follows: l l l l l l l l l Link establishment indication Link establishment request Link release indication Link release request Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode Reception of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode Reception of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode Link error indication

The link error indication procedure is used by the BTS to notify the BSC of exceptions that occur on the radio link layer.
7-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR to set the following parameters of the specified cell: T200 SDCCH, T200 FACCH/Full Rate, T200 FACCH/Half Rate, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3, T200 SACCH SDCCH, T200 SDCCH SAPI3, Use LAPDm N200, N200 of Establish, N200 of Release, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/Half Rate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCTMR to query the call control timer parameters of the corresponding cell. Expected result: The parameter values queried by running the preceding command are consistent with the corresponding values that are set in activation procedure. 2. On the BSC6900 LMT, enter the Abis Interface CS Trace window. In the Basic Tab, set Trace Type to RSL. In the RSL tab, set Message Type to RLM, set Filter Flag to TRX, and specify TRX ID. Use an MS to start a call and query the channels occupied by the call. Remove the battery of the MS during the call. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to initiate a forced handover for the MS. Set Handover Scope to FREE. Check messages traced in step 2. The DATA REQ message contains the Handover command message over the Um interface. Then, check whether the interval between the DATA REQ message and the ERROR INDication message is consistent with the corresponding configuration of the N200 and T200 in activation procedure. Expected result: The full-rate interval is basically consistent with the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Full Rate and T200 FACCH/Full Rate. The full-rate interval is basically consistent with the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Half Rate and T200 FACCH/Half Rate. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Verification Procedure 1.

3. 4. 5.

Example
//Activation procedure SET GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, T200SDCCH=1, T200FACCHF=1, T200FACCHH=1, T200SACCT0=1, T200SACCH3=1, T200SACCHS=1, T200SDCCH3=1; //Verification procedure LST GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;

7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-59

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The cabinets and cables of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are installed. The DIP switches of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are set. The BTS3012, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the combined-cabinet installation mode. The BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012III, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the cabinet-group installation mode. l l Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
l Combined cabinets Multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are connected together to serve as one BTS. In this case, the DTRU subrack is enlarged. The cabinet configured with the DTMU is the main cabinet, whereas the cabinet not configured with the DTMU is the extension cabinet. The extension cabinet shares the DTMU with the main cabinet. Figure 7-2 shows the connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets. Figure 7-2 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets

Cabinet groups Multiple groups of compatible combined cabinets are connected together to serve as one BTS. In this case, the service capacity of each site is increased. The first cabinet of each cabinet group is the main cabinet. A cabinet group can be one main cabinet or two combined cabinets. The cabinet group that provides synchronization clock signals is called main cabinet group. Other cabinet groups are called extension cabinet groups. The main cabinet of each cabinet group can be configured with one or two DTMUs. Figure 7-3 shows the connections of the BTS3012 cabinets groups.

7-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Figure 7-3 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups

The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. Two combined cabinets of the BTS3012 support 24 carriers, and three cabinet groups support 72 TRXs. Combined cabinets and cabinet groups are distinguished in cabinet numbers. In cabinet group mode, three consecutive combined cabinets form one cabinet group. The main cabinet group is comprised of cabinets 0 to 2, extension cabinet group 1 is comprised of cabinets 3 to 5, and extension cabinet group 2 is comprised of cabinets 6 to 8. The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. The corresponding cabinet numbers are as follows: Main cabinet group: 0 and 1 Extension cabinet group 1: 3 and 4 Extension cabinet group 2: 6 and 7

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet.
NOTE

In combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode, the principles for adding Cabinet No. are as follows: l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, Cabinet No. is 0 and 1. l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, Cabinet No. is 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, and 7.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add TRX boards.
NOTE

If the BTS3012 does not support the separated mode, the QTRU cannot be configured.

4. 5. 6. 7.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add GSM cells. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add cell frequencies. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add cell signaling point relation. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind cells to the BTS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-61

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

8. 9.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cells. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add TRXs for a cell.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boards 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set the TRX channel information. 12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX device attributes. 13. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to configure idle timeslots.
NOTE

During the processing of PS services, perform step 8, step 12, and step 13.

14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to add the antenna board. 15. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT to configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS. 16. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to modify the frequency band attributes of BTS antennas. 17. Repeat Step 2 through Step 16 to add and configure the extension cabinet and information about the cabinet according to the principles for adding cabinet numbers in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode.
NOTE

If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, addition of cells for the extension cabinet is not required. Therefore, you do not need to repeat Step 4 through Step 8.

18. Add the BTS connection according to the type of BTS connection. If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, go to Step 19. If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, go to Step 20.
NOTE

l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, add the connection links from the main cabinet to the BSC. Dest Node Type is BSC. l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC and the connection links among cabinet groups. During the addition of connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, Dest Node Type is BSC. During the addition of connection links among cabinet groups, Dest Node Type is BTS.

19. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the main cabinet to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No.. 20. Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the extension cabinet groups, and then add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group, and then set Dest Node Type to BTS. In addition, set the following parameters related to the BTSs in extension cabinet groups: Dest Parent Index Type, Dest Parent BTS Index, and Dest Parent BTS Port No..
7-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No.. 21. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS. l Verification procedure 1. 2. 3. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. Click the added BTSs in Activation Procedures in Device Navigation Tree. The corresponding device panels are displayed on BTS Device Panel. Select the main and extension cabinets in the Rack No. drop-down list. Then, check the board status on BTS Device Panel. If the board status is Normal, the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet and cabinetgroup mode. If the board status is Faulty, clear the alarm according to handling suggestions provided in the BSC6900 Alarm Reference. l Deactivation procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to delete a BTS.

Example
//Activation procedure //Add a BTS ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3900_TDM", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, BTSDESC="3900", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT; //Add a cabinet ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3900_GSM; //Add TRX boards ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BT=TRU, SRN=1, SN=0; //Add GSM cells ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=11, IUOTP=Normal_cell; //Add cell frequencies ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=2; //Add cell signaling point relation ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPC=1000; //Bind cells to the BTS ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSID=9; //Set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cells SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO; //Add TRXs for a cell ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0, FREQ=40; //Bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boards ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0; //Set the TRX channel information SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH, TSPRIORITY=2; //Set TRX device attributes SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8; //Configure idle timeslots SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=5, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-63

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

//Add the antenna board ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=0, AORB=A; //Configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2001, SRN=3, SN=0, BT=DFCU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, AORB=B; //Modify the frequency band attributes of BTS antennas MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRN=3, SN=8, BT=DFCU, FREQBAND=PCS1900; //Add BTS connection ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1; //activate a BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL; //Deactivation procedure //Deactivate a BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Delete a BTS RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The following types of BTSs support the feature: the DBS3900, BTS3900, and BTS3900A l l Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
If a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power amplifiers of some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the normal operation of the BTS.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the parameters related to TRX shutdown of the PSU board. In this step. Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES. Set Tran. Cabinet Configured according to actual requirements. Set Service Priority Policy to GSM_PRIOR. GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard does not need to be set.
7-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPSUFP to query the parameters related to TRX shutdown when the PSUs are faulty in the corresponding site. The expected result: The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled queried in step 2 is YES. The value of Tran. Cabinet Configured queried in step 2 is the same as that set in step 1. The value of Service Priority Policy queried in step 2 is GSM_PRIOR. 2. 3. Remove some PSUs of the site. Ensure that the remaining PSUs and the DCDU cannot supply power to all the TRXs at the site but can supply power to other equipment. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status of all TRXs at the entire site. In this step, set Object Type to SITE. The expected result: the status of some TRXs is Enabled and that of some others is Disabled. The BTS works properly and there is no call drops due to insufficient power supply.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP. In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO. The expected result: Some TRXs do not automatically shut themselves down when PSU faults occur.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, SRVPRIPOLICY=GSM_PRIOR; //Verification procedure LST BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=SITE, //Deactivation procedure SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=YES, ISTRANCABCON=CONFIG, BTSID=0; IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=NO;

7.13 Configuring System Information Sending


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101 System Information Sending.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-65

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
System information involves main radio network parameters on the Um interface, including network identity parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network function parameters. Based on the received system information, an MS can properly select and access a radio network. Then, the MS can fully use various services provided by the network and well cooperate with the network.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes). Trace CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSL messages on the Abis interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and specify the cell index. View the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface. The expected result: si2-quarter-ind in System Information Type 3 message is 1. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to NO(No). Trace CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSL messages on the Abis interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and specify the cell index. View the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface. The expected result: si2-quarter-ind in System Information Type 3 message is 0. ----End

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3.

3. 4.

7.14 Configuring Daylight Saving Time


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving Time (DST).

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None
7-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybrid configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in a certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET TZ command to configure DST. In this step, set DaylightSave to YES (Yes), set StartType and EndType, and specify start time and end time based on the selected type. Run the LST TZ command to check whether DaylightSave is set to YES. Run the SET TZ command. In this step, set DaylightSave to NO(No).

l l

Verification Procedure 1. 1. Deactivation Procedure

----End

Example
//Activating Daylight Saving Time SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=YES, SM=WEEK, SMONTH=MAR, SWSEQ=LAST, SWEEK=SUN, ST=02&00&00, EM=WEEK, EMONTH=OCT, EWSEQ=LAST, EWEEK=SUN, ET=03&00&00, TO=60; //Deactivating Daylight Saving Time SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=NO;

7.15 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
When the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to access the network through the cell because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, you need to convert some TCHs to SDCCHs. When TCHs do not meet the requirements of channel conversion, dynamic PDCHs are converted to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-67

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs and dynamic PDCHs used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs to increase system capacity.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES(Yes) and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to SDCCH Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum, and TCH Minimum Recovery Time as required. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Maximum Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion as required. Monitor Channel Status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status, and make a CS call in the cell. The expected result: A TCH is converted to an SDCCH. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Maximum Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100 and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to 0. Perform PS services in the cell. The expected result: All TCHFs are converted to PDCHs. 4. 5. l Make another CS call in the cell. The expected result: A dynamic PDCH is converted to an SDCCH. Enable the cell to keep in idle state for two minutes. The expected result: The two channels used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs. Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to NO(No) and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to SDCCH Allowed to NO(No).

2.

3.

Verification Procedure 1.

3.

----End

Example
Activating SDCCH dynamic adjustment\\
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=YES, PDCH2SDEN=YES; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IDLESDTHRES=8, CELLMAXSD=100, MINRESTIMETCH=60; SET GCELLPSCHM: MAXPDCHRATE=30, DYNCHTRANRESLEV=2;

Deactivating SDCCH dynamic adjustment\\


SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=NO, PDCH2SDEN=NO;

7-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.16 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806 Signaling Transport Point (STP).

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware The XPUa board is configured. Dependency on Other Features None License None Others The OPC is configured. The physical layer and the data link layer on the A interface are configured. The CN supports this feature.

Context
According to the requirements of the operator, the BSC can be connected to the MSC directly or through STP. To use an MGW as an STP, ensure that the MGW supports MTP3/M3UA signaling transfer.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure TDM transmission 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, and DSP bear type to M3UA. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 link set. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 link to the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to MTP3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-69

3. 4.

5.

6.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6.

8.

IP transmission 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, and DSP bear type to M3UA. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1, DSP index to the DSP index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA signaling link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5, and set Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. set in 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to M3UA. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1, DSP index to the DSP index set in 8.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5. l Verification Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to check that SCCP DSP state is set to Accessible.

Deactivation Procedure TDM transmission 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE to remove the CN node. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.

3.

7-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 link from the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS to remove the MTP3 link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MGW. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 9. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LNK to remove the M3UA link from the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LKS to remove the M3UA signaling link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MGW. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SCTPLNK to remove the SCTP link.

5.

6.

7.

IP transmission 1.

2.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 9. ----End

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LE to remove the M3UA local entity.

Example
//TDM transmission ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=MTP3; ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=1, NAME="MGWMTP3LKS"; ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS16-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=1, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS16-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNKS1_1"; ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWRT"; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-71

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCRT"; ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=2, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="share", CNID=2, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM; //IP transmission ADD M3LE: LENO=1, SPX=1, ENTITYT= M3UA_IPSP, NAME="LOCALBSC"; ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="172.17.15.253", PEERIP1="172.17.12.253", PEERPN=2905, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=1, DPX=1, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGW"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=1, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGWLKS"; ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, NAME="MGWLNK"; ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWM3RT"; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD M3DE: DENO=2, LENO=1, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MSCM3DE"; ADD M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCM3RT";

7.17 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None Others The CN supports this feature.

Context
Huawei GBSS can be connected to the MSC through the No.7 signaling system. The No.7 signaling system adopts the coding scheme in the 14-bit format. The signaling point code consists of three sub-fields: sub-field for identifying the world geographical zone where the network is located; sub-field for identifying the geographical area or network within a specific world zone; sub-field for identifying the signaling point within a specific geographical area or network.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. At a newly deployed site, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14 (BIT14). If the OSPs in non-14-bit format have been configured, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove all the OSPs, and then proceed with Step 1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2.

7-72

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

A Signaling Point Code (SPC) must be unique in the signaling network and cannot be 0.BSC6900 does not support configuration of OSPs with different number of bits.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPC to check that OSPs are in the 14-bit format. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove all configured OSPs.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260;

7.18 Configuring DRX


This section describes how to configure and verify the DRX.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None Other Prerequisites The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell.

Context
DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS. Each MS is mapped to a paging group, and each paging group is mapped to a paging sub-channel in the serving cell. In idle mode, the MS detects the paging messages broadcast by the system only on the mapped paging sub-channel. The MS blocks other paging sub-channels by powering off certain hardware. This also saves power. The configuration of a BTS3012 in TDM mode is taken as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period).

l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-73

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. 2. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to forcibly send the system message to the test cell. Enable an Abis Interface CS Trace task, then select RSL in the test cell. Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. In the IE controlchannel-description of this message, if bs-ag-blks-res (CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH) is 2 and bs-pa-mfrms (Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH) is 0, the system message is correct. Use a MS to make a call to another MS (assume that the IMSI of the called MS is "M"), and ensure that the call is set up successfully. Check the CS message of the Page Command type over the Abis interface. If the IE paging-group in this message is M%1000%14%14, the paging group contained in the paging message is consistent with the settings in the system message. In this case, the MS can implement DRX by monitoring the paging sub-channel.
NOTE

4. 5.

"%" in M%1000%14%14 indicates the MOD operation, and the group number is in decimal format.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, BSAGBLKSRES=2, BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD; //Verification Procedure SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;

7.19 Configuring BTS Power Management


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
This feature enables the BTS to allocate loads dynamically according to the actual power situation, thus prolonging the working time of the system. Functions of the feature are as follows:
7-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

No mains supply When there is no mains supply available, the BTS hierarchical power-off function is performed to reduce the power consumption and extend the discharge time of the battery. In this case, the system automatically blocks all TRXs except the BCCH TRX. This is called a soft shutdown. When the capacity of the battery drops to the preset value, the system automatically shuts down all the TRXs to prevent over-discharging of the battery. This is called a hard shutdown.

Unfavorable working environment The TMU shuts down the PAs for some TRXs to reduce heat consumption if the temperature inside the rack exceeds the predefined threshold. When fatal faults occur on TRXs or the VSWR far exceeds the limits, the TRX is shut down.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set power management parameters. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAPMUBP to query the value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled. Expected result: The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled is YES, and the values of power management parameters are the specified ones. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

Verification Procedure 1.

Example
//Activation procedure SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, SRN=3, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, PTYPE=APM30, HTSDF=ENABLE; //Verification procedure LST BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, SRN=3, SN=0; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, SRN=3, SN=0, CFGFLAG=NO;

7.20 Configuring Connection with TMA


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).

Prerequisite
l Hardware Dependencies for Common TMA The RRU3004 does not support the connection with a common TMA.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-75

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the connection with a common TMA. The GRFU and MRFU support the connection with a common TMA. The DRFU supports the connection with a common TMA through the GATM board. l Hardware Dependencies for Smart TMA The 3012 series base stations do not support the configuration of the smart TMA. A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the GATM board does not support the configuration of the smart TMA. A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the RXU board does not support the configuration of the smart TMA in non-SRAN mode. An antenna device is numbered uniquely within a site. In addition, the device number of a Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) and that of a TMA must be different within a site. l l Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
Installed on the tower top, the TMA is a device for amplifying uplink signals. As an optional component of the antenna system, the TMA compensates for the feeder loss caused by a long feeder to improve the uplink sensitivity and converge. In a network whose uplink coverage is limited, the TMA can be installed to improve the receiver sensitivity and expand the cell radius, thus reducing the number of BTSs and minimizing investments. If a BTS is configured with the TMA, users must configure the BTS-related parameters based on the actual RF antenna port, power supply mode, and TMA characteristics.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure for a Common TMA 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure TMA data after setting Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor. Run the BSC6900 MML SET BTSRXUBP to turn on the power switches for antenna ports. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scan antenna devices. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTMA to add a smart TMA. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA subunit, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSTMASUBUNIT. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA device, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSTMADEVICEDATA. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the TMA-related parameters, including Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor. On the LMT, click Trace. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane, navigate to Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. On the Basic tab page of the displayed
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure for a Smart TMA 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Verification Procedure for a Common TMA 1.

2.

7-76

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

dialog box, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page, select DCM (Measurement Report) under Message Type, select TRX under Filter Flag, and then specify the TRX ID. 3. For the RRU or RFU board whose RF feeder is attached with the TMA, perform a dialing test to occupy the channel. Then, check the measured level reported by the BTS. The expected result: The Uplink RxLev specified in the Measurement Report message is normal. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether the antenna devices are functioning. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSTMA to query the information of a smart TMA. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure the TMA data. In this step: Set Antenna Tributary 1 Flag to NO(NO). Set Antenna Tributary 2 Flag to NO(NO). l Deactivation Procedure for a Smart TMA 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSTMA to remove a smart TMA.

Verification Procedure for a Common TMA 1. 2.

Deactivation Procedure for a Common TMA 1.

Example
//Activating a common TMA SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5, HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10; //Activating a smart TMA SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5, HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10; STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3; ADD BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1, DEVICENAME="tafang", PWRSUPPLYTYPE=SINGLE_PORT_POWER, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3, SUBUNITNUM=2; //Verifying a common TMA LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3; SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE; //Verifying a smart TMA STR BTSALDSCAN:STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3; DSP BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1; //Deactivating a common TMA SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, HAVETT1=NO, HAVETT2=NO; //Deactivating a smart TMA RMV BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-77

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The power switch for the RET (remote electrical tilt) antenna is ON in order to implement the RET antenna functionality. The overcurrent and undercurrent thresholds are checked since they are related to the number of RET antennas attached to the board. l l Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
The feature provides a solution to remote adjustment of the antenna tilt. After the configuration of the remote electrical tilt function, the user can remotely adjust the RET antenna tilt.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scanning the RET antenna. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.
NOTE

2. 3.

To query vendor information, you can refer to the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

4. 5. 6. l

Optional: To set the tilt angle of the RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT. Optional: To modify the parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA. Optional: To set the tilt angle of the BTS RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRETANTTILT. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scanning the RET antenna. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRET to query the RET antenna information.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

7-78

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

3. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETANTTILT to query the tilt angle range of the RET antenna and the current tilt angle of the antenna.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0; ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian", CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0, CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR, VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456"; // Verification procedure STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0; DSP BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0; DSP BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9;

7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware BTS3006C/BTS3002E need add DATM board. BTS3012/BTS3012AE need add DATU board. BTS3900/A/L(DRFU) need add GATM board. l l Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
The 2-Antenna Receive Diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by using two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combined after certain processing.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set MRRU/GRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA.

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-79

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the sending receiving mode of the board.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, RXUIDTYPE=RXUPOS, RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, RXUTYPE=MRRU, SndRcvMode2=DOUBLE_ANTENNA; // Verification procedure LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;

7.23 Configuring BTS Clock


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 BTS Clock.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware When the synchronization with the GPS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/ BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU. When the synchronization with the BITS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/ BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU. l l Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
l The synchronization of the BTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The BTS uses the synchronization clock to obtain the reference clock source for the internal frame synchronization. The BTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Abis clock, synchronization with the GPS clock, and synchronization with the BITS clock. In addition, the BTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide a stable reference clock source for the BTS.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Synchronization with the Abis clock (default mode) 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).

Synchronization with the GPS clock


7-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to query the current configuration of the system clock. The expected result: If... The clock information corresponds to the clock type configured The clock information is inconsistent with the configuration Then... The configuration is successful. The configuration is unsuccessful.

Synchronization with the BITS clock 1. l

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to query the attributes of the BTS. Here, Set List Object to SITE(By Site). Select CLKATTR(CLKATTR) under the BTS Attribute check box. The expected result: Clock attribute is Available.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure // Configure the Synchronization with the Abis clock. SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK; // Configure the Synchronization with the GPS clock SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK; // Configure the Synchronization with the BITS clock SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;; // Verification procedure LST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; DSP BTSATTR: OBJTP=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, SITEATTR=CLKATTR;

7.24 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).

Prerequisite
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Hardware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-81

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

As Figure 7-4 shows, the hardware of the base station is installed. Figure 7-4 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface

NOTE

As Figure 7-4 shows, CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU board are respectively connected to one CPRI port on the WBBP board. CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 are connected to the RRU3908.

l l

Dependency on Other Features None License None

Context
In the traditional GSM+UMTS dual-mode solution, the GSM and UMTS base stations use the same site. Different RF modules are used for different radio standards and thus separate optical cables are required. As a result, many optical cables are required for the entire system, which increases the deployment cost. After this feature is applied, the demand of optical cables is reduced by 50%, which helps reduce the cost of the optical modules and optical cables and reduce the expense in the installation and maintenance of the optical cables between the BBU and RF modules.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSSFPMODE to configure the switching relation of the SFP ports and switch the data of CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU to CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 on the GTMU.
NOTE

The switching relation of the SFP ports is configured only on the GSM side.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSSFPMODE to query the configurations of the SFP ports.

l
7-82

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSSFPMODE to remove the SFP port switching relation.

Example
//Activation procedure ADD BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0, SWITCHPORTNO=3; //Verification procedure LST BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0; //Deactivation procedure RMV BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;

7.25 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology)


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology).

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Currently, the following types of BTSs support the PBT: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012 II, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900L GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. The DTRU, DRRU, or DRFU board is configured for the base station. The doubletransceiver unit is configured with one carrier only on channel 0. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
To improve uplink and downlink transmit power, power boost technology (PBT) offered by Huawei is an ideal solution. In PBT mode, the double-transceiver unit serves as a single transceiver. One signal output through modulation and DA conversion is divided into two RF signals. These two signals then enter the power amplifier for amplification. Then, the amplified signals are combined. As the two signals are aligned in phase, the transmit power is amplified and the downlink signal strength is increased. PBT is applicable to wide coverage areas. The following procedure takes how to configure PBT for the DTRU of the BTS3012 as an example. Figure 7-5 shows the connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-83

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Figure 7-5 Connections between the DTRU and DDPU in PBT mode

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to PBT(PBT).
NOTE

When you configure PBT, the signal can be transmitted through only channel 0.

7-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Verification Procedure 1. Optional: Use the MS to make a call.


NOTE

This step is required when the BCCH TRX is not carried on the TRX board. This step is not required when the BCCH TRX is carried on the TRX board.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to NONE(none). Then test the BTS power by means of a power measurement instrument, and record the result. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to PBT(PBT). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query Send Mode. Send Mode is expected to set to PBT(PBT). Measure the BTS power by a related instrument, and record the result. Compare the test results obtained in Step 2 and Step 5. Withe PBT enabled, the power obtained in step 5 is expected to be much greater than that obtained in step 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT; //Verification procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT; LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0;

7.26 Configuring Transmit Diversity


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Currently, the following types of BTSs support the transmit diversity: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. The base station is configured with the double-transceiver unit, and the doubletransceiver unit is configured with only one carrier on channel 0. The cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-85

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
In transmit diversity mode, the baseband signal of one MS is transmitted on two RF channels. As there is no correlation between two antennas, the problems of dramatic change of signal level and QoS decrease due to multipath propagation are solved, which improves the downlink coverage performance. The transmit diversity technology can improve the downlink signal quality, thus meeting the requirements for radio communications. The following procedure takes how to configure transmit diversity for the DRRU of the DBS3900 as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to NONE(none). Measure the BTS power by a related instrument, and record the result. The measured power is expected to be 0. 3. 4. 5. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity). Measure the power of tributary B by a related instrument, and record the result. With transmit diversity enabled, the measured power is expected not to be 0. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Example
//Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY; //Verification procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;

7.27 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115903 4-Way Receive Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines the 4-way receive signals to optimize the quality of uplink signals.
7-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Currently, the following types of BTSs support 4-way receive diversity: the BTS3012 (DTRU), BTS3012AE (DTRU), BTS3006C (DDRM), BTS3002E(DDRM), BTS3900 (DRFU), and BTS3900A (DRFU). The base station is configured with the double-transceiver unit, and the doubletransceiver unit is configured with only one carrier. The cell has at least two dual-polarized antennas or four single-polarized antennas. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
The 4-way receive signals are sent to one TRX simultaneously. Through the diversity combination technique, the uplink receiver sensitivity is improved. The 4-way receive diversity technology optimizes the quality of uplink signals to meet the demanding requirements for radio communications in certain cases and to improve the uplink performance in wide coverage scenarios. The following procedure takes how to configure 4-way receive diversity for the DRRU of the DBS3900 as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX +4RX]). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Receive Mode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).
NOTE

2.

l If the TRX of the double-transceiver unit is allocated to channel 0, set Send Mode to NOCOMB (No Combination), PBT(PBT), DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity), DDIVERSITY (Dynamic Transmit Diversity), or DPBT(DPBT). l If the TRX of the double-transceiver unit is allocated to channel 1, Send Mode can be set to only NOCOMB(No Combination).

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the attributes of the TRX board. Check whether Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3,

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-87

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA, ASSORXUCN=0, ASSORXUSRN=0, ASSORXUSN=4; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY; //Verification procedure LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, TRXID=0;

7.28 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Currently, the following types of units support transmit diversity: the DTRU of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DDRM of the BTS3006C/BTS3002E, the DRFU of the BTS3900/BTS3900A, and the RRU3004 and RRU3008 of the DBS3900. The BTS is configured with the double-transceiver TRXs. The cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas. l l Dependency on Other Features The feature depends on: GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell. License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
In dynamic transmit diversity mode, the same timeslots of the two TRXs in one doubletransceiver TRX are set to use transmit diversity, and other timeslots still use non-transmit diversity. After the timeslots in transmit diversity mode are released, they can be set back to non-transmit diversity. Dynamic transmit diversity fully utilizes idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with weak signals. In addition, adjustments can be made according to actual network conditions to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage. The following procedure takes how to configure dynamic transmit diversity for the DTRU of the BTS3012 as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode of the TRXs in the overlaid cell to DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity).
NOTE

2.

l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to check the concentric attribute of the TRX. l To configure dynamic transmit diversity, two TRXs must be configured in a DTRU. In addition, dynamic transmit diversity cannot be configured on the MBCCH(Main BCCH) TRX.

7-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TRXs except the BCCH TRX and except those TRXs whose Send Mode is not DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH/H or the TCH/F that carries the BCCH. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE

3.

4.

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the SDCCH meets the following condition: Assign-optimum-level Threshold - PBT gain < SDCCH uplink Rx level < Assign-optimum-level Threshold. Assign-optimum-level Threshold is set to 35 by default and the value of PBT gain is 4. You can change the value of Assignoptimum-level Threshold according to the SDCCH uplink Rx level so that the system can allocate a channel in the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.

The expected result: Checking the channel monitoring page on the BSC6900 LMT, you find that channels of two TRXs on the same timeslot are used during the call. One channel is in the Working state, and the other is in the Subordinate Channel state. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DDIVERSITY //Verification procedure SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt; SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;

7.29 Configuring Dynamic PBT


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The following types of BTSs support the PBT: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012 II, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. The DTRU, DRRU, or DRFU board is configured for the base station. The doubletransceiver unit is configured with one carrier only on channel 0. l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Other Features


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-89

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The feature depends on: GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell. l License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
In dynamic PBT mode, the corresponding timeslots on the two TRXs of a DTRU are set to PBT, and other timeslots are set to non-PBT. After the timeslots in PBT mode are released, they can be set to non-PBT. Dynamic PBT fully utilizes idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with weak signals. In addition, adjustments can be made on the basis of actual network conditions to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage. Dynamic PBT can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the edge of the cell by improving the performance of the concentric cell enabled with the Co-BCCH function. The following procedure takes how to configure dynamic PBT for the DTRU of the BTS3012 as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DPBT(DPBT). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to DPBT(DPBT).
NOTE

l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to check the concentric attribute of the TRX. l To configure dynamic PBT, two TRXs are required. In addition, dynamic PBT cannot be configured on the MBCCH(Main BCCH) TRX.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TRXs except the BCCH TRX and except those TRXs whose Send Mode is not DPBT(DPBT). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH/H or the TCH/F that carries the BCCH. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE

3.

4.

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the SDCCH meets the following condition: Assign-optimum-level Threshold - PBT gain < SDCCH uplink Rx level < Assign-optimum-level Threshold. Assign-optimum-level Threshold is set to 35 by default, and the value of PBT gain is 4. You can change the value of Assignoptimum-level Threshold according to the SDCCH uplink Rx level so that the system can allocate a channel in the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic PBT can be triggered.

7-90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: Checking the channel monitoring page on the BSC6900 LMT, you find that channels of two TRXs on the same timeslot are used during the call. One channel is in the Working state, and the other is in the Subordinate Channel state. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DPBT; //Verification procedure SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt; SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;

7.30 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Currently, the BTSs that support the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature are as follows: BTS3012 series and BTS3900E. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS. If the DTRU is used, this feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT(Power Boost Technology) and GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity. l l License The license of this feature is activated. Other The cell supports EDGE.

Context
l l The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature described in this feature only applies to the 8PSK modulation mode. The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature improves the average power of PS services through the coverage enhancement technology and power sharing technology, thus ensuring that data services can have the same cell coverage capability as speech services. This feature is applicable to both the DTRU and QTRU. After the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature is activated, the Cell 8PSK Power Attenuation Grade parameter becomes invalid automatically. Table 7-3 list the conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for the BTS3012 series.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-91

l l

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Table 7-3 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3012 series) Prerequisite The TRX module is DTRU (type B). The power of two carriers configured on the DTRU is 60 W, and the static power levels of both carriers are equal to 0. The TRX module is DTRU (type A) or QTRU. A single DTRU module is configured with one carrier. When a single DTRU module is configured with two carriers, the intelligent shutdown function is performed on one of the carriers. The two carriers configured on the DTRU module belong to two cells. When one of the carriers is configured as the BCCH, the other non-BCCH carrier of the DTRU module is supported or not. The transmit mode of the DTRU is configured as PBT (excluding dynamic PBT) or transmit diversity (excluding dynamic transmit diversity). A channel of the DTRU is faulty. l Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage Is Supported Supported. Supported.

Not supported. Not supported. Not supported.

Not supported. Not supported.

Not supported.

Not supported.

Table 7-4 list conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for the BTS3900E. Table 7-4 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3900E) Prerequisite Not FH, RF FH, and baseband FH RanSharing Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage Is Supported Supported. Supported.

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set HighOrder Modulation Power Increase Allowed to ALLOWED.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-92

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l The support of High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed by the BCCH is determined by the High-Order Modulation Power Increase on BCCH TRX Allowed parameter. l The Power Increase in 8PSK parameter is used to control the increased amplitude of average power in 8PSK modulation mode.

Verification procedure 1. Check traffic statistics information about the measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX on the M2000, and then determine the effect of the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature.
NOTE

The measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX contain 11 counters, such as Number of Bursts in High-Order Modulation Scheme and Number of Bursts with High-Order Modulation Power Increase of n dB. The value of n can be either of the following values: 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, or 4.0.

Deactivation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set HighOrder Modulation Power Increase Allowed to NOT_ALLOWED.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=ALLOWED; // Deactivation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=NOT_ALLOWED;

7.31 Configuring Extended Cell


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001 Extended Cell.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell. l License The license is activated.

Context
The Extended Cell feature expands the cell radius and improves the capability of the BTS for wide coverage. This feature is applicable to areas with a small population and low signal fading such as deserts, seashores, islands, and water areas.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-93

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell Extension Type to DualTS_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell). Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status. The expected result: One of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number is not displayed, as shown in Figure 7-6. Figure 7-6 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell Extension Type to Normal_cell(Normal cell). Verify that Extended Cell has been deactivated by monitoring the channel status. For details, see Monitoring Channel Status. The expected result: Both of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number are displayed, as shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell

----End

7.32 Configuring Concentric Cell


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license has been activated. The cell is configured.

7-94

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
l l In the tight frequency reuse pattern, the concentric cell technology helps avoiding or reducing interference and ensuring voice quality. The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid (OL) subcell and underlaid (UL) subcell. Compared with the UL subcell, the OL subcell is configured with more channels and thus it becomes the primary traffic bearer layer. The OL subcell aims to absorb most subscribers in the concentric cell. The UL subcell aims to solve the coverage problem and provide services in the area not covered by the OL subcell.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell (Concentric Cell) and set Enhanced Concentric Allowed as required. Run the SET GTRXIUO command. In this step, set Concentric Attribute to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID(Underlaid Subcell) according to the network planning. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command to set the handover parameters in the concentric cell according to the network condition. Run the LST GCELL command to query the Cell IUO Type.

3. 4. l

Verification Procedure 1. The expected result: The Cell IUO Type is Concentric_cell.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell (Normal Cell).

----End

Example
//Activating concentric cell ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="1", MNC="1", LAC=1, CI=1, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=ON, FLEXMAIO=OFF; SET GTRXIUO: TRXID=0, IUO=OVERLAID; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CONHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES, OLTOULHOALLOW=YES; //Verifying concentric cell LST GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Deactivating concentric cell MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell;

7.33 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-95

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. The BTS must support the configured frequency band.

Context
Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, and implements the continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots. A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The frequency band configuration is as follows: l l If the overlaid subcell is configured in the DCS1800M, the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM900M or GSM850M. If the overlaid subcell is configured in the PCS1900M, the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM850M.
NOTE

The signal loss of the DCS1800M band changes with the transmission distance. At the distance of 0.5-1 km, the signal power of the DCS1800M band is about 15 dB lower than the signal power of the GSM900M band.

The configuration of the co-BCCH cell should comply with the following principles: l Generally, a channel in the overlaid subcell is not directly assigned to a call, the incoming inter-cell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell, and a call beyond the coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not forcibly assigned to the overlaid subcell. The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned to maintain the traffic balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. Generally, the GSM900M or GSM850M TRX is configured in the underlaid cell to expand the coverage, whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M TRX is configured in the overlaid cell to absorb the traffic. Generally, the BCCH is configured on the GSM900M TRX. The priorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM. The SDCCH, PDCH, and BCCH should be configured on the same TRX. The frequency hopping between GSM900M and DCS1800M is not allowed. The frequency hopping within the same frequency band is allowed. Avoid using a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination modes of the TRXs on the same frequency band. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs, such as handover success rate and assignment success rate.

l l

l l l

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Optional: When a cell supports GSM850_1900, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC to set Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-96

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

If the cell to be added is in the GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800 band, perform the following steps:

2. 3. 4. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell and set the parameters Freq. Band and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to configure the concentric cell attributes of the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set the handover parameters in the concentric cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set Assign Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell). Use a MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

To facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.

The expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing operations given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the underlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to set Administrative State to Lock(Lock), blocking the channel occupied by the call. The expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. 4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. The expected result: The execution result of the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT shows that the call is handed over to a TCH on the TRX in the overlaid subcell from the underlaid subcell. 5. 6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set Assign Optimum Layer toOSubcell(Overlaid subcell). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to set Administrative State to Unlock(Unlock), unblocking all TCHs on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell. The expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing operations given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the overlaid subcell by running the BSC6900MML command DSP CHNSTAT. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELL to remove the co-BCCH cell to be deactivated.

7.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-97

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.34 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The TRXs configured for the BTS must support corresponding frequency bands.

Context
l Huawei GBSS supports the following types of multiband networks: GSM850 band + GSM900 band + DCS1800 band GSM850 band + GSM900 band + PCS1900 band l l l The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900. The Huawei GBSS supports only the GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH cell, and does not support the GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cell. Huawei GBSS supports GSM900 band, DCS1800 band, PCS1900 band, and GSM850 band. Huawei GBSS does not support GSM450 band or GSM480 band.

The dual-band network configured on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands of a BTS is taken as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. l 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set Freq. Band to GSM900. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set Freq. Band to DCS1800. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set Freq. Band to GSM900. Based on network planning, set Cell Index, Cell Name, MCC, MNC, Cell LAC, and Cell CI. Repeat Step 1 to add GSM cells, and set Freq. Band to DCS1800. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the GSM900 and DCS1800 cells based on the network optimization and planning requirements.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure

2. 3.

7-98

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

4. 5. 6.

Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normal. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normal. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. After the call is set up, move the MS towards the centre of the 1800 MHz cell. Then, observe the window displaying the monitored channel status. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is still normal.
NOTE

l On the BSC6900 LMT, click Device Maintenance. In the Device Navigation Tree, rightclick a specified cell, and then choose Monitor Channel Status. l When a call is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, the color of a channel in the Monitor Channel Status window is displayed as green. This indicates that the channel is occupied by the call handed to the 1800 MHz cell.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is set to GSM900. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the Active status. The expected result: Active status is DEACTIVATED. Repeat step 1 to step 2 to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is set to DCS1800.

----End

7.35 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC. l License The license is activated.

Context
The enhanced dual-band network is an improved version of the existing dual-band network. In the enhanced dual-band network, two single-band cells at the same level and layer with different coverage areas are logically formed into a cell group with two bidirectional neighboring cells. One is an overlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. In the enhanced dual-band network algorithm, channel resources can be shared and cell load is balanced between the two cells in a cell group.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-99

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

l When two cells belong to different operators, the enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured. l Before changing the relation between the cell and the operator, check whether the enhanced dual-band network is configured. If the enhanced dual-band network is configured, modify the attributes of the enhanced dual-band network.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. A GSM900 cell and a DCS1800 cell are configured in the GBSS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL to configure the GSM900 cell as the unidirectional 2G neighboring cell of the DCS1800 cell. Repeat step Step 1 to configure the DCS1800 cell as the uni-directional 2G neighboring cell of the GSM900 cell, so that the two cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the attributes of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), Cell Inner/Extra Property to Extra(Extra), and Same Group Cell Index Type to BYID(By Index). Then, specify the Same Group Cell Index to the index of the DCS1800 cell.

2.

3.

Verification Procedure Verify the call access function in the enhanced dual-band network. 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC twice to set ECSC of the two cells to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA twice to set Directed Retry of the two cells to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, and Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to 0. Set Load HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No). Make MS 1 and MS 2 (both supporting 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Then, use MS 1 to make a call to a fixed-line phone. MS 1 is assigned to a channel of the GSM900 cell. Maintain the call of MS 1 and use MS 2 to make a call to the fixed-line phone in the GSM900 cell. MS 2 is assigned to a channel of the DCS1800 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call in the underlaid subcell can be assigned to the overlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is heavy and the signals in the overlaid subcell are strong enough. Terminate all the calls. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, and UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to 0.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4.

5.

6.

7.

7-100

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

8.

Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and originate a call. MS 1 is assigned to the underlaid GSM900 subcell because the load of the underlaid subcell is not higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call in the overlaid subcell can be assigned to the underlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is light. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set all parameters of enabling a certain type of handover to NO(No) and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold to 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5. Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and originate a call to the fixed-line phone. MS 1 is assigned to a channel in the overlaid subcell. Then, MS 1 is handed over to the GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is lower than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic. Maintain the call of MS 1. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5. The call is handed over from the GSM900 cell back to the DCS1800 cell because the load in the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic. Maintain the call. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 63, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 62. Set Inner Cell EDGE HO Enable to YES(Yes). MS 1 is handed over the GSM900 cell because the receive level of MS 1 is lower than Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is better cell.
NOTE

Verify the handover in the enhanced dual-band network. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

This type of edge handover requires that the underlaid subcell is more preferably selected as the target cell for handover than the overlaid subcell. You can adjust the levels of the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, so that the level of the underlaid subcell is higher than the level of the overlaid subcell.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-101

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the attributes of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the attributes of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell). Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the GSM900 cell from the neighboring cell list of the DCS1800 cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the DCS1800 cell from the neighboring cell list of the GSM900 cell.

----End

7.36 Configuring Flex MAIO


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping). This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation). l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites Frame offset is not configured for the BTS. A cell is configured for frequency hopping, and the MAs used by the same timeslot have the same length.

Context
Under the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely to occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency reuse is adopted. When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel. This reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. It also achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and thus improves the system capacity.

7-102

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

CAUTION
l The BTS3900B does not support this feature. l PS services do not support this feature. l Flex MAIO must be configured for all the cells under the same BTS, and the settings of flex MAIO parameters must be the same in all the cells. l Each cell can be configured with a maximum of two MAs. Flex MAIO cannot be enabled simultaneously in both the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set both Start Flex MAIO Switch and HSN Modification Switch to ON(On). Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Make a call in the cell that is enabled with Flex MAIO. View the hopping channel Information Element (IE) of the Channel Activation message. The expected result: The hopping channel IE carries a valid MAIO (not 255) and HSN information. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set both Start Flex MAIO Switch and HSN Modification Switch to OFF(Off).

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

7.37 Configuring ICC


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801 ICC.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Currently, the following BTSs support ICC: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
Interference Cancellation Combining (ICC) is a technology that combines signals of multiple antennas to suppress interference. Generally, the interference received by different antennas is
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-103

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

generated by the same interference source. Thus, there are correlations between the interference signals received by different antennas. ICC uses the correlations when combing signals to eliminate some interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of software parameter No. 53. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to enable the ICC function. In this step, Set Item Index to 53. Set Item Value to its current value plus one. l Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of software parameter No. 53. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise, the ICC function is disabled. Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If the ICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the ICC function is disabled, the upload rate is decreased. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of software parameter No. 53. If the value is an even number, it indicates that the ICC function is disabled. Otherwise, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to disable the ICC function. In this step, Set Item Index to 53. Set Item Value to its current value minus one. ----End

2.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2.

7.38 Configuring EICC


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821 EICC.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), BTS3900E, and BTS3900B do not support the feature. When the RRU3008 V1 and RRU3908 V1 are configured with more than four carriers, the feature is not supported. l Dependency on Other Features Um Interface Software Synchronization is recommended.
7-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
l The interference among the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and temporal correlation: CCI and ISI. Considering the spatial correlation and temporal correlation of the interference, ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently. EICC, however, considers the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the multidimensional combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the maximum signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC obtains the optimized uplink signals. ICC requires the matrix of interference. The matrix of interference is calculated on the basis of the training sequence of wanted signals. For each receive signal, the network estimates a channel model based on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the wanted signal, and subtracts the wanted signal from the receive signal to obtain the interfering signal. Then, the network estimates the matrix of each interfering signal and analyzes the statistical dependency of these interfering signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some interference is eliminated during the combination of receive signals to maximize the combination gain.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable EICC for a cell with EICC Allowed set to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of EICC Allowed. Perform an FTP service in a live network with interference and then view the upload rate. If the EICC function is enabled, the upload rate increases. If the EICC function is disabled, the upload rate decreases. Make a call in the live network with interference. Then, view the counters related to the uplink receive quality on the M2000 in the following way: Choose Performance > Query Result on the menu bar. In the displayed window, click New Query. The Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MR Measurement > Receive Quality Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value of the counter "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0)" and calculate the proportion of "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0)" to the sum of "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0)" through "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 7)". If the EICC function is enabled, the proportion is high. This indicates that the speech quality is good. If the EICC function is disabled, the proportion is low. This indicates that the speech quality is bad. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to disable EICC for a cell with EICC Allowed set to NO(No).

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-105

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Example
//Activation procedure SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=YES; //Verification procedure LST GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=NO;

7.39 Configuring Frequency Hopping


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping. The function consists of radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping (FH) and baseband FH.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
FH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase system capacity. When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 through MCS9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling FH is not recommended. When the cell activation state is Active, the FH feature can be configured quickly.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add a FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency.
NOTE

Set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH) as required. If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FH groups.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index and Frequency Hopping Mode. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4.

7-106

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different.

6. l 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set the frequency hopping of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode, and then set Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX and TRXID LST. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop). Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully and the voice quality is good. In the Abis signaling tracing window, the Assignment Command message is traced, and the value of the information element h:rf-hoppingchannel in the message is 1.

Procedure for Quick Activation

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11; SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH; SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=10; ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXIDLIST="1"; //Verification procedure SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";

7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware A cell must be configured with at least two TRXs. Dependency on Other Features The feature depends on GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping).
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-107

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The feature and GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) are mutually exclusive. l License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
Frequency hopping (FH) can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase system capacity. When PS services use higher coding schemes such as CS3, CS4, and MCS-5 through MCS-9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling FH is not recommended. When the cell activation state is Active, BCCH carrier FH can be activated quickly.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate a cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP repeatedly to set an FH group with the BCCH frequency added to the FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), specify Cell Index and Hop Index, set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH), and then set Frequency.
NOTE

To enable the BCCH TRX to participate in FH, at least two FH groups need to be configured with one FH group containing the BCCH frequency.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cell to baseband FH. In this step, set Index Type set to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index and Frequency Hopping Mode. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP repeatedly to set the FH type of the TRXs participating in FH (including the BCCH TRX) to baseband FH after setting TRX ID and Hop Type. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set the FH index and MAIO of the channels after setting Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE

4.

5.

l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different. l Channel 0 on the BCCH TRX does not participate in FH, and thus its FH index should be set to 255.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.
NOTE

Except for the preceding activation steps, you can quickly activate this feature by running the following command: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set FH for a cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Frequency Hopping Mode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX, and TRXID LST, which contains the BCCH TRX ID.

7-108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP with the following parameter settings: Index Type set to BYID(By Index), Cell Index set to the index of the cell to be verified, Frequency Hopping Mode set to BaseBand_FH (Baseband frequency hopping), and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX set to Hop(Hop). Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully and the voice quality is good. In the Abis signaling tracing window, the Assignment Command message is traced, and the value of the information element h:rf-hoppingchannel in the message is 1.

2.

Deactivation Procedure This feature needs not to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11, FREQ2=12; //Where FREO2 is the BCCH frequency ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=1, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1,FREQ3=12; SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH; SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH; //Repeat this step to set the FH type for all TRXs participating in FH. SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=10; //Repeat this step to set the hop index and MAIO for channels of the TRXs participating in FH. ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXIDLIST="1"; //Verification procedure SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";

7.41 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping


This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The base station must be a double-transceiver base station or a base station of the 3900 series. There are at lease two antennas in the cell participating in antenna FH. l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Other Features None License


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-109

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The license of this feature is activated.

Context
Antenna frequency hopping enables the downlink data on each TRX to be randomly transmitted on other TRXs. This improves the data receiving quality of the MS from the BCCH TRX and the data sending quality of the BCCH TRX, which improves network performance. If the cell supports both baseband frequency hopping and antenna frequency hopping, the TRX involved in baseband frequency hopping must also participate in antenna frequency hopping. When the cell activation state is Active, the antenna frequency hopping feature can be configured quickly.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. l 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to YES_HPANT(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP to configure antenna FH. In this step, set Index Type and Hop TRX Group Index. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP to quickly configure antenna FH. In this step, set Index Type and Cell Antenna Hopping.

Procedure for Quick Configuration

l l

Verification Procedure None. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=YES_HPANT; ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPTRXINDEX=0, TRXID1=1, TRXID2=2; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.42 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.

Prerequisite
l
7-110

Dependency on Hardware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The XPUa/XPUb board is configured. There are idle ports on the Abis interface board. l Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC, and GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network. l License The license is activated.

Context
The BCCH dense frequency multiplexing technique is used in networks with limited frequency resources. It helps to reduce the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH TRXs so that more frequencies can be used as TCHs, thus increasing the system capacity.
NOTE

If BCCH dense frequency multiplexing is applied with the increase of the cell load, the handover from a non-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX will be triggered, leading to the increase on the handover of the whole network.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set TIGHT BCCH Switch to ON(On). Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Level Thresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH and Quality Thresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH as required. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. Make a call in the cell to be verified. The expected result: The call is successfully made and the voice quality is good. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell) and specify Cell Index. The expected result: The value of Sub Channel Status is Occupied. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set TIGHT BCCH Switch to OFF(Off).

3. l

Verification Procedure 1.

7.43 Configuring IBCA


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002 Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-111

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware The XPUa/XPUb board is in position. Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network or GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping), GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm, and GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP (when IBCA of Inter-BSC is supported). This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites Two cells are configured. Cell 1 has at least two TRXs; cell 2 has at least three TRXs.

Context
When the network admits a new call, the interference between the established calls and the new call is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the network and thus enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. This increases the network capacity while maintaining the voice quality in the entire network.
NOTE

l In an IBCA-enabled cell, each timeslot and each frequency band can be configured with only one MA group; for a co-BCCH cell, two MA groups can be configured (one for each frequency band). l A maximum of three MA groups can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell; a maximum of 24 MA groups can be configured for all the IBCA neighboring cells. l The number of frequencies in each MA group in an IBCA-enabled cell cannot exceed 64. l A maximum of 12 IBCA neighboring cells can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell. l The calculated value from Number of MAs for the Serving Cell Number of MAIOs for the Serving Cell Number of MAs for All IBCA Neighboring Cells Maximum Number of MAIOs for IBCA Neighboring Cells cannot exceed 8,192.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an XPUa or XPUb board in the MPS or EPS. In this step, set Logical function type to MCP.
NOTE

A maximum of four MCP boards can be configured to share the IBCA calculation load and improve the system reliability.

2. 3. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD twice to enable IBCA for cell 1 and cell 2. In this step, set IBCA Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IBCA Info Report Period Within BSC and IBCA Info Report Period Between BSC. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLMAIOPLAN for multiple times. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index) or BYNAME(By Name). In addition,
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-112

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

specify Hop Index, and then set related MAIO parameters for cell 1 and cell 2 based on network planning.
NOTE

Each cell needs to be configured with more than two MAIOs and MAIOs for cell 1 should be consistent with those for cell 2.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL for cell 1 and cell 2 to configure each cell as the IBCA neighboring cell of the other. In this step, set Neighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring Cell), and set IBCA Dyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes).
NOTE

If you need to configure the handover-supporting IBCA function, you should set Neighboring Cell Type to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA Neighboring Cell).

Verifying IBCA Algorithm 1. 2. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT for cell 1 and cell 2. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on the same timeslot of all nonBCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and set Administrative State of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock). Use MS 1 to make a call in cell 1 and hold on. Ten seconds later, use MS 2 to make a call in cell 2 and hold on. In the Single User CS Trace tracing window, check the two calls. Record the MAIO information element in the Channel Activation message on the TCH. Compare the MAIO for the call made by MS 1 with that for the call made by MS 2. The expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicates that the IBCA algorithm takes effect.

3. 4. 5.

Verifying IBCA Handover 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL to configure cell 1 and cell 2 as handover and IBCA neighboring cells of each other. In this step, set Neighboring Cell Type to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA Neighboring Cell), and set IBCA Dyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT for cell 1 and cell 2. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on the same timeslot of all nonBCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and set Administrative State of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock). Use MS 1 to originate a call in cell 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over the call to cell 2. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell) and then set Cell Index Type to BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index). Set Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell). Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Check and record the MAIO information element in the Channel Activation message on the TCH for MS 1 in cell 2. Do not hang up MS 1 and use MS 2 to originate a call in cell 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over the call in cell 1 to cell 2. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell) and then set Cell Index Type to BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index). In addition, set Handover Scope to OUTCELL (Outgoing cell).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-113

2.

3.

4.

5.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

6.

Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Check and record the MAIO information element in the Channel Activation message on the TCH for MS 2 in cell 2. Compare the MAIOs in the two records in Step 4 and Step 6. The expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicates that the IBCA handover takes effect. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the neighboring cell relationship between cell 1 and cell 2. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By index). In addition, specify Source Cell Index and Neighbor 2G Cell Index. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), set Neighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring Cells). In addition, specify Source Cell Index. The expected result: No queried items have desired results on display. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set IBCA Allowed to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index). In addition, specify Cell Index. The expected result: IBCA Allowed is set to No.

7.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

2.

3. 4.

----End

7.44 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board is configured. The BTS supports the Soft-Synchronized Network feature. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP. This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BSC is configured with at least two BTSs. Each BTS is configured with two or more cells. In addition, the longitude, latitude, and antenna azimuth of each cell are configured.

Context
The soft-synchronized network applies to the scenario of tight frequency reuse and requires the cooperation of network planning and features such as IBCA. It can effectively improve the
7-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

performance of the KPIs associated with the wireless network. In addition, this feature can convert an asynchronous network into a synchronous network. In cooperation with other associated technologies, this technology eliminates random and unpredictable interference and thus increases the system capacity.
NOTE

l The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. l This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA to improve the frequency utilization and increase the network capacity. l This feature is applicable to the scenario where TDM transmission is used between the BSC and BTS, including Abis TDM over E1/T1/STM-1 and Abis IP over E1/T1/STM-1. In the scenario where Ethernet network is used between the BSC and BTS, that is, Abis IP over FE/GE, the Soft-Synchronized Network feature is not supported.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure To activate the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows: 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS repeatedly. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of each BTS involved in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Site Sync Zone of each BTS to the same value.
NOTE

BTS Symbol Offset is optional. This parameter specifies the frame offset between BTSs and is set as required.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG. In this step, set Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS to NO(NO). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NCELL. In this step, set AISS Task Index to the index of the soft-synchronized network task specified in Step 1. Then, set Cell Index Type to BYIDX(By Cell Index) and set First Cell Index and Second Cell Index to add a pair of neighboring cells in the BSC.
NOTE

3.

A pair of neighboring cells in the BSC are automatically generated according to certain rules. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells as required.

To activate the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows: The configuration of the soft-synchronized network between BSC1 and BSC2 is taken as an example. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS repeatedly. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of each BTS involved in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Site Sync Zone of each BTS to the same value. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG for BSC 1. In this step, set Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to YES. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG for BSC 2. In this step, set Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-115

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), set Support BSC AISS to YES, set Base BSC to NO, and set Control BSC DPC to the DPC of BSC 1. 4. 5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT2GCELL for BSC1 to configure a cell under BSC 2 as the external cell of BSC 1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL for BSC 1 to configure the external cell added in Step 4 as the neighboring cell of a cell under BSC 1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD EXTNCELL for BSC 1 to add a pair of neighboring cells between BSCs.
NOTE

6.

A pair of neighboring cells between BSCs are automatically generated according to certain rules. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells as required. Steps 4 to 6 are performed to add a pair of optimal neighboring cells between BSCs.

Verification Procedure To verify the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows: 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information on the soft-synchronized network.
NOTE

If you do not specify AISS Task Index, the information on all the soft-synchronized network tasks is queried.

The expected result: Check whether AISS Task Index of the added intra-BSC softsynchronized network exists. If the index exists, you can infer that the intra-BSC softsynchronized network is added successfully. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AISSRUNSTATE to query the BTS synchronization information. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSPBTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset in the synchronization between BTSs.

To verify the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows: 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information on the soft-synchronized network. The expected result: Support BSC AISS of BSC 1 is YES, and Control BSC DPC of BSC 2 is the SP of control BSC. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BSCSYNCINFO to query the information about the synchronization between BSCs.
NOTE

l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the SP of BSC 1 to query the state of the local BSC. l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the SP of BSC 2 to query the state of the collaborative BSC.

The expected result: BSC Sync State of BSC 1 and BSC 2 is Adjusted. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset in the synchronization between BTSs. The expected result: BTS status of the BTS is Synchronized. l
7-116

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AISSCFG to remove a soft-synchronized network task. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS involved in the intra-BSC or inter-BSC soft-synchronized network.

----End

7.45 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization


This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature. In the case of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DGPS board needs to be added. In the case of the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A, the USCU board needs to be added. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
Converting an asynchronous network into a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference, increase the network capacity, and improve the performance of the KPIs related to the radio network. The following procedure takes how to configure the GPS synchronization of the BTS3900 GSM as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board. In this step, set Board Type to USCU(USCU). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP. In this step, set GPS or Glonass to GPS(GPS), GPS Antenna Delay to 800, and Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).
NOTE

GPS or Glonass needs to be set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. Antenna Power Supply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPS Antenna Delay needs to be set according to the feeder length.

3. l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

Verification Procedure None. Deactivation Procedure


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-117

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example
// Activation procedure ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=2, SN=10, BT=USCU; SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=2, SN=10, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=800, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER; SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;

7.46 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Impact on BSC6900 hardware: IP interface boards need to be used on the Abis interface. Impact on BTS hardware: This feature applies to only the 3900 series base stations. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP. l License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of a synchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet. The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC or BTS hardware. The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer of the Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the code flow of the Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting the highly precise clock. The reception end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the data flow. In this way, the accuracy of the clock is ensured. Another benefit of the feature is that it does not require additional BTS hardware to achieve clock synchronization in the all-IP network.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the clock type of a BTS. In this step, set Clock Type to SYNETH_CLK(SynEth Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query the current clock source configuration of the system. Expected results: Selected Clock Source is SynEth Clock.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1.

7-118

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=SYNETH_CLK, TRANSTYPE=FE, PN=0; // Verification procedure DSP BTSBRD: INFOTYPE=BASEINFO, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.47 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The BSC that the test cell belongs to is connected to the M2000, and cell-level counters can be retrieved on the M2000.

Context
Power control is a process in which the MS or BTS uses certain rules to adjust and control the transmit power as required, without affecting the speech quality. It reduces the interference in the entire network and decreases power consumption. Power control is mainly applicable to the network with tight frequency reuse as well as high traffic volume or strong interference. In the GSM network, power control can be separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can also be performed on each MS. HUAWEI III power control algorithm enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Control Switch to PWR3(Power controlIII). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control For
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-119

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Non-AMR to ON(Allowed). In addition, adjust Huawei III power control parameters or set them to their default values.
NOTE

Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR are set to ON(Allowed) by default.

Verification Procedure 1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies. Retrieve the following counters related to Cell 0 on the M2000. Table 7-5 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control Measurement Unit Measurement of Power Control Messages in MR per Cell Counter Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call Ratio of Duration (Maximum Downlink Transmit Power) (%) Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%) Mean Strength of Downlink Signals Mean Strength of Uplink Signals Mean Quality of Downlink Signals Mean Quality of Uplink Signals Interference Band Measurement per TRX Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 2

2.

7-120

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Measurement Unit

Counter Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 5

Receive Quality Measurement per TRX

Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0)

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-121

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Measurement Unit

Counter Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7)

3. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1. The expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II). Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1. Check the counters for one hour and save them.

5. 6.

7-122

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7. 8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR3(Power control III). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1. The expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR3(Power controlIII). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR to ON(Allowed) for cell 0 and cell 1.

9.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the settings of Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For NonAMR for cell 0 and cell 1. The expected result: Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR are set to ON(Allowed). 11. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1. 12. Check the counters for one hour and save them. 13. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 12 and Step 6. The expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained in Step 12 is smaller than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to interference band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than that obtained in 6Step 6. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting of Power Control Switch. The expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II). ----End

7.48 Configuring DTX


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801 DTX.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on other features None License The license has been activated. Other Prerequisites Idle channels are available in the test cell.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-123

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
License is required to activate DTX. DTX reduces the data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thus reducing the system interference and saving system resources. In addition, DTX reduces the workload of the TX module of the MS, thus enabling the MS to enjoy a longer call duration and standby time.

CAUTION
DTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and FR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).
NOTE

If the HR service is processed currently, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).

2.

Optional (this parameter is configured during downlink DTX configuration). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to set the software parameters of a cell. In this step, set DL DTX Strategy to BSC Strategy.

Verification Procedure Verifying uplink DTX 1. 2. 3. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Run the SND GCELLSYSMSG command to send system messages to the test cell. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain. Expected results: A message of the BCCH Information type is traced. system-infotype is system-information-3 and the value of dtx is 1. The system message is sent correctly. 4. 5. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain. Expected results: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In the information element channel-number, the value of channel-type is bm-acch. In the information element channel-mode, the value of dtx-uplink is 1. This indicates that the BSC supports uplink DTX. Verifying downlink DTX 1. 2. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface, and then check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain. Expected results: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In the information element channel-mode, the value of dtx-downlink is 1. This indicates that the BSC supports downlink DTX.

7-124

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set the basic parameters of a cell. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall not Use) and FR Use Downlink DTX to NO(No).

----End

Example
//Activation DTX SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=YES, FRULDTX=Shall_Use; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, DLDTXPOLICY=BSC_STRATEGY; //Verification DTX SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024; //Deactivation DTX SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=NO, FRULDTX=Shall_NOT_Use;

7.49 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features This feature and the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (Baseband Hopping) cannot be used together. l License The license is activated.

Context
The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function can be enabled during a specific period. After this function is enabled, idle TRXs can be shut down to reduce power consumption when estimated traffic load is light, and disabled TRXs can be switched on so that they are available for use when estimated traffic load is heavy. Generally, channel allocation measures are used together with this function. The channels on the BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned so that the utilization of the non-BCCH TRX channels is decreased and the overall power consumption of the BTS is reduced. In addition, the BTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. Channels on the TRXs with high priorities are preferentially assigned to MSs. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels into a few TRXs so that as many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down. When the BCCH TRX participates in baseband FH, the cell TRX cannot be shut down. Thus, the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown cannot be used.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-125

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

When the BCCH TRX does not participate in baseband FH and all the TRXs (excluding the BCCH TRX) in the cell are idle, the TRXs can be shut down. If one or more TRXs (excluding the BCCH TRX) are not idle, the TRXs cannot be shut down. Before configuring Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier on the TRX, ensure that the TRX meets the following conditions: l l l The TRX is not on the BCCH. The PDCH is not available on the TRX. The antenna hopping is disabled for the TRX.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to YES(Yes), and set Time When the Function Is Enabled and Time When the Function Is Disabled according to the actual condition. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes) to enable the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function for the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes), thus allowing the BSC6900 to shut down the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. Optional: Run the ADD BSCDSTPADATE command to set the period in which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled. In the period of heavy traffic, this function needs to be disabled.
NOTE

2.

3.

4.

l The BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA can be used to query the value of Prohibiting Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Date Range. l The BSC6900 MML command RMV BSCDSTPADATE can be used to remove the period in which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled.

Verification Procedure 1. Wait for about five minutes. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GTRXSTAT to query the value of Close TRX Power. The expected result: The value of Close TRX Power is Yes.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown TRX to NO(No).

----End

7-126

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.50 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware DRFU, DRRU, and optimized DTRU support this feature. BTS3012/BTS3012AE(QTRU), DBS3900(RRU3008), and BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L(GRFU) do not support this feature. BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when they use a non-optimized double-transceiver unit. l l Dependency on Other Features None. License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level is a function based on which the PA is controlled on a timeslot basis. In this manner, the static power consumption of the PA is 0 in the timeslots when the TRX is has no data to transmit, and thus the static power consumption of the PA is reduced. TRX power consumption is a major part of the BTS power consumption, and PA power consumption is a major part of TRX power consumption. According to network operation experiences, TRXs do not transmit signals all the time. This function shuts down the PA of the TRX when there is no data to be transmitted in certain timeslots, thus reducing the cost on power greatly.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow Turning Off Time Slot to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA to check the value of Time Slot Turning Off PA Enable. The expected result is Yes. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC to NO(No).

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-127

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Example
//Activation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=YES; //Verification procedure LST BSCDSTPA:; //Deactivation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=NO;

7.51 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXs and must be configured as combining output. The TRXs supporting ICB are the optimized DTRU, DRRU, and DRFU. l Dependency on Other Features This feature and the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) are mutually exclusive. l l License The license of this feature is activated. Other Prerequisites The cell attribute parameter Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment is set to Yes.

Context
The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle and there are idle channels on the BCCH carrier in the cell. The ICB function cannot be enabled on channels that are configured as static PDCHs. Neither can the function be enabled on dynamic PDCHs (TCHs) that are converted to PDCHs. The enabled ICB feature does not save energy in all cases. It is energy-saving only when the output power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0, or when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 1.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, change ICB Allowed to YES(YES).

Verification Procedure None. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End
7-128 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Example
// Activation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ICBALLOW=YES;

7.52 Configuring Active Backup Power Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
The BSC takes the cell coverage, capacity, and backup power time into consideration when performing the Active Backup Power Control function. An operator can configure three backup power control strategies: l Coverage preferred The BTS shuts down some TRXs and then gradually decreases the transmit power of the remaining TRXs. l Capacity preferred The BTS gradually decreases the transmit power of all the TRXs and then shuts down some TRXs. l Backup power time preferred The BTS shuts down some TRXs and at the same time decreases the transmit power of the remaining TRXs. The Active Backup Power Control function gradually reduces the coverage area of a cell, and thus the calls on the edge of the cell are absorbed by neighboring cells. Therefore, the network KPIs are not affected.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power), and set Backup Power Saving Policy, Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Start Time[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop Power Threshold according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSBAKPWR to query the value of Backup Power Saving Policy.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-129

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The expected result: The value of Backup Power Saving Policy is not NULL. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).

7.53 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
The power consumption optimization based on channel type has two functions: dynamic voltage adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. With the dynamic voltage adjustment function, different working voltages are provided for the TRX power amplifiers according to the applied modulation scheme. If all channels on a TRX are configured as TCHs and the TRX works in GMSK mode, the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSK mode. If a channel on the TRX is configured as dynamic or static PDCH and the TRX works in 8PSK mode; the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. The BTS provides the TRX with appropriate working voltage, thus reducing the power consumption.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCH Power Saving Enable to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of PDCH Power Saving Enable. The expected result: The value of PDCH Power Saving Enable is YES(Yes). 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the value of Adjust Voltage.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1.

7-130

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: The value of Adjust Voltage is Yes. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCH Power Saving Enable to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set Adjust Voltage to NO(No).

7.54 Configuring PSU Smart Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU), and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, change PSU Turning Off Enable to YES(YES).

Verification Procedure None. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES;

7.55 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-131

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature aims to reduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX, thus reducing the power consumption of the BTS. After this feature is enabled, the accuracy of measuring the receive levels of neighboring cells may be affected. Therefore, it is recommended that this feature be enabled when the traffic is light, for example, at night.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power Derating Enabled to YES(Yes), and set other parameters such as Power Derating Start Time, Power Derating End Time, and Power Derating Range.

WARNING
When the power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX is reduced, the downlink receive level of the cell detected by the MS camping on the neighboring cells may be inaccurate and the handover of the MS to the cell may fail. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. 2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power Derating Active Channel Enabled to YES(Yes), the BSC6900 is allowed to reduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to query the value of Power Derating Enabled. The expected result: The value of Power Derating Enabled is Yes. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power Derating Enabled to NO(No).

Verification Procedure 1.

7-132

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.56 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The BTS that is configured with the specified cell supports the feature of dynamic cell power off. There are concentric cells in the cell.

Context
In a co-BSC multiband network topology, when the traffic volume is low, a fully covered network can carry all the traffic on the existing network. In such a case, all the network equipment of the other frequency band can be disabled to reduce the network power consumption.
NOTE

The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set Enable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE(Enable), and set the parameters related to the time of dynamic cell power off.
NOTE

If the concentric cell does not support certain services in the cell, the related services in the concentric cell are not supported after dynamic cell power off is deactivated.

Verification Procedure
NOTE

There is a concentric cell in the cell to be verified and the concentric cell works properly. There is no call access request in the cell to be verified. The traffic of the concentric cell is lower than Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, set Enable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE(Enable), and set Same Coverage Cell Index Type to the index of the concentric cell. In addition, set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-133

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time ranges between the time interval of the two parameters. 2. Wait for about five minutes, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to display the status of the cell to be verified. The expected result: Cell Dynamic Switch is set to Yes, which indicates that the dynamic cell power off feature is valid. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is beyond the time period specified by the two parameters. Wait for about one minute, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to display the status of the cell to be verified. The expected result: Cell Dynamic Switch is set to No, which indicates that the cell is enabled. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).

4.

7.57 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment


This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111611 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware The BTS3900B does not support the feature. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).

Verification Procedure None. Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Adjust Voltage to NO(No).

----End

7-134

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Example
//Activation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=YES; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=NO;

7.58 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment


This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/AE(DTRU), DBS3900(RRU3004), BTS3900/A/L (DRFU), and BTS3900B do not support the feature. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(YES).

Verification Procedure None. Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage to NO(NO).

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=YES; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=NO;

7.59 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111613 Weather Adaptive Power Management.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-135

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l l The license of this feature is activated. The M2000 supports the Weather Adaptive Power Management feature. The solar controller supports the Weather Adaptive Power Management feature. The solar controller is connected to the BTS.

Context
l l l The Weather Adaptive Power Management feature is license-controlled. Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Weather Adaptive Power Management feature. Administrators or operators configure the relevant parameters and periodically record the weather forecast data on the M2000. The BTS obtains the information about the power generation capacity of the solar panel, power consumption of the BTS, and remaining capacity of the storage batteries from the solar energy controller, and then reports the collected information to the M2000 periodically. The M2000 periodically generates the working power levels of the BTS based on the available electric power of the current batteries of the BTS, predicted electric power to be generated, and predicted power to be consumed by the BTS. This minimizes the probability of power exhaustion and maximizes the service duration of the BTS without affecting the service quality. In this way, renewable energy is optimally configured and the cost for configuring the renewable energy is reduced. The main operations performed on the M2000 are as follows. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide. History weather data serves as an important reference for the M2000 to predict the electric power to be generated on the BTS. You need to collect and configure the history weather data on the M2000. After you create a BTS power-saving task, set parameters relevant to the task, and perform the task on the M2000, the M2000 predicts the electric power to be generated on the BTS solar panel based on the weather data. Then, the M2000 periodically generates the working power levels of the BTS based on the information such as power generation capacity of the solar panel, remaining capacity of the storage batteries, and power consumption of the BTS.

7.60 Configuring Flex Abis


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The XPUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa board. For how to configure a board, see Configuring a Board. l l l
7-136

Dependency on Other Features None License The license has been activated. The configuration on the BTS is complete. For details, see Configuring the BTS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
l In traditional mode, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the Um interface resources and the Abis interface transmission resources. After Flex Abis is enabled in the BSC, the Abis interface transmission resources use the resource pool mode to improve the utilization of the transmission resources. The bypass BTS, upper-level BTS, and lower-level BTS must also work in Flex Abis mode. When both Huawei I BTS ring topology and Flex Abis are applied, the following conditions must be met: Flex Abis must be configured on all BTSs. In addition, the BTSs support only the configuration of one E1 for the forward link and one E1 for the reverse link. No BTS can be configured with Abis bypass. No BTS can be configured with 16 kbit/s LPAD signaling links. No BTS can be configured with Abis timeslot self-detection and self-healing functions.

l l

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
NOTE

This operation affects the ongoing services. Perform the operation when the traffic volume is low.

2. 3. 4. l 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) to enable the Flex Abis. Run the SET BTSFLEXABISPARA command to set the parameters related to Flex Abis. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPORTTS. In this step, set BTS In Port NO. to the number of the port the base station is connected to, Port Direction to the same direction as the base station, and TS Type to ALL(ALL). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFORBIDTS to block Flex timeslots. In this step, set Start Timeslot No., Start Sub Timeslot No., End Timeslot NO., and End Sub Timeslot NO. according to the timeslot No. and sub-timeslot No. of Flex timeslots to ensure that only two contiguous 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots are used for Flex Abis.
NOTE

Verification Procedure

2.

Do not block any timeslot other than Flex Abis timeslots. Timeslots are blocked in unit of 16 kbit/ s sub-timeslots, and reserve only one 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot for services.

3. 4.

Run the DEA GCELL command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be blocked. Repeat this step until there is only one cell under the BTS. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the channel to be blocked, and Administrative State to Lock(Lock). Repeat this step until the cell under the BTS has only one BCCH, one SDCCH, and two TCHs. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and hold on the call. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to query the timeslot state. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-137

5.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

(OCCUPIED). Check that the Flex Abis timeslot corresponding to the TCH occupied by the call service is the timeslot that is unblocked. 6. 7. End the call and block the occupied TCH. Then, only one unblocked TCH is available. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and hold on the call. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTScommand to check the state of timeslots. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED). Check that the call initiated by the MS is carried on a new TCH whose Flex Abis timeslot is unblocked. Hang up the call. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
NOTE

8. l 1.

Deactivation Procedure

This operation affects the ongoing services. Perform the operation when the traffic volume is low.

2. 3. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FIX_16K_ABIS(Fix Abis). Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

7.61 Configuring BTS Local Switch


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The BTS local switching applies to only the double-transceiver BTS and the 3900 series base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode. l Dependency on Other Features In Abis TDM transmission mode, the feature depends on GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. In Abis IP transmission mode, the feature depends on GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1. The feature are the following features are mutually exclusive: GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. l l l l License The license of this feature is activated. The BSC can work in either BM/TC separate mode or BM/TC combined mode, and TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater and A interfaces. In the sites with combined BTS cabinets, BSS local switching can be enabled only when the BTS software and TRX software both support BSS local switching. If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, the BSS local switching is not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to the same MGW or different MGWs. In HDLC transmission mode, BSS local switching is not supported.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l
7-138

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
The BTS local switching applies to only the double-transceiver BTS and the 3900 series base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode. When a BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, the BTS must be enabled with Flex Abis. The BTS local switching can save the transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reduce the TC processing delay during the call. If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BTS local switching mode: lawful interception, MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a call, speech service and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switching.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY (BTS Only), and specify Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS. If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch. If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether the BSS local switching performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
NOTE

l If the BSC6900 is expected to perform the BSS local switching, you need to set MSCCollaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). l If the MSC is expected to involve in the BSS local switching you need to set MSCCollaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support) or ENHANCED (Enhanced Function), and then to set related parameters on the MSC side.

3.

When the BTS uses the TDM service-bearing mode, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to YES(Yes). Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query the call resources used by an MS.
NOTE

4. l

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

If BTS local switching is enabled successfully, no information on the Ater or Abis interface is displayed.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-139

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The Abis interface processing board PEUa or POUc must be configured. In BM/TC separated scenarios, a DPUc board must be configured for HDLC frame processing in the subrack where the PEUa board is located. l Dependency on Other Features This feature cannot be enabled together with the "GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch" feature. l l l License The license has been activated. The BTS software version supports this function. The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.

Context
The Abis transmission optimization allows multiple links to be multiplexed onto a channel composed of several timeslots, thus enabling more efficient use of transmission resources.

CAUTION
l HDLC_HubBTS does not support the ring topology, bypass, and Flex Abis. l HDLC does not support the bypass and Flex Abis.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS. In this step, set Service Type to HDLC or HDLC_HubBTS. Step 2 Configure the BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS. ----End

7.63 Configuring Flex Ater


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Flex Ater.

Prerequisite
l
7-140

Dependency on Hardware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

None l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The TC subrack of the BSC is remotely configured. TDM transmission is used over the Ater interface.

Context
When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the Ater resources are allocated according to the channel type during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used. This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TC networking.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Switch of 8K on Ater to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERTS. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM) or CFGTX(TX), and set Ater connection path index to the index of an Ater connection path. The expected result: The number of occupied 16 kbit/s resources is equal to that of full-rate calls. In addition, the number of occupied 8 kbit/s resources is equal to that of half-rate calls. In this case, Flex Ater is enabled. l Deactivating Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Switch of 8K on Ater to NO(No).

Verifying Procedure 1.

7.64 Configuring BSC Local Switch


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch.

Prerequisite
l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-141

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The BSC can be work in either BM/TC separate mode or BM/TC combined mode, and TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater interface. A BTS in transmission optimization mode or an IP-based BTS cannot involve in the BSC local switch. In the sites with combined BTS cabinets, BSS local switch can be enabled only when the BTS software and TRX software both support BSS local switch.

Context
When the calling and called MSs are served by the same BSC, the BSC performs loopback on the speech signals inside the BSC rather than transmitting them over the Ater and A interfaces, therefore releasing the Ater transmission resources and TC resources. It helps save the local or remote resources on the Ater interface. If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BSC local switch mode: lawful interception, MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a call, speech service and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switch. If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, the BSS local switching is not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to the same MGW or different MGWs. In HDLC transmission mode, BSS local switching is not supported.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only), and specify Options for BSC Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS.
NOTE

l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When Ater Congests), you need to specify Ater Jam Rate for BSC Local Switch. l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BSC.

2.

Run the MOD GCNNODE command to determine whether the BSS local switch performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
NOTE

l If the BSC is expected to perform the BSS local switch, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). l If the MSC is expected to involve in the BSS local switch you need to set MSCCollaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support) or ENHANCED (Enhanced Function), and then to set related parameters on the MSC side.

7-142

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

3. l

Optional: Run the SET BTSLSW command. In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to YES(Yes). Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BSC. Run the DSP CALLRES command to query the resources of an MS.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

If BSC local switch is enabled successfully, no information on the Ater interface is displayed in the result.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BTSONLY(BTS Only).

----End

7.65 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The POUc board is in position. When the Abis interface uses TDM transmission, the DPUc board is configured. l l l Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-116901 Flex Ater. License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode, and the TC subrack is configured remotely.

Context
When the BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack is configured remotely, the compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adopted to improve the transmission efficiency over the Ater interface and reduce the transmission cost. The Ater Compression Transmission feature is based on IP over PPP over STM-1 technology, where the IP packets of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted over the channelized STM-1. The compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface does not support IP over FE/GE, but only supports IP over E1 for transmitting the user plane data. The configuration on the signaling plane is similar to that in Ater over TDM mode.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-143

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a POUc board. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater connection path between the MPS and the TCS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL to add an Ater signaling link between the MPS/EPS and the TCS. Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE to add an adjacent node. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path. To add more IP paths, run this command repeatedly. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.. Verifing the physical layer link. When the PPPLINK is configured. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command. The expected result: the statistics on PING packets can be received, the link is functional. When the MPLINK is configured. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link state and LCP negotiated state. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP MPGRP command. Expected result: the statistics on PING packets can be received, the link is functional.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is functional. Expected result: the Usage status is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), the LAPD link is functional.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent node, number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-144

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Expected result: the Operation state is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, it indicates that the adjacent node is functional. 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path is available. Expected result: the Operation status is AVAILABLE(AVAILABLE) and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, it indicates that the IP path is functional. 6. Make a call. The call is set up successfully. When the call is set up, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the usage of the Ater interface resources. Expected result: the UDP usage on the BM side and the TC side are the same and the service types are correct. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End This feature does not need to be deactivated.

7.66 Configuring BTS Ring Topology


This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117801 BTS Ring Topology.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The BSC is configured with the XPUa and EIUa boards. The BTS3900B does not support the feature. l Dependency on Other Features Huawei BTS ring topology II depends on GBFD-117802 Fast Ring Network Switch. The feature conflicts with the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1. l License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
Ring topology is a special type of chain topology. In the topology, sites connect to each other to form a normal chain. The lowest-level site is connected to the BSC through a transmission link, thus forming a ring. If the communication of the ring is broken at a point, the topology of the sites that precede the breakpoint remains the same. The sites that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection in the reverse direction. Compared with the ordinary chain topology, the advantage of the ring topology is as follows: When a connection is broken at a point, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In this way, the sites precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, thus improving the robustness of the system.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-145

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. 2.

Configure the BTS data by referring to Configuring the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT repeatedly to add BTS connections.
NOTE

You need to configure at least one connection whose BTS In Port No. is set to 0.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to set ring topology attributes of the BTS. In this step, set Configure Ring II to YES(Yes), and then set Ring II Wait Time Before Switch, and Ring II Try Rotating Duration Time. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to check that Config Ring is set to Yes.

4. l 1. l

Verification Procedure

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

7.67 Configuring TRX Mutual Aid


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aid.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on other features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other Prerequisites TRX Mutual Aid is supported in a cell. At least two TRXs in the same band are configured in the cell. BCCH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell. Baseband FH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell. Switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell. Switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell.

Context
TRX mutual aid is a function with which the BSC designates an available TRX in the cell to replace a faulty TRX. TRX mutual aid ensures that the cell works normally when faults occur on some TRXs in the cell. l BCCH mutual aid is a function with which the BSC selects a normal TRX as the new BCCH TRX by means of the TRX cooperation algorithm when the BCCH TRX is faulty. In this
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-146

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

way, the cell is always functional. When the fault in the original BCCH TRX is rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX. l Baseband FH TRX mutual aid is a function enabled by the BSC when a TRX involved in FH is faulty in a cell whose Frequency hopping mode is set to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping). In such a case, the BSC removes the faulty TRX from the FH group, whereas other TRXs in the FH group remain BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping).

TRX mutual aid is specific for each cell. That is, you can enable or disable the TRX Mutual Aid function for each cell independently.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX Aiding Function Control to AllowReImmed(Allow & Recover Immediately) and Switchback Policy of Baseband FH Mutual Aid to PART(Part)

Verification Procedure Verifying BCCH TRX mutual aid and switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid 1. 2. Power off the BCCH TRX board for the test cell. In this way, the BCCH TRX becomes faulty and BCCH mutual aid is triggered. Wait 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Check whether Channel Type of channel 0 (not the BCCH TRX in initial configuration) is set to Main BCCH. Use an MS to access the cell with the BCCH TRX mutual aid function enabled, and make a call. Check whether the call is set up successfully and whether voice can be heard clearly during the call. Power on the TRX mentioned in step Step 1 to enable switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid. Wait 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Check whether Channel Type of channel 0 (the BCCH TRX in initial configuration) is set to Main BCCH. Use an MS to access the cell with the switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid function enabled, and then make a call. Check whether the call is set up successfully and whether voice can be heard clearly during the call. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to NO_Hop(No hop).
NOTE

3.

4. 5.

6.

Verifying baseband FH TRX mutual aid and switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aid 1.

l There are at least two operational TRXs in a baseband FH group to ensure the baseband hopping frequency when a TRX in the same group is faulty. l Operations such as performing a level-4 reset of a base station, adding a base station after removing it, activating a base station, and deactivating a base station clear the base station state recorded at the BSC. As a result, the cell participating in baseband FH TRX cooperation returns to the initial state.

2.

Trace the CS messages over the Abis interface by referring to #mbsc-10-83. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the OML tab. Then, power off a TRX in the baseband FH group to enable Baseband FH Mutual Aid.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-147

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3.

Wait for 15 minutes, and then check that the IE arfcnLst in the Set Channel Attributes message of the faulty TRX includes only one frequency whereas arfcnLst in Set Channel Attributes of other TRXs in the same baseband FH group includes multiple frequencies except the frequency of the faulty TRX. Trace the messages over the A interface by referring to #mbsc-10-76. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing task. Trace the CS messages over the Abis interface by referring to #mbsc-10-83. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing task. Use an MS to access the test cell and then to originate a call. Check whether voice can be heard clearly in the call and whether the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct. Ensure that the field h in the IE hoppingchannel of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message must be 1. Power on the TRX mentioned in step Step 2 to enable the switchback of baseband FH mutual aid. Wait for 15 minutes, and then check that the IE arfcnLst in Set Channel Attributes of the fault-rectified TRX includes all frequencies in the baseband FH group. Use an MS to access the test cell and then to originate a call. Check whether voices can be heard clearly in the call and whether the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct. Ensure that h in hopping-channel of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message must be 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow(TRX Aiding Not Allowed).

4.

5. 6.

7.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReImmed, BHPREPOLICY=PART; //Verification procedure //Verifying BCCH TRX mutual aid and switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1; //Verifying baseband FH TRX mutual aid and switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aid SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=NO_Hop; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=TRXAid_NotAllow;

7.68 Configuring MSC Pool


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool.

Prerequisite
l l
7-148

Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

None l l License The license is activated. Others Two MSs are available and they are registered at the HLR. The MSCs and the MGWs are fully interconnected and the MSC pool function is configured on the MSC side. The interconnection data between the BSC6900 and the MSC is negotiated. The OSP and DSP are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC. The transmission over the A interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the A Interface (over TDM) or Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

Context
An MSC pool consists of multiple MSCs handling the traffic generated from one MSC pool area. A BSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool. All MSCs in the MSC pool share load and resources for equal distribution of traffic in the MSC pool, thus reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing redundancy. One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of 32 MSCs.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR to add a GSM operator. In this step, set Operator Type, Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC to select the network of a specific operator; set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes); set Length of NRI in TMSI and MSC NULL-NRI Value according to the data negotiated with the MSC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to add the mapping between an NRI and an MSC. In this step, set NRI Value according to the data negotiated with the MSC. Ensure that the NRI value is the same as that on the MSC side. Enable the TMSI reallocation function on the MSC side. On the LMT, start the A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DPC of MSC1. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell where MS1 camps on. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is displayed.
NOTE

2.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3.

Start the A interface message tracing with the DSP of MSC2 by using the method described in Step 2 and Step 3.

4. 5.

Switch on MS1. Use MS1 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC1 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS1. Switch on MS2. Use MS2 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC2 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-149

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

To enable the MS to initiate a location update at a specific MSC, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to set the administrative states of all the other MSCs to UNAVAIL (Unavailable). After the location update, you need to change the states of these MSCs to NORMAL (Normal) again.

6.

Move MS1 to the coverage area of MSC2. Then, use MS1 to originate a call and check the A interface message tracing. The expected result: MS1 sets up the call through MSC1, and the home MSC of MS1 remains unchanged.

7.

Move MS2 to the coverage area of MSC1. Then, use MS2 to originate a call and check the A interface message tracing. The expected result: MS2 sets up the call through MSC2, and the home MSC of MS2 remains unchanged.
NOTE

In the TMSI reallocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured by the CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to an appropriate MSC when the MS originates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the BSC6900 side must be consistent with the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the CN side. You can use the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to configure the mapping on the BSC6900 side.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).

----End

7.69 Configuring the SGSN Pool


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. 7.69.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. 7.69.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool.

7.69.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The DPUd/XPUa/FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
7-150 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l l l

Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data. The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal. The BSC supports SGSN Pool. The interface board is configured with a device IP address or port IP address.

Context
SGSN Pool enables multiple SGSNs to form an SGSN pool. The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value. Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packet control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mapping between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL to add a network service virtual link (NSVL) on the BSC6900 side. If the NSE is in static configuration mode, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE to add an NSVL on the SGSN side. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSE Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in the SGSN pool. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-151

8. 9. l

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3.

Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on one PTP BVC. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS acessses the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on another PTP BVC. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to NO(No).

4.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1; //Configure SGSN Pool (IP transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_IP, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=1, NSEI=1, IP="131.131.131.132", UDPPN=1355, SRN=1, SN=1; ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3; //Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2; //Deactivate SGSN Pool: MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;

7.69.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware The DPUd/XPUa/PEUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data. The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal. The BSC supports SGSN Pool.
7-152 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources in the pool. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. l Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packet control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mapping between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BC to add a bearer channel (BC). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVC to add a network service virtual connection (NSVC). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSE Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in the SGSN pool. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional. Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on one PTP BVC. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS acessses the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on another PTP BVC. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to NO(No).

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3.

4.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-153

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Example
//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: MOD GCNOPERATOR: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1; //Configure SGSN Pool (FR transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_FR, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD BC: SRN=1, SN=1, PN=1, BCID=1; ADD NSVC: NSVCIDX=1, NSVCI=1, NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, BCID=1, DLCI=20; ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3; //Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2; //Deactivate SGSN Pool: MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;

7.70 Configuring Abis Bypass


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E need to be configured with the DMCM board supporting Abis Bypass. The DABB board needs to be added to the BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU). l Dependency on Other Features Under TDM networking, when ring topology is not used, Abis bypass can be used together with Flex Abis. When ring topology is used, Abis bypass cannot be used together with Flex-Abis. l License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
Abis bypass is applicable to GBSS chain topology. When the power supply to BTSs at a level fails, this feature makes the BTSs at the level bypassed and used only as the transmission path so that signals of lower-level BTSs can be transmitted to the BSC6900. After power supply is restored, the BTS and lower-level BTSs in the chain topology automatically reset and restore. To enable the Abis bypass function for cascaded BTSs, you only need to set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support) for each cascaded BTS. A maximum of five levels of cascaded NGBTSs support Abis bypass in TDM transmission mode. This function requires the support from DIP switches. Table 7-6 and Table 7-7 describe the bits of DIP switches.
7-154 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Table 7-6 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S4 DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 BIT1 S4 ON OFF BIT2 ON OFF BIT3 ON OFF BIT4 ON OFF E1 bypass is supported. E1 bypass is not supported. Unavailable Remarks

Others

Table 7-7 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S5 DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 BIT1 S5 ON BIT2 ON BIT3 ON BIT4 ON E1 bypass is not supported. Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the first-level cascaded bypass BTSs Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the second-level cascaded bypass BTSs Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the third-level cascaded bypass BTSs Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the fourth-level cascaded bypass BTSs Remarks

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-155

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

DIP Switch

Bit Status of S4 BIT1 OFF BIT2 ON BIT3 OFF BIT4 OFF

Remarks

Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the fifth-level cascaded bypass BTSs Unavailable

Others

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add an upper-level BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a lower-level BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection for the lower-level BTS. If more cascaded BTSs need to be added, repeat step 1 to step 3. In this step, Set Dest Node Type to BTS. Set Dest Father Index Type to BYID(By Index). Set Dest Father BTS Index to the index of the upper-level BTS. Set Dest Father BTS Port No. to the number of the port that connects the lowerlevel BTS to the upper-level BTS. 4. l Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS specified by the BTS index. Power off the upper-level BTS. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT and then enter the lower-level BTS maintenance page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then right-click a GTMU board and choose Query Board Information. A dialog box is displayed. Click Basic Information. If the basic information about the GTMU board is displayed properly, you can infer that the Abis bypass function is enabled. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, specify the index of the upper-level BTS. Set Abis ByPass Mode to FALSE(Not Support). Power off the upper-level BTS. Click Device Maintenance on the BSC6900 LMT and then enter the lower-level BTS maintenance page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then right-click a GTMU board and choose Query Board Information. A dialog box is displayed. Click Basic Information. If a message is promoted, indicating that the OML is faulty, you can infer that the Abis bypass function is disabled.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3.

----End
7-156 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.71 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Resources are available for terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission. The BTS supports the Ring I topology. l Dependency on Other Features This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface or GBFD-117801 Ring Topology. l Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
When a disaster-caused failure occurs in the active SDH transmission link over the TDM-based Abis interface, the system automatically switches transmission link to a backup satellite transmission link. In this manner, the normal operation of the network is ensured. With Abis transmission backup enabled, the transmission mode in the forward link is different from that in the reverse link. That is, the forward link uses terrestrial transmission and the reverse link uses satellite transmission, as shown in Figure Figure 7-8. Figure 7-8 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to YES (Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-157

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Verification Procedure 1. Optional: Use the MS to originate a call.


NOTE

Before verification, ensure that the MS can make a call through terrestrial transmission in a nonring topology network.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to YES (Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to query the value of Config Ring. The expected result: The value of Config Ring is Yes. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSTRANS to query the value of Transmission Mode. The expected result: The value of Transmission Mode is TER_AND_SAT_TRANS.

6.

Disrupt the terrestrial transmission between the BTS and the BSC. For example, remove the E1 cable from port 0 on the BTS. The expected result: The BTS is reset. Five minutes later, the MS can make a call.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission) or SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to NO (No).

2. ----End

7.72 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy.

Prerequisite
l l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. IP transmission mode is used between the BSC and the CN and between the BSC and the BTS. A BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs. Initial configuration is complete for BTSs and cells under the two BSCs and OPCs of the two BSCs. The BTSs and cells work properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-158

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

If a BTS under a BSC in a BSC node redundancy group is single-homed, it can be configured only under one BSC. If the BTS is dual-homed, it should be configured with primary host under one BSC and secondary host under the other BSC.

Context
The BSC node redundancy feature can improve reliability of running services. When one BSC is faulty, services in cells controlled by this BSC can be quickly taken over by the other BSC, thus preventing service disruption in the cells. Assume that a BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs, BSC 1 and BSC 2. BSC 1 controls BTS 1, and BSC 2 controls BTS 2. The configuration of the BSC node redundancy group consisting of BSC 1 and BSC 2 is taken as an example.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configuring the homing type of signaling points (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD OPC on BSC 1. In this step, set The host type of signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC 1. In this step, set OSP code of BSC 1 to be the same as OSP code of BSC 2, and set The host type of signalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD OPC on BSC 2. In this step, set The host type of signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST). (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC 2. In this step, set OSP code of BSC 2 to be the same as OSP code of BSC 1, and set The host type of signalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST). 2. Configuring the homing type of BTSs (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC 1. In this step, set HostType of BTS 1 to PRIMHOST(Primary Host). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS on BSC 1 to add BTS 2. Then run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP. In this step, set HostType of BTS 2 to SLAVEHOST(Slave Host). For details on how to configure cells and TRXs for BTS 2, see Configuring the BTS. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC 2. In this step, set HostType of BTS 2 to PRIMHOST(Primary Host). (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS on BSC 2 to add BTS 1. Then run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP. In this step, set HostType of BTS 1 to SLAVEHOST(Slave Host). For details on how to configure cells and TRXs for BTS 1, see Configuring the BTS. 3. Configuring the link between two BSCs (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively. In this step, set Signalling link mode to SERVER(SERVER MOD) and Application type to BBAP(BBAP). 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to configure the BSC node redundancy group.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-159

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5. 6. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to set the re-host policy of the BSC node redundancy group. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to activate the BSC node redundancy group. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 to query the hosting status of BTS 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 2 to query the hosting status of BTS 2. The expected result: Hosted is Yes. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 2 to query the hosting status of BTS 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 to query the hosting status of BTS 2. The expected result: Hosted is No. Disconnect BSC 1 from the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to query the hosting status of BTS 1. Hosted of BTS 1 is set to No under BSC 1 and to Yes under BSC 2. Thus the hosting status is changed. Reconnect BSC 1 to the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to query the hosting status of BTS 1. Hosted of BTS 1 is set to Yes under BSC 1 and to No under BSC 2. The hosting status is restored to the original one. Disconnect BSC 2 from the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to query the hosting status of BTS 2. Hosted of BTS 2 is set to Yes under BSC 1 and to No under BSC 2. Thus the hosting status is changed. Reconnect BSC 2 to the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to query the hosting status of BTS 2. Hosted of BTS 2 is set to No under BSC 1 and to Yes under BSC 2. The hosting status is restored to the original one.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Configure the homing type of signaling points on BSC 1: MOD OPC: SPX=1, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=123, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST; ADD OPC: NAME="abc", SPX=2, NI=INT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=234, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST; //Configure the homing type of signaling points on BSC 2: MOD OPC: SPX=3, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=234, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST; ADD OPC: NAME="abc", SPX=4, NI=INT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=123, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST; //Configure the homing type of BTSs on BSC 1: SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST, PEERBTSID=2, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.131", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=2; ADD BTS: BTSID=2, BTSNAME="abc", BTSTYPE=BTS30, SERVICEMODE=IP; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST, PEERBTSID=1, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.132", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=1;

7-160

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

//Configure the homing type of BTSs on BSC 2: SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST, PEERBTSID=1, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.131", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=1; ADD BTS: BTSID=2, BTSNAME="abc", BTSTYPE=BTS30, SERVICEMODE=IP; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST, PEERBTSID=2, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.132", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=2; //Configure the link between two BSCs: ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=SERVER, APP=BBAP, LOCIP1="131.131.131.132", PEERIP1="131.131.131.133", PEERPN=1448, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=1, LocalBSCID=1, PeerBSCID=2; SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY; ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=1; //Query the hosting status of a BTS: DSP BTSSTAT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSIDLST=1;

7.73 Configuring TC Pool


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission. 7.73.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode. 7.73.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.

7.73.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The EIUa/OIUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa OIUa board. l Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. l l License The license is activated. Network Topology At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is configured remotely.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-161

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks. l Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

Context
l To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs. All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC is only configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to the TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface. The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs. If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For details on the setting of TFO, see 7.102 Configuring TFO.

l l

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSC to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to add the OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC to add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the main BSC and TC subrack. 2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route.
7-162 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC, MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.

3.

Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC Pool. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to add an Ater connection path on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to add an Ater connection path on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in 3.1. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM). (5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC (TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in 3.1.

4.

Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an A interface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC), and set ID of slave BSC in TC Pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in 3.1. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route.
NOTE

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links, because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to add an MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2 (MTP2), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in 3.1. In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate. Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC pool networking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring the BTS. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-163

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC). The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly. 3. 4. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC (SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool. The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).

7.73.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa/OIUa/POUc board. l Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. l l License The license is activated. Network Topology At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is configured remotely. The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks. l Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

7-164

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
l To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs. All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC is only configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to the TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface. The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs. If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For details on the setting of TFO, see 7.102 Configuring TFO.

l l

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSC to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to add the OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC to add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the main BSC and TC subrack. (5) Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link group). Add PPP link data. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.
NOTE

b.

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one PPP link at a time. If multiple PPP links are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operation repeatedly.

Add MLPPP group data. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.
7-165

b.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one MLPPP group at a time. If multiple MLPPP groups are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operation repeatedly.

(6) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID. (7) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC). (8) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface). (9) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface). 2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route.
NOTE

The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC, MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.

3.

Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC Pool. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM). (5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC (TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.

7-166

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

(6) Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link group). Add PPP link data. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the sub-BSC to add a PPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC to add a PPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the sub-BSC to add an MLPPP group on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC to add an MLPPP group on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the sub-BSC to add an MLPPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the main BSC to add an MLPPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.

b.

Add MLPPP group data. a.

b.

c.

d.

(7) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the sub-BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID. (8) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC). (9) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the sub-BSC to add an IP path on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface). (10) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC to add an IP path on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface). 4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an A interface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC). In addition, specify ID of slave BSC in TC Pool. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-167

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links, because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to add an MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2 (MTP2). In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate and BSC ID in the TC pool. Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC pool networking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring the BTS. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC). The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly. 3. 4. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC (SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool. The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step, set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).

7.74 Configuring OML Backup


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728 OML Backup. When the OML backup function of the BTS is enabled, the BTS is automatically switched to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML is disconnected, therefore reducing the duration of service disruption.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The BTS3900B/BTS3900E does not support this feature. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E need to be configured with the DMCM supporting Abis Bypass. The BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU) need to be configured with the DABB.
7-168 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l l

Dependency on Other Features None Exclusive Features The feature conflicts with the features GBFD-117801 BTS Ring Topology, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, and GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization.

License The license of this feature is activated.

CAUTION
l The BTS in TDM or HDLC transmission mode supports this feature. The BTS in IP transmission mode does not support this feature. l The OMLs on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS main cabinet group can work in OML backup mode. The OMLs on other ports and the OMLs of the main and extension cabinet groups do not support this feature. l The active and standby OMLs between the BSC and the BTS must not be carried by the same E1/T1 cable, including the same E1/T1 cable of the upper-level BTS. When the upper-level BTS is connected to the BSC through only one E1/T1 cable, a secondary link should be added to enable that the upper-level BTS or the lower-level BTS is connected directly to the BSC if the lower-level BTS needs to use the OML backup function. l At least a 64 kbit/s idle timeslot needs to be reserved on E1/T1 port 1 for configuring this feature.

Context
l An OML is the operation and maintenance link between the BSC and the BTS. If an OML is faulty, the BTS cannot work. The OML backup feature allows the configuration of two OMLs on two independent E1 cables (one for each). When an active OML is faulty, the BTS uses a standby OML. Therefore, the BTS and cells can continue working without being out of service due to transmission failure or port failure. When this feature is used, two OMLs are configured respectively on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS. After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish OMLs on the two ports in turn. If the BTS establishes an OML on one port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTS is reset or the OML is broken. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts to establish an OML on the other port. If the OML is successfully established, the BSC triggers an OML switchover. After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are not switched over. That is, for port 0 and port 1, if the transmission link or port where the working OML is located is faulty, all the TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots configured on this port become unavailable. The TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots on a normal port, however, are still available. Therefore, services are still provided in the cells under the BTS.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-169

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP to set Configure Backup OML to YES(Yes) and then set Wait Time before OML Switch and Try Switching Duration Time. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOMLBACKUP to check the value of Configure Backup OML. The expected result: The value of Configure Backup OML is YES(Yes) and the values of other parameters are the configured values. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Verification Procedure 1.

Example
//Activation procedure SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=YES, WTBS=30, TBS=30; //Verification procedure LST BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Currently, only the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM support the AFC feature. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
AFC is a frequency correction algorithm used on the base station side for fast-moving MSs. It ensures reliability of the radio links carrying high-quality speech services for the MSs moving at 500 km/h and also ensures service continuity.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1.
7-170

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

If... The AFC function needs to be enabled in the uplink, The AFC function needs to be enabled in the downlink,

Then... Set UL Frequency Adjust Switch to YES(Yes). Set both UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to YES(Yes).

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT. If... The value of UL Frequency Adjust Switch is YES(Yes), The values of both UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch are YES(Yes), Then... The AFC function is enabled in the uplink. The AFC function is enabled in the downlink.

2.

Make a call in a fast-moving vehicle. On the LMT, click Trace. In the displayed "Trace Navigation Tree" pane, navigate to Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. In the displayed dialog box, click RSL in the Trace Type area. Then, check the Uplink Receive Quality in the measurement report. If the AFC function is activated, the Uplink Receive Quality is good. If the AFC function is not activated, the Uplink Receive Quality is bad.
NOTE

The Uplink Receive Quality is specified by the "rxquel-ul" field in the measurement report. The value ranges from 0 to 7. A small value indicates a good quality, for example, value 0 indicates that the quality is best. A great value indicates a bad quality, for example, value 7 indicates that the quality is worst.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT with both UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch set to NO(No).

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES; // Verification procedure LST GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0; // Deactivation procedure SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=NO, DLFREQADJ=NO;

7.76 Configuring Fast Move Handover


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-171

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover. l License The license is activated.

Context
Handovers along railway lines need to be completed quickly because users move fast from the coverage of one cell to that of another cell. To reduce failures, a second handover must be initiated quickly upon a handover failure (for example, interference occurs abruptly on the radio interface). The fast move handover algorithm, which is optimized on the basis of the current algorithm, can trigger better cell handover within a short period.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration as required.
NOTE

If the cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL. In this step, set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value as required.

3. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch and UL Frequency Adjust Value as required. Move the MS away from the serving cell until the frequency offset in the measurement report, CH RQD, or HO DETECT message is a negative value and the moving speed of the MS is greater than Quick Move Speed Threshold. When the frequency offset information fails to be reported or the frequency offset information is invalid, the uplink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, the downlink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, and the path loss of configured chain neighboring cells is lower than the specified threshold of the path loss of the serving cell. On the LMT, trace BSSAP messages over the A interface. The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC with the handover cause value of "better-cell".

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

7-172

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to NO(No).

----End

Example
//Activate the feature by running the following MML commands: SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=YES; SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=255; //Deactivate the feature by running the following command: SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=NO;

7.77 Configuring Chain Cell Handover


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
This feature increases the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition and thus increases the subscriber satisfaction.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). Optionally, run the MOD G2GNCELL command. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to list the setting of Chain Neighbor Cell. The expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is YES(Yes). l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-173

Verification Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to NO(No).

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Example
//Activation Chain Cell Handover ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ISCHAINNCELL=YES; //Verification Chain Cell Handover LST G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542; //Deactivation Chain Cell Handover MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;

7.78 Configuring Multi-Site Cell


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The base station must be a distributed base station (for example, DBS3900 GSM). Only the GTMUb, RRU3004, and RRU3008 support this feature. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
The multi-site cell feature enables multiple subsites to be configured as one logical cell. Such cell is also called a cascaded cell. A subsite is defined as an area physically covered by multiple RRUs that are served by one BBU. In coverage scenarios such as high-speed railways, tunnels, or indoor space, the use of cascaded cells can reduce handovers, increase coverage efficiency, and thus improve user experience. l The number of subsites and carriers supported by a multi-site cell is as follows: Twelve subsites with six carriers per subsite Nine subsites with eight carriers per subsite Eight subsites with nine carriers per subsite Six subsites with ten carriers per subsite l l In a multi-site cell, only one primary subsite can be configured. A TRX board bound with carriers can be added only to the primary subsite. TRX boards that are not bound with any carriers can be added only to the secondary subsite.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the primary subsite with Location Group No. set to the desired one and Is Main Local Group set to YES(YES).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-174

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the secondary subsite with Location Group No. set to a desired one and Is Main Local Group set to NO (NO). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to the primary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No.. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to the secondary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No.. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP to bind a carrier in the primary subsite to an idle channel on the TRX board in the secondary subsite after specifying Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, Cabinet No., Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No..
NOTE

3.

4.

5.

l This configuration takes effect only when the carriers in the primary subsite and those in the secondary subsite are the same. l All the subsites under a BTS or cell will be deleted when the BTS or cell is deleted.

6.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. If... Only the power amplifier for the carriers under the operating subsite needs to be started, The power amplifier for carriers under all subsites needs to be started, Then... Set Location Group Power Switch to OnlyCurPwrLoc(Only Current Working Location TRXes be Turned On). Set Location Group Power Switch to ALLPwrLoc(All Location TRXes be Turned On).

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSLOCGRP to query the values of Location Group No. and Is Main Local Group. The expected result: All the parameter values are the same as those set in activation procedure. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXU2LOCGRP to query the values of the Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No.. The expected result: All the parameter values are the same as those set in activation procedure. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSBINDLOCGRP to query the values of the Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, Cabinet No., Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No.. The expected result: All the parameter values are the same as those set in activation procedure. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SWP BTSLOCGRP to swap the primary and secondary subsites after specifying Location Group No..

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-175

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The Location Group No. in the BSC6900 MML command SWP BTSLOCGRP is set to the value of Sub-Location Group No..

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSLOCGRP to query the values of Location Group No. and Is Main Local Group. The expected result: The value of If Current Main Location corresponding to the Location Group No. set in verification step 4 is YES(YES).

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, ISMAINLOCGRP=YES; ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, ISMAINLOCGRP=NO; ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=0; ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1; ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=0; ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=2, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=1; // Verification procedure LST BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0; LST BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1; LST BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0; LST BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1; LST BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1; SWP BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1; DSP BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.79 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. The BSS and NSS support the GSM/WCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
The GSM/WCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect a GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA network or in an area
7-176 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

with weak WCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the WCDMA cell is higher than that in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a WCDMA cell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided by the WCDMA network. The feature GSM/WCDMA Interoperability is applied to scenarios such as cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. This feature has no impact on services. The network elements involved are the MS, BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G external cell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to FDD(FDD). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3G cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and Classmark Enquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic call control parameters of a cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of Utran cell type. The expected result: The value of Utran cell type is TDD. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring 3G cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3G external cell.

5. l

Verification Procedure 1.

Example
ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=FDD; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES;

7.80 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-177

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The MS supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and TD-SCDMA. The BSS and NSS support the GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
The GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect a GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the TD-SCDMA network or in the area with weak TD-SCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the TDSCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the TD-SCDMA cell is higher than that in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a TD-SCDMA cell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided by the TD-SCDMA network.

Procedure
l Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G external cell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to TDD(TDD). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3G cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and Classmark Enquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic call control parameters of the cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of Utran cell type. The expected result: The value of Utran cell type is TDD. l Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability 1. 2. l
7-178

5. l

Verifying GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring 3G cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3G external cell.

Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Service-based(Service-based). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANTDD to set the UTRAN TDD handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell). In addition, set HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell and RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G3GNCELL. In this step, set TDD 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time, TDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time, and RSCP Offset according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Service Based Handover Switch to OPEN(Open) and Service Handover Reassign to YES (Yes). Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated normally, move the MS to the area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, setAllow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based(CN Service-based). On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface. The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with the handover cause value of "better-cell".

2. 3.

4.

5.

Verifying GSM/TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover 1.

2.

Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to NO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANTDD. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES (Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch I to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to modify the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES(Yes), and set TDD Cell Reselect Diversity, Best TDD Cell Number, TDD Reporting Offset, TDD Reporting Threshold, Qsearch P, TDD MI System INFO Broadcasting Prohibit, and TDD MI System Information Optimized according to the actual requirements.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-179

2.

Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State 1.

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Select 3G Cell If No TD Cell Is Contained In MR according to the actual requirements. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set GSM-to-TD Cell Reselection Allowed and Qsearch P according to the actual requirements. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network Operation Mode according to the actual requirements. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNWCTRLMSRPARA. In this step, set Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode according to the actual requirements. Move the MS within the GSM cell or TD-SCDMA cell, and ensure that the Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) is normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the TD-SCDMA cell (TDD). If the measurement result meets the following conditions within five seconds, the MS initiates the cell reselection from GSM to TD-SCDMA: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + TDD Cell Reselect Diversity. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the GSM cell; when the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO (No).

5.

6. 7.

Verifying 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State 1.

2.

Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State 1.

----End

Example
ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based; SET GCELLHOUTRANTDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell, BET3GHOEN=YES; SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN, OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=YES; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7;

7-180

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.81 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability. l l License The license is activated. Initial Data Preparation The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Service-based(Service-based). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD to set the UTRAN FDD handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell), RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0, and Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G3GNCELL. In this step, set FDD 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time, FDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time, RSCP Offset, and Ec/No Offset according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Service Based Handover Switch to OPEN(Open) and Service Handover Reassign to YES (Yes). Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, setAllow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based(CN Service-based). On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-181

2. 3.

4.

5.

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2.

On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface. The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with the handover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to NO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

2.

----End

Example
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based; SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=YES, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell; SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN, OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=YES;

7.82 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322 GSM/ WCDMA Load Based Handover.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability. l l License The license is activated. Initial Data Preparation The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

Context
The MSC transparently transmits the load information of the WCDMA network to the BSC. Then, the BSC makes a decision on the inter-RAT handover based on its own load and the load in the WCDMA network. In addition, the BSC sends a handover request carrying its own load information to the WCDMA network for reference in the decision on the inter-RAT handover.
7-182 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set CS 2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set interRAT handover parameters. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL. In this step, set Handover Load Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Handover Load Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-based). On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface. The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with the handover cause value of "reduce load in serving cell". l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to NO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

2. 3. 4. 5. l

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

2.

----End

Example
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based;

7.83 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.

Prerequisite
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Hardware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-183

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability. l License The license is activated.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES (Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch I to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always). Optional: If Utran Cell Type is set toTDD(TDD), run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to modify the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES(Yes). Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) are normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If the following conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate the cell reselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset and CPICH Ec/No > FDD Qmin. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the GSM cell; when the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO (No).

2.

3.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7;

7-184

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.84 Configuring Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114325 Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The network involves the 2G network and the 3G network. The 2G cell and 3G cell are neighboring cells. The UE supports the 2G and 3G frequency bands at the same time.

Context
In areas where the 2G and 3G networks overlap, a UE will camp on the 2G cell after its call in the 2G cell ends. After this feature is enabled, the UE returns to and camps on the 3G cell when the call is released. In this way, the cell reselection time is reduced.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Select 3G Cell After Call Release of cell 0 (2G cell) to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to configure a FDD neighboring 3G cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to configure this 3G cell as a neighboring cell of cell 0. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC to set the basic attributes of the BSC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag , and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Open the Abis interface tracing window. Use an MS to make a call in cell 0, ensure that the call is set up successfully, and hold the call. Release the call, and check the network identifier displayed on the MS. Ensure that the MS is in the 3G cell.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

If the identifier of the 2G network is the same as that of the 3G network, ensure that you can check the 2G or 3G functions through the MS.

6.

Check whether the IE cell-selection-indicator-after-release is contained in the downlink Channel Release message over the Abis interface.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-185

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Select 3G Cell After Call Release to NO(No).

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1234, CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=YES; //Verification Procedure ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5624, EXT3GCELLNAME="abc", MCC="460", MNC="123", LAC=16, CI=25, RNCID=2546, DF=123, SCRAMBLE=256, DIVERSITY=YES; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=1234, NBR3GNCELLID=5624; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1234, CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=NO;

7.85 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependencies on Hardware None Dependencies on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The cell to be verified is in normal state and has idle channels. To ensure the normal processing of PS services in the satellite transmission mode, the PS cell GPRS parameters T3168 must be set to 1000ms(1000ms), T3192 must be set to 1000ms(1000ms), and BS_CV_MAX must be set to 15.

Context
With satellite transmission over Abis interface, operators can deploy BTSs in areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional terrestrial transmission, thus solving the communication problem in those areas. Satellite transmission over Abis interface has a longer delay in information exchanges than terrestrial transmission.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1.
7-186

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

2. 3. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS with Transmission Mode set to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA with Clock Mode set to INCLK(Internal Clock). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLAPDWS with RSL LAPD Window Size set to an appropriate value according to the actual delay.
NOTE

RSL LAPD Window Size is set to 48 by default and can be set by the operator according to the actual delay. A longer delay requires a larger value.

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR with T200 SDCCH set to 100, T200 SACCH SDCCH set to 100, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 set to 200. You can adjust the settings of these parameters according to the actual delay over the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with MS MAX Retrans set to an appropriate value if required.
NOTE

6.

Adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a larger value increases the radio access rate and adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a smaller value reduces the load of the RACH and SDCCH.

7. l 1. 2. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell. The expected result: Cell Service State is set to Yes. The MS initiates a call. Trace the CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type. The expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can be seen. The MS performs the PING service after being connected to the network through dialup. The service succeeds. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS with Transmission Mode set to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA with Clock Mode set to an appropriate value if required. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR with T200 SDCCH set to 60, T200 SACCH SDCCH set to 60, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 set to 60. Adjust the settings of these parameters according to the actual delay over the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with MS MAX Retrans set to 2_Times(2_Times). Adjust MS MAX Retrans as required. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE with T3168 set to 500ms(500ms), T3192 set to 500ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX set to 10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

Verification Procedure

4. l

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. ----End
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-187

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Example
/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/ //Deactivating the BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Setting a transmission mode SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=SAT_TRANS; //Setting a clock mode SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CLKMOD=INCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=5; //Activating the BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; /*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/ //Deactivating the BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Setting a transmission mode SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=TER_TRANS; //Setting a clock mode SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CLKMOD=BSCCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=5; //Activating the BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.86 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels.

Context
Satellite transmission can be applied on the A interface in situations where terrestrial transmission cannot be established between the BSC and MSC (for example, in sites where an emergency situation occurs temporarily or in scenarios where satellite works as a backup transmission means).

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link on the A interface.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-188

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

An EIUa board provides 32 E1s/T1s. Each E1 has thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each T1 has twenty-five 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each timeslot corresponds to a CIC. For example, if Start CIC of the first E1/T1 is 0, then Start CIC of the second E1/T1 must belong to a CIC group that is different from the CIC group of Start CIC of the first configured E1/T1. Here, if E1 is used, Start CIC of the second E1 must be greater than 31. If T1 is used, Start CIC of the second T1 must be greater than 24. When the MSC Pool feature is enabled, the Start CIC of the E1s/T1s that have the same pair of originating and destination signaling points must be unique.

2. 3. 4. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link set on the A interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface. In this step, set Satellite flag to YES(YES). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route on the A interface. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MTP3LNK to query the status of the MTP3 signaling link. Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In this step, click BSSAP under Trace Type. Trace the CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type. The expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can be seen.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 signaling link. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface. In this step, set Satellite flag to YES(YES).

----End

7.87 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.

Prerequisite
l l l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Hardware The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-189

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels.

Context
In BM/TC separated mode with the TC configured remotely, satellite transmission over Ater interface can be used when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater connection path between the MPS and the TCS.
NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC needs to be configured through the ADD ATERE1T1 command.

2. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL to add an Ater signaling link. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).
NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC needs to be configured through the ADD ATERSL command.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERCONSL. In this step, set Window Size to a proper value according to the actual delay.
NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC needs to be configured through the MOD ATERSL command. The longer the delay in satellite transmission, the larger the value to be set.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERSL to query the status of the Ater signaling link. The expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERSL. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).

----End

7.88 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware None
7-190 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l l

Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
l If terrestrial lines between the BSC and the external PCU cannot be installed or the installation cost of the terrestrial lines is high, satellite transmission can be deployed on the Pb interface. The transmission delay over the G-Abis interface of a satellite-capable cell is longer than that over the G-Abis interface of an ordinary cell. If the same amount of data is transmitted by these two types of cell, it takes more time for the satellite-capable cell to wait for a response message from the MS. Therefore, the transmission performance of a satellitecapable cell is worse than that of an ordinary cell. Under the condition that the average downlink rate of an MS is not affected, the network reduces the maximum number of downlink PDCHs allocated to the MS so that the time for the RLC sending window to overflow is prolonged.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configure the satellite transmission on the Pb interface through the LMT. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link on the Pb interface. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).
NOTE

The value of Start PCIC must be a multiple of 128. After satellite transmission is applied on the Pb E1 link, the Pb signaling link switches to the satellite transmission mode automatically based on the transmission mode of the selected port.

2.

Configure the satellite transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission for the cell. Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set T3168 to 2000ms(2000ms), set T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and set BS_CV_MAX to 15. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission for the cell. Run the mt gcell active<LCNo> command to activate the cell. Run the mt gcell show stat<LCNo> command to check that the state of the cell is UNBLOCK. Use the MS to perform PS services. PS services are normally processed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-191

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Deactivation Procedure 1. Disable the satellite transmission on the Pb interface through the LMT. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PBE1T1. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission). 2. Configure the terrestrial transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell. Run the pcu set sattrans<LCNo> no command to configure terrestrial transmission for the cell. Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell. 3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set T3168 to 0ms(0ms), set T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and set BS_CV_MAX to 10.

----End

7.89 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware The DPUb board is configured. Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. The procedure for configuring the satellite transmission on the Gb interface is the same as the procedure for configuring the terrestrial transmission on the Gb interface. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP). After an NSE is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to query the state of an SIG BSSGP virtual connection (SIG BVC) by checking the setting of SIG BVC State. The expected result: If SIG BVC State is set to Normal, it indicates that the SIG BVC works properly. 2. After a PTP BVC is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of the PTP BVC by checking the setting of Service State. The expected result: If Manage State is set to Unblock and Service State is set to Normal, it indicates that the PTP BVC works properly. l
7-192

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1. ----End

This feature need not be deactivated.

7.90 Configuring High Speed Signaling


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware The MSC supports high-speed signaling. Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated. Other prerequisites TDM transmission is applied over the A interface. The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. The OPC and DPC are configured.

Context
A high-speed signaling link is a 2 Mbit/s signaling link. Compared with the 64 kbit/s signaling link, the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is configured with more timeslots; thus, the signaling transmission capacity of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is greatly enhanced. Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmission does not use high-speed signaling links.

WARNING
Reconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will disrupt the services of the BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is light, for example, in the early morning. The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link set. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK. In this step, set Link Bear Type to MTP2(MTP2) and Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-193

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set Ater Mask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to values rather than TS1.

4. l 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST MTP3LNK to query the information about the MTP3 signaling link. The expected result: The value of Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.

Verification Procedure

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK. In this step, set Signalling link set index and Signalling link code. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT. In this step, set DSP index and Signalling link set index. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS. In this step, set Signalling link set index. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AE1T1 to remove an E1/T1 on the A interface.

----End

7.91 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated. Other prerequisites Mltiple OSPs are configured. Multiple DSPs are configured. The route, link set, and link data are configured. The Operation State of the link is Available.

Context
The local multiple signaling point feature enables one physical BSC to serve as multiple logical BSCs so that each logical BSC can exchange signaling with the MSC. The traffic load is distributed to each logical BSC. Therefore, the impact on the paging traffic of the BSC is reduced.
7-194 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

CAUTION
The original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoing BSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry after local multiple signaling points are configured. As a result, the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time are increased.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC repeatedly to add the OSPs. The parameters Network ID and OSP code bits of the multiple OSPs must be consistent. OSP Codes must be different among the OSPs. In addition, OSP Codes must be different from DSP Codes. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC repeatedly to add the desired DSPs. In this step, the OSP index and DSP type specified in Step 1 must be set.
NOTE

2.

After the DSP is configured, the connection from a logical BSC to the MSC is configured. Take the establishment of the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC as an example. First, you need to add two OSPs with different OSP codes. Then, add two DSPs with identical DSP code, which is the signaling code of the MSC. In this manner, the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC are established.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to configure the OSP of the logical BSC. In this step, set Network ID, OSP code bits, and OSP code according to network planning. The OSP codes of multiple logical BSCs must be different. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to configure the logical link between the OSP and DSP.
NOTE

2.

If multiple logical BSCs need to be connected to the same DPC, then the DSP code and DSP type for each logical connection must be the same. The OSP index needs to be set to the OSP index of the logical BSC set in Step 1. The DSP bear type needs to set according to network planning. In the case of ATM/TDM transmission, select MTP3(MTP3); in the case of IP transmission, select M3UA(M3UA); in the case of co-transmission, select MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA).

3.

Configure the transmission link between OSP and DSP. If the bear type is MTP3, then the MTP3 link set, MTP3 link, and MTP3 route need to be configured. If the bear type is M3UA, then the M3UA link set, M3UA link, M3UA route, M3UA local entity, and M3UA destination entity need to be configured. The following takes the MTP3 bear type as an example. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to configure the link set between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set DSP index to that configured in Step 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to configure the physical link between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set the Signaling link set index as specified in Step 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to configure the route from the OSP to the DSP. The route from the OSP to the DSP can be set up either in direct connection or transfer manner.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-195

4. 5.

6.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

In direct connection manner, the DSP index in this command must be the same as the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4. If a signaling transfer point is used, the DSP index in this command must be different from the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4 and the DSP corresponding to the link set must provide the signaling link transfer functionality.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the status of the DSP configured in Step 2. The expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove a DSP. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove an OSP.

----End

7.92 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
After a semi-permanent connection is configured, the information received by the E1 timeslot at the receiving end is exchanged to an E1 timeslot at the transmitting end by the internal timeslot switching function of the BSC. In this way, the collected information is transparently transmitted in the BSC. Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connection: l Semi-permanent link The input and output of a semi-permanent link are located at the BSC interface board. In this case, the BSC performs timeslot switching between the input timeslot and the output timeslot. l Monitoring timeslot One end of the channel associated with a monitoring timeslot is a BTS port, and the other end of the channel is a BSC interface board. In this case, the BTS and the BSC together perform timeslot switching.

7-196

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activating a semi-permanent link 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK to add a semi-permanent link in the BSC. In this step, set Application Type to OTHER(OTHER), and set Semipermanent Link Rate according to the bandwidth requirements.
NOTE

In BSC Start Timeslot No. and Out BSC Start Timeslot No. need to be set according to the network planning. Ensure that the associated timeslots are not occupied.

Activating a monitoring timeslot 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMONITORTS to add a monitoring timeslot. In this step, set Time Slot Rate according to the bandwidth requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SEMILINK to view the state of a semipermanent link. The expected result: The value of State is OK.

Verifying a semipermanent link 1.

Verifying a monitoring timeslot 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSMONITORTS to view the state of a monitoring timeslot. The expected result: The information about the monitoring timeslot is displayed.

Deactivating a semi-permanent link 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SEMILINK to remove a semi-permanent link. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSMONITORTS to remove a monitoring timeslot from a BTS.

Deactivating a monitoring timeslot 1.

----End

7.93 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware The MSC and M2000 support end-to-end MS signaling tracing. Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-197

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
End-to-end MS signaling tracing is a function based on which tracing tasks are created by each NE on the call path. After each NE traces the MS signaling, the M2000 interprets and summarizes the MS signaling and then displays the MS signaling on the M2000 client. By using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function, the system can collect the information about the specified MS when required. This function occupies a small number of system resources. By recording the signaling about an MS, this function helps to identify the NE where the fault occurs, thus facilitating fault handling.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support End-to-end User Tracing Function to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to query the value of Support End-to-end User Tracing Function. The expected result: The value of Support End-to-end User Tracing Function is YES(Yes). 2. Activate a task of end-to-end MS signaling tracing at the M2000 and use an MS to make a call under the BSC. The expected result: The M2000 generates a report on the end-to-end MS signaling tracing. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support End-to-end User Tracing Function to NO(No).

Verification Procedure 1.

7.94 Configuring Active Power Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602 Active Power Control.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
Active Power Control enables the immediate performance of power control after an MS successfully gains access to the network or a handover is successfully performed in the BSC. In
7-198 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

such a case, the BSC can control the uplink and downlink power promptly. Therefore, both the BTS and the MS transmit signals at a proper power. With the active power control, the system interference is decreased, the QoS is ensured, and the power consumption of the MS or BTS is decreased.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Forecast Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL PC Allowed to YES(Yes), and set DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Administrative State to Lock (Lock) to block all TCHs on the BCCH TRX of cell 0 except SDCCH. Perform the single user CS trace by referring toTracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber in cell 0. Make a call.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3.

Ensure that the level is good during the test with the uplink/downlink level being greater than -60 dBm in the measurement report.

4.

Check the result in Single User CS Trace window. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The TCH occupied by the call is on a non-BCCH TRX, and the Measurement Result message regarding the call is present before the Channel Activation message is delivered. In this case, the values of the fields bs power and ms power in the Channel Activation message are not the maximum (the maximum power level of the 900M cell is 5 and that of the 1800M cell is 0). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Forecast Allowed to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting of Power Forecast Allowed. The expected result: Power Forecast Allowed is set to NO.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2.

----End

7.95 Configuring Ciphering


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate ciphering.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-199

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
Ciphering helps ensure information security. The use of ciphering algorithms in telecommunications increases the signaling load and the access delay of a call. If the BSS does not support a specified ciphering algorithm, call accesses or handovers might fail. In this case, the performance counters such as assignment success rate and handover success rate are affected. The configuration of A5/3 ciphering algorithm is taken as an example. Ciphering needs to be configured at both the BSC6900 and the MSC.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set SD Quick HO to ON(On).
NOTE

SD Quick HO is configured to improve the security of the A5 ciphering algorithm.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to select the A5/0 and A5/3 ciphering algorithms.
NOTE

A5/0 in the Encryption Algorithm drop-down list must be selected.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the test cell, and SD Quick HO to ON(On). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the test cell, and set Encryption Algorithm to A5/0-1&A5/3-1. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box. On the Basic tab page, set DPC (Hex) of the test cell. In the Trace Type area, select BSSAP. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID (cell1,cell2,cell16) of the test cell. Then, click Submit. After the A interface tracing window is opened, use the MS to initiate a call in the test cell. The expected result: The call is set up. The chosen-encryption-algorithm IE in the Cipher Mode Complete message is gsm-a5-3.

4.

5.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End
7-200 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.96 Configuring Speech Version


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the speech version.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
When Huawei MSC is used, the BSC6900 must support FR speech version 3 or HR speech version 3. If a BTS supports AMR but its software version does not, then the AMR cannot be configured. In this case, the BTS needs to be installed with a software version supporting AMR.
NOTE

l The 7.95 kbit/s AMR HR is supported only when Service Mode of the Abis interface is IP or HDLC. l In A over IP mode, the EFR function cannot be enabled.

Procedure
l Activating EFR 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3). If the cell supports the HR service, set Speech Version to HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set call control parameters when AMR is applied on the FR and HR channels.
NOTE

Activating AMR 1. 2.

3.

l AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] can be set to one to four coding rates respectively. l By setting AMR Rate Control Switch, you can select different algorithms. l By setting AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes), you can enable the adaptive adjustment function of AMR downlink thresholds.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set the parameters of the handover between the TCHF and the TCHH in an AMR cell, such as Intracell F-H HO Allowed, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, Intracell F-H HO Last Time, F2H HO Threshold, and H2F HO Threshold.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-201

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5. 6. l

Run the SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set the AMR power control parameters such as AMR PC Interval. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version of a cell to HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2) of Speech Version is reserved. Currently, no service uses HR speech version 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the value of Speech Version. The expected result: The activated speech versions are in the USED state.

Activating HR 1.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure The BSC6900 must be configured with at least one speech version. Thus, the speech versions cannot be deactivated. The BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS, however, can be used to modify the selected speech versions.

----End

7.97 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the following feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The cell is a non-concentric cell and works properly. The core network, cell, and MS support half-rate speech. All the TCHs in the cell are full-rate channel.

Context
With this feature, the full-rate (FR) channels and the half-rate (HR) channels are dynamically converted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell during the call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle can be prevented.
7-202 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set the device attributes of TRXs in the cell. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to specify a cell. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 to ensure that the new call is preferentially assigned half-rate TCH. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. The expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. A full-rate TCH is converted into two half-rate TCHs and are used by the MS. 3. 4. End the call. The expected result: The half-rate TCHs are not converted into full-rate TCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to specify all the full-rate TCHs in the cell. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) and block all full-rate TCHs in the cell. Reserve only half-rate TCHs. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to specify a cell. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 100 to ensure that the new call is preferentially assigned full-rate TCH.
NOTE

Verifying Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function 1.

2.

5.

In Step 5, if the caller and the called party camp on the same cell, you need to reserve a fullrate TCH to ensure the successful setup of the call.

6.

Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. The expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. The MS uses a full-rate TCH.

Deactivating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set the device attributes of TRXs in the cell. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to check the value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow. The expected result: The value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow is NO.

----End

7.98 Configuring the Cell Broadcast


Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can receive the short messages. 7.98.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23). 7.98.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-203

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.98.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware The XPUa/XPUb board is configured. Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) works properly. To enable Short Message Service Cell Broadcast, you must install the hardware and software of the CBC and the corresponding networking equipment.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributes of a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD XPUVLAN to add the VLAN attributes of the XPU board. In this step, specify IP Address as required and set the VLAN attributes on the BSC that is connected to the CBC. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET XPUPORT to set the attributes of ports on the XPU board. In this step, set Panel Port Switch to OPEN(Open). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCBSADDR to add CBC information. In this step, specify CBC INDEX, and set OP INDEX SET to the index of the operator to which the cell to be verified belongs, Subrack No., Slot No., CPU NO, and BSC IP to those of the XPU board added by the ADD XPUVLAN command. In addition, specify BSC Port, Mask, and CBC Port, and set BSC GateWay IP to the gateway IP address of the lab, CBC IP to the IP address of the CBC, and If CB Shake Hand to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set TRX and channel attributes. In this step, specify Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH +CBCH).
NOTE

2.

3. 4.

5.

Channel Type can also be set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH). In this case, TRX ID can be set to the index of any TRX.

6. l
7-204

Add the settings of the BSC, cell, area, channel, and user on the CBC side, and divide cells into different cell groups. In addition, send cell broadcast messages to the cells.

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1.

Connect an Ethernet cable to the port whose Panel Port Switch is set to OPEN (Open). Then, check that the IP address of this port can be pinged. The expected result: The IP address can be pinged. The port works normally. Use an MS with the CBC function enabled to connect to the network in different cells, and check the messages on the BSC-CBC and Abis interfaces. The expected result: In the initial phase of connection, the messages CBCH Query and CBCH Query Response can be traced on the BSC-CBC interface. When system information messages are sent, messages Write/Replace Message and Report can be traced on the BSC-CBC interface. The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on the Abis interface. The MS can properly receive the cell broadcast messages sent from the CBC.

2.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).

----End

7.98.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware The XPUa/XPUb board is configured. Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23). l License The license is activated.

Context
The simplified cell broadcast feature provides the simple cell broadcast services without the CBC system.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributes of a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSIMPLE (SupportSimple CB). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-205

2.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Channel Type can also be set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH). In this case, TRX ID can be set to the index of any TRX.

3.

Send cell broadcast messages. Sending a specified message without any restrictions (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSBC. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and set Support Cell Broadcast Name to YES(Yes). In addition, specify Chan ID, Geography Scope, Broadcast Interval, Coding Scheme, and Broadcast Content. Sending a specified message at a specified time and with a specified number of transmissions (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GSMSCB. In this step, set Cell Index List to the index of the cell to be verified, Geography Scope to LAC_CI(CELL IMME), Code to 1, and Update to 0. In addition, specify Repeat and Broadcast Interval, set Start Time and End Time to the specified time, and set Chan ID, Coding Scheme, and Content of Message as required.
NOTE

l Start Time set through the ADD GSMSCB command must be later than the real time of the OMU. l When Repeat is set to 60, the interval from Start Time to End Time must be greater than one hour to ensure that the simple broadcast message can be successfully transmitted for 60 times.

Verification Procedure 1. Create an Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT. Set the same channel on the MS side as the channel specified by Chan ID in Step 3 (the setting procedure depends on the MS brand). The expected result: The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on the Abis interface. The MS can receive the Content of Message specified in Step 3.
NOTE

Content of Message set through the SET GCELLSBC command can be received at any time. Content of Message set through the ADD GSMSCB command can be received only within the specified time period.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).

----End

7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC).

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware None
7-206 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Dependency on Other Features When a call uses the Automatic Level Control (ALC) feature, ALC is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.

l l

License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites A over TDM transmission is used.

Context
With the ALC feature, the gain of the digital voice signals on the uplink and downlink is adjusted every 20 ms, and the amplitude of the digital voice signals is changed statically or dynamically. This keeps the voice level of the entire network in a defined state, thus preventing the interference to a call due to the volume fluctuation of the two parties involved in the call.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Set ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode). To do so, run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode), and ALC Fix Target Level to its recommended value.
NOTE

If DSP No. is not specified, the attributes of all the DSPs are set. To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to -4; to decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to -23.

Set ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode). To do so, run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to its recommended value.
NOTE

To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 12; to decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 3.

SetALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode). To do so, run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open) and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode). In addition, set ALC Max Target Level and ALC Min Target Level to their recommended values. l Verification Procedure The following takes the verification of the fixed gain mode as an example. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN (Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 0. In the same cell, use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 with a normal voice. Then, hang up the phone.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-207

2.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN (Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executed successfully. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1. The expected result: The volume of the heard voice increases, compared with the volume in Step 2.
NOTE

4.

5.

The previous steps are performed when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode). Similar steps are required when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features When a call uses the Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) feature, this feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites A over TDM transmission is used.

Context
TFO and AEC cannot be used together. The AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, which improves the speech quality. Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver. After the voice of one party (Party A) reaches the MS, some voice is transmitted back to Party A through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known as acoustic echo. AEC is a feature with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminated by means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals.
7-208 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set AEC Switch to ON(On) and other parameters to their default values. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch to OFF(Off) and other parameters to their default values. Use one test MS (MS 1) to make a call to another test MS (MS 2). Check that acoustic echo occurs, and then hand off the call.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

The echo is easily generated when a common MS enabled with the handsfree function is placed in a sealing box.

3. 4.

Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch of the DPU board on the test BSC to ON(On) and other parameters to their default values. Run the LST TCPARA command to check whether all the parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executed successfully. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again, and check whether acoustic echoes are reduced. If the echoes are reduced, finish the verification. If the echoes are not reduced, hand off the call and then run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Echo Return Loss to a smaller value. If AEC Echo Return Loss is already set to the smallest value, set AEC Echo Path Delay to a greater value. Repeat step Step 5 to check whether the echoes are reduced.
NOTE

5.

l The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixedline phone is termed the electric echo. The electric echo problem is solved by the CN side. l When satellite transmission on the Abis or Ater interface is required, AEC Path Delay must be set, so as to eliminate the extra delay caused by satellite transmission.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features When a call uses the ANR feature, this feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO. l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

License
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-209

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The license is activated. l Other Prerequisites A over TDM transmission is used.

Context
ANR reduces the background noise on the uplink speech signals and improves the signal-tonoise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In this way, the other party of the call can clearly hear the voice.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink), and set Noise Suppression Algorithm Switch to MODE1(Optimized version). In addition, specify Noise Attenuation Mode, Noise Suppression Mode, and Transparent Transmit Thresh of Noise Lev as required. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to OFF(Off). Ensure that two test MSs (MS 1 and MS 2) are in the same cell. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 in a noisy environment. Check that great background noises can be heard through the MS 2, and then hand off the call. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executed successfully. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1, and check that the background noises heard through MS 2 are reduced. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to OFF(Off).

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3.

4.

5. l

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

7.102 Configuring TFO


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701 TFO (Tandem Free Operation).

Prerequisite
l l
7-210

Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC). l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites A over TDM transmission is used.

Context
The TFO solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeated encoding and decoding by passing one encoding and decoding process, which improves the signal quality.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO Switch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1).
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1.

When Speech Version is set to only FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), two test MSs use the same FR coding scheme. This ensures the implementation of TFO.

2. 3. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable). Use MS 1 and MS 2 to access the test cell, and make a call from MS1 to MS2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User Identity Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN), and set MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS 1 and MS 2. Check whether Tfo State is TFO not start in the result area. Hand off the call. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO Switch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable). Make a call from MS 1 to MS 2 again. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User Identity Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN), and set MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS 1 and MS 2. Check whether Tfo State is TFO immediate success in the result area. If Tfo State is TFO immediate success and the speech quality is improved, TFO is configured successfully.
NOTE

5. 6. 7. 8.

Ensure that an inter-BSC or inter-cell handover for the MSs is not performed during the call when verifying TFO. This is because the DSP CALLRES command cannot be executed in such a handover.

l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-211

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).

7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware The DPUa, DPUb, or DPUc board starts normally. Dependency on Other Features When a call uses the Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) feature, this feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites A over TDM transmission is used.

Procedure
l Configuration Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch to ON(On), and set ANC Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No.. Check the settings of ANC Switch, ANC Target SNR, and ANC Max Gain in the command execution result. The expected result: ANC Switch is set to ON(On), which indicates that the ANC feature is enabled. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch to OFF(Off).

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

7.104 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).
7-212 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-115501 AMR FR or GBFD-115502 AMR HR. When a call uses the EPLC feature, this feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702 TrFO. l License The license is activated.

Context
With EPLC, the frames of the lost packets can be recovered and compensated. This, to a certain extent, solves the problem of speech frame loss during transmission and in a poor radio environment. Thus, the speech quality is improved, the user satisfaction is improved, and a network with enhanced performance is provided.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to ON(On) and other parameters to their default values. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to check the settings of AMR ACS[H] and AMR ACS[F]. The expected result: AMR ACS[H] and AMR ACS[F] can be set to one to four coding rates respectively. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to OFF(Off) and other parameters to their default values. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configuration information about the TC. The expected result: EPLC Switch is set to Off. 4. 5. 6. When only one DPU board is configured, run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO and record the MOS of the speech quality. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to ON(On) and other parameters to their default values. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configuration information about the TC. The expected result: EPLC Switch is set to On. 7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO and record the MOS of the speech quality. The expected result: The command is successfully executed. The MOS of the speech quality is recorded. 8.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1.

Compare the MOSs recorded in Step 4 and Step 7.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-213

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The expected result: The MOS recorded in Step 7 is greater than that recorded in Step 4. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to OFF(Off) and other parameters to their default values.

7.105 Configuring Voice Quality Index


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117501 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR). l l l License None Configuration The BTS that controls the cell supports downlink VQI. Prerequisites for verification Report Downlink VQI Allowed for the cell to be verified is set to ENABLE (Enable),and Measurement Report Type in the call control message to ComMeasReport(Common Measurement Report). Measurement Report Type for the cell to be verified is set to EnhMeasReport (Enhanced Measurement Report). MR.Preprocessing is set to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing). l Other Prerequisites The cell is configured with 2G neighboring cells and supports enhanced measurement report (EMR).

Context
The VQI establishes the mapping between the radio network performance and voice quality. The VQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the parameters related to the radio quality of the uplink/downlink speech signals. The MOS analysis method is applied in VQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to assess the quality of the middle-rate and low-rate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1 to 5. Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11 levels. The VQI is obtained through the analysis of the BER, FER, LFE, and CODE of the uplink/downlink speech signal. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate the identification of the voice problem and network optimization.
7-214 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Report Downlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable).
NOTE

VQI is recorded in a measurement report during a voice service only when Report Downlink VQI Allowed is set to ENABLE(Enable). When the MS does not support enhanced measurement reports or Measurement Report Type is not set to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report), VQI is 255.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, and Report Downlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable). Perform the voice service test, and check whether the value of VQI in the measurement report is 255 (invalid value) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, and Measurement Report Type to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).
NOTE

2.

You need to configure a neighboring GSM cell if no enhanced measurement report is obtained when the MS support enhance measurement reports.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to one that matches the channel type. Speech versions include FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), FFULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3 (Half-rate VER 3). Perform the voice service test, and check whether the value of VQI in the measurement report is a valid value. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and set Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR based on site requirements. Perform the voice service test, and check the value of VQI. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Report Downlink VQI Allowed to DISABLE(Disable).

4.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating VQI SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE; //Deactivating VQI SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=DISABLE;

7.106 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-215

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The cell is configured with 2G neighboring cells and supports enhanced measurement report (EMR). This EMR feature should be supported by the MS.

Context
EMR is a new downlink measurement report available from R99. Measurement results, such as Bit Error Probability (BEP) and Frame Erase Ratio (FER), are added to an EMR. This improves the performance of power control algorithm and handover algorithm. This function brings the following benefits: l l The capability of monitoring voice quality is improved, and the performance of power control algorithm and handover algorithm is improved as well. As many as 15 3G neighboring cells can be configured with EMR. This provides a better performance of interoperability between the GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA systems.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type to EnhMeasReport.

Verification Procedure Assume that cell 0 and cell 1 are 2G neighboring cells. 1. 2. Use the test MS to make a cell in cell 0. Query the result of the RSL message tracing over the Abis interface. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. An EMR on RSL messages over the Abis interface is reported.
NOTE

A common MR is reported if the MS does not support EMR.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type to ComMeasReport. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type to ComMeasReport.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2.

7-216

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: Measurement Report Type is set to ComMeasReport. ----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=ComMeasReport; LST GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1587, CELLID=1024;

7.107 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The test cell is enabled with the HR function. In addition, the test cell is configured with TCHFs and TCHHs and these channels are available.

Context
Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation is a feature based on which dynamic adjustment of TCHH/TCHF resources is performed on the call that is established. l l When TCH resources are sufficient, the call that occupies a TCHH and whose transmission quality is bad is handed over a TCHF to improve voice quality. When TCH resources are insufficient, the call that occupies a TCHF and whose transmission quality is good is handed over a TCHH to increase cell capacity.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Intracell HO Allowed to YES(Yes), set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II), and set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes). Configure conversion between FR calls and HR calls. Adjusting FR calls to HR calls (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to Select All.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-217

2.

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold to 0, set AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold to 7, set AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold to 255, and set AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold to 0. Adjusting HR calls to FR calls (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to Select All. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to ON(On), set AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to 0, and set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR H-F Traffic Threshold to 100, set AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold to 0, set AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold to 0, and set AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold to 255. l Verification Procedure Adjusting FR calls to HR calls 1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface and RSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on the Abis interface. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The speech version FAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speech version switches to HAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages are traced on the Abis interface.

2. 3.

Adjusting HR calls to FR calls 1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface and RSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on the Abis interface. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The speech version HAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speech version switches to FAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages are traced on the Abis interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the setting of AMR F-H Ho Allowed. The expected result: AMR F-H Ho Allowed is set to No.

2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2.

----End
7-218 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.108 Configuring VQE3.0


Voice Quality Enhancement 3.0 (VQE3.0) is a feature set that contains five voice quality enhancing features: Automatic Level Control (ALC), Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and Anti-clip (ACLP). The five features improve the user experience when A over TDM transmission is applied.

Procedure
l l l l l Configure ALC by referring to 7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC). Configure AEC by referring to 7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC). Configure ANR by referring to 7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR). Configure ANC by referring to 7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC). Configure ACLP by referring to Configuring Anti-Clip.

----End

7.109 Configuring KPIs Based on User Experience


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115707 KPIs Based on User Experience.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware The DPUa, DPUb, or DPUc board starts normally. Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
This feature defines KPIs and CHR information based on user experience. The information about KPIs is provided to the operator through traffic statistics so that the operator can learn the user experience directly. Of the KPIs defined in this feature, only the traffic measurements related to the TC have switches, which are set to enable or disable the traffic measurement reporting. Other traffic measurements are automatically reported.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-219

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, specify Cell Index. In addition, set TFO Switch to ENABLE(Enable). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to query the setting of Enable TC Performance Measurement. The expected result: Enable TC Performance Measurement is set to YES. View traffic statistics on the M2000. The expected result: The cells with TFO Switch enabled report traffic statistics related to TFO, such as Number of Successful TFO Establishments (HR).

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

The following table lists the KPIs that are based on user experience. Table 7-8 KPIs that are based on user experience KPI Classification CS KPIs KPI Name Number of UL Measurement Reports Without DL Measurement Reports Number of Timeouts Waiting for CC Message (Mobile Originated) Number of Timeouts Waiting for CC Message (Mobile Terminated) Number of Timeouts Waiting for CC Message (Location Update) Number of Call Alertings Number of Put-Throughs Mean Call Setup Duration Mean Call Access Duration Number of Disconnect Messages Received from MSC (Mobile Originated) Number of Disconnect Messages Received from MSC (Mobile Terminated) TC KPIs Number of Successful TFO Establishments (HR) Number of Successful TFO Establishments (FR) Number of Successful TFO Establishments (EFR) Number of Successful TFO Establishments (FAMR) Number of Successful TFO Establishments (HAMR) Number of Successful TFO Establishments (WBAMR)

l
7-220

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to query the setting of Enable TC Performance Measurement. The expected result: Enable TC Performance Measurement is set to NO.

----End

7.110 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The test BTS supports AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment. The BTS3006C/ BTS3002E/BTS3012/BTS3012AE that is configured with non-optimized DTRUs does not support this feature. An MOS tester and a vehicle for drive test are ready. l Dependency on Other Features The features that this feature depends on are configured. Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment depends on the feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR). l Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment is a function based on which the target voice quality of the network is set and the coding rate threshold is adjusted adaptively, so that a proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service and thus to gain optimal AMR voice quality. AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment, which is uplink/downlink specific, brings the following benefits: l l A proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service. Optimal AMR voice quality is gained.

Procedure
l Activating the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes).

Verifying the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function Select a test BTS. Assume that the coverage of the test BTS is continuous. Select a test path from the area that the test cell covers. The downlink level that ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm, is evenly distributed on the test path.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-221

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes). Connect the MOS tester to the test MS. Use the test MS to make a call, and then perform a drive test on the test path.
NOTE

2. 3.

The recommended distance of the test path is 1-2 km. The recommended speed of the drive test vehicle is 20 km/h. It is recommended that the drive test be performed three times (three come-andgoes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

4. 5. 6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Repeat Step 3. Based on the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5, compare the speech quality obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) with the speech quality obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO (No). The expected result: The MOS obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No).

Deactivating the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to query the value of AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed. The expected result: The value of AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is NO (No).

Activating the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes) and Is Ratscch Function Enabled to ENABLE(Enable). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, set Report Type to Enhanced Measurement Report.

2. l

Verifying the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function Select a test BTS. Assume that the coverage of the test BTS is continuous. Select a test path from the area that the test cell covers. The downlink level that ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm, is evenly distributed on the test path. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes). Connect the MOS tester to the test MS. Use the test MS to make a call, and then perform a drive test on the test path.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2. 3.

7-222

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The recommended distance of the test path is 1-2 km. The recommended speed of the drive test vehicle is 20 km/h. It is recommended that the drive test be performed three times (three come-andgoes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

4. 5. 6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Repeat Step 3. Based on the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5, compare the speech quality obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) with the speech quality obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No). The expected result: The MOS obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No).

Deactivating the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to query the value of AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed. The expected result: The value of AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is NO(No).

----End

7.111 Configuring WB AMR


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507 WB AMR.

Prerequisite
l l l l l Dependency on Hardware The type of the BTS is BTS3900. Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. The core network supports the WB AMR. The MS supports the WB AMR.

Context
l WB AMR is a coding scheme that can significantly improve speech quality. With WB AMR, the sampling rate is increased to 16 kHz and the speech frequency range is extended to 0.057 kHz. WB AMR provides clear and loud voice and high-quality speech compared with the narrow band AMR with the sampling rate of 8 kHz and the speech frequency range between 200 Hz and 3400 Hz.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-223

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

WB AMR adopts the Guassian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) mode and supports the rates of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s on full-rate TCHs.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to set the access control parameters of the cell.
NOTE

When setting Speech Version, select FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5), as well as the default speech versions.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR to set the call control AMR parameters of the cell. The call control AMR parameters are AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2[WB].
NOTE

For cells with good Um interface quality, the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold should be relatively low. In this way, the rate can be adjusted to a higher rate more easily. If the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold is high, the low rate coding mode should be used to improve the robustness on the Um interface. The lower the coding rate hysteresis is, the more frequent the rate adjustment is. The higher the coding rate hysteresis is, the more stable the rate is.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. Use two MSs supporting the WB AMR to call each other. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to check that Channel Service Type is set to WB_AMR(WAMR). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to deselect FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) of Speech Version.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating WB AMR: SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-1; //Verifying WB AMR: DSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13818889988"; //Deactivating WB AMR: SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-0;

7.112 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR).
7-224 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Prerequisite
l l l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. The cell supports packet services. The MS and SGSN support the PFM procedures and R99 QoS. The cell is configured with static PDCHs.

Context
In the case of streaming class, the BSC allocates radio blocks to users according to the GBR of the QoS attributes and ensures that the data transmission rates meet the requirements of streaming class. If streaming services support resource preemption, high-priority streaming services can preempt the radio blocks of low-priority streaming services when radio resources are insufficient. This ensures that high-priority services can preferentially use radio resources. If streaming services do not support resource preemption, the GBRs are decreased; when radio resources become sufficient, the GBRs are restored to the negotiated values. When the BSC needs to decrease or restore GBRs, it requests the SGSN to modify the GBRs through the PFM procedures.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support) . If you plan to enable the streaming services to preempt PDCHs, set Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to ON(ON). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSEIn this step, set PFC Support to YES (Support). On the SGSN side, enable network service entity (NSE) to support Packet Flow Context (PFC). If you plan to enable the streaming services to preempt PDCHs, ensure that the NSE contains ARP. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset SIGBVC to ensure that the NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side. Enable Um Interface PS Trace and view the information of PSI13. The expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 1. 2. Enable Gb Interface PTP Trace. Perform PDP context activation on the MS whose registration type is streaming services. The expected result: Signaling such as CREATE BSS PFC and CREATE BSS PFC ACK are in the trace messages. 3. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MS whose registration type is interactive or background to perform PS services. The MSs share the same channel group.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-225

2. 3.

4. l

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The expected result: For the MS whose registration type is streaming service, the BSS assigns resources according to the registered GBR. The other MSs share remaining resources. 4. Use multiple MSs whose registration types are streaming service to perform PS services. The expected result: If the priorities of the MSs are the same, the BSS assigns resources to the MS that accesses the network earlier. If the priorities are different and preemption is supported, the MS with higher priority can preempt the resources of the MS with lower priority.
NOTE

The information element ARP of CREATE BSS PFC of the Gb interface specifies the priority of streaming services and whether resources can be preempted.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support) and Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to OFF(OFF). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSEIn this step, set PFC Support to NO (No Support). The expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 0.

2.

----End

Example
//Activating Streaming QoS(GBR) SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES, OccupyStreamingSwitch=ON; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1; //Deactivating Streaming QoS(GBR) SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=NO, OccupyStreamingSwitch=OFF; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO;

7.113 Configuring QoS ARP&THP


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. The cell supports packet services.

Context
The BSC allocates the radio resources to the MS according the ARP and THP of the QoS. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. The BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS according to the 3GPP specifications.
7-226 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

With this feature, the operator allocates the radio resources according to different service types and user priorities. As a result, the user with higher priority can seize more bandwidth and enjoy higher data rate and better quality of service. Interactive services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP and THP of the QoS. If the ARPs of the users are the same, the users with higher THP are allocated more radio resources. If the THPs of the users are the same, the users with higher ARP are allocated more radio resources. Background services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP of the QoS. The users with higher ARP can be allocated more radio resources. For the services that do not support the QoS, the BSS allocates the radio resources according to the BEST EFFORT.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support QoS Optimize to YES(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set the values of THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT, and BEARP3PRIWEIGHT according to the bandwidth occupied by the users with different priorities. Use the MSs whose registration types are interactive or background to perform PS services. The MSs share the same channel group. The expected result: When the same coding scheme is used, the ratio of the transmission rate of the MSs is similar to the ratio of the weight of THP or ARP. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support QoS Optimize to NO(Not Support).

Verification Procedure 1.

Example
//Activating QoS ARP/THP SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=YES; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT=10, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT=6, THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT=6, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT=4, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT=1, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, BEARP3PRIWEIGHT=2; //Deactivating QoS ARP/THP SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=NO;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-227

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.114 Configuring PS Active Package Management


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites GPRS/EGPRS is already configured for the cell.

Context
Active queue management (AQM) is an algorithm used to maintain the buffer queue length within an appropriate range by discarding data packets in the buffer queue actively. It increases data throughput and reduces service delay at the price of buffer utilization. AQM is applicable to scenarios in which bandwidth is limited and congestion may occur. AQM not only ensures high link utilization but also reduces the delay of services that require low transfer delay. It also enhances fair utilization of bandwidth among services and increases data throughput. AQM is applicable to interactive services, background services, and BE services (namely, services without QoS requirements). It is not applicable to conversational services or streaming services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQM Switch to OPEN(Open). Set AQM Congestion Threshold, AQM Target Threshold, AQM Maximum Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Initial Interval, AQM Packet Discard Interval Lower Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Interval Upper Threshold, and AQM N Update Interval according to actual network conditions. It is advised that these values be set to recommended values. Use an MS to download a large-sized file (about 2 MB) through FTP. After the download is started, use the MS to download a small-sized file (about 200 KB) through FTP. View the result of downloading the small-sized file.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1.

2.
7-228

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: When AQM Switch is set to OPEN(Open), the time required to download the small-sized file is reduced, and the rate for downloading the large-sized file is decreased. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQM Switch to CLOSE(Close). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA and view the value of AQM Switch. The expected result: The value of AQM Switch is Close. ----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmMinTh=256, AqmTarTh=384, AqmMaxTh=1024, AqmSwitch=OPEN, AqmNinit=20, AqmNLowerBound=10, AqmNUpBound=20, AqmM=20; //Deactivation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmSwitch=CLOSE; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;

7.115 Configuring PoC QoS


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905 PoC QoS.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the following features GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR). l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The MS and the CN support PoC service.

Context
The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of group call service implemented on the GSM network. The PoC service adopts the packet switching technology and it is carried on the GPRS/EGPRS networks. Huawei GBSS equipment can correctly distinguish PoC services from other services and apply QoS mechanisms for the PoC services. The QoS mechanisms consist of GBR, reduced data transmission delay, and uplink/downlink balanced channel allocation method.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-229

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set POC Support to Support(Support). Set Min. GBR for POC Service, Max. GBR for POC Service, and Transmission Delay of POC Service according to actual situations. Set the registration type of the MS to streaming service. Ensure that the GBR value is between the values of Min. GBR for POC Service and Max. GBR for POC Service. The transfer delay must be smaller than Transmission Delay of POC Service. Use the MS to perform PoC service. The expected result: The PoC result runs properly. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MSs of other types to perform Ping service. The MSs share the same channel group. The expected result: The Ping delay is smaller after PoC QoS is activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support).

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, POCGBRMIN=6, POCGBRMAX=16, POCDELAY=650, PocSup=Support; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PocSup=NotSupport;

7.116 Configuring PS Service in Priority


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

7-230

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
Using different resource scheduling policies on the Um interface, this feature makes it possible to provide differentiated services for PS users of different priorities. This ensures better experience for high-priority users.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support PS Service in Priority to SUPPORT(Support) and MAC Scheduling Type to PFSCHEDULE(Proportion Fair Scheduling); set Downlink Minimum Guaranteed Rate and Rate Filter Time Window according to actual requirements. Use MS 1 and MS 2 to perform the EDGE download service. (Account information of MS 1 and MS 2 is basically the same expect that MS 1 and MS 2 are configured with ARP1 and ARP2 respectively. The coding scheme is MCS_9. MS 1 and MS 2 occupy four PDCHs respectively.) View the download rates. The expected result: The ratio of MS 1 download rate to MS 2 download rate is 2:1. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support PS Service in Priority to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

Verification Procedure 1.

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=SUPPORT, MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=10, RATEFILTERTIMEWIN=50; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=NOTSUPPORT;

7.117 Configuring NC2


This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-231

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service. The test cell has a neighboring cell. The serving cell supports NC2 and works properly. This feature should be supported by the Core Network(CN) and MS.

Context
NC2 can be configured to implement the network-controlled cell reselection for an MS. In NC2 mode, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality or heavy load can reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality or light load. Compared with the MS-initiated cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselection considers factors such as the receive level and traffic load of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set the parameters as follows: Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes). 2. 3. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC2(NC2). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set the thresholds at cell reselection. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPSBASE to query Network Control Mode and ensure that this parameter is set to NC2(NC2). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLGPRS to query Support NC2 and ensure that this parameter is set to YES(Yes). Use an MS to perform the GPRS service, and then trace the messages on the Um interface in the originating cell before NC2 cell reselection on the LMT. Check the Packet Cell Change message in the displayed result. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2; SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=50; //Verification Procedure LST GCELLPSBASE:; LST GCELLGPRS:; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;

7-232

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

7.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC).

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites This feature should be supported by the MS and Core Network(CN). The test cell is a GSM cell and has a neighboring GSM cell. The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service. Both the serving cell and the target cell support NACC. The network control modes of both the serving cell and the target cell are set to NC0 or NC1. The MS detects signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and detects a neighboring cell with better signal strength.

Context
NACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the period of service disruption caused by cell reselection. The BSC sends the system information on the neighboring cells to the MS that works in packet transfer mode so that the MS can initiate packet access after cell reselection. After receiving the system information on neighboring cells through the PACCH, the MS that is in packet transfer mode can keep these information for 30s, during which it can attempt to access the neighboring cell according to these system information.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Activate intra-BSC NACC 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES (Yes).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-233

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set to YES(Yes).

Activate inter-BSC NACC 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES (Yes).
NOTE

To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to YES(Support).
NOTE

l Both the serving cell and the target cell support RIM. l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the cell under the BSC and peer BSC/RNC is set to Yes. l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the SGSN is set to Yes.

3. l 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to activate RIM.

Verification Procedure Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support NC2 to NO(No).
NOTE

When Network Control Mode is set to NC2, you are advised to disable NC2 before verification.

2. 3. 4.

Use the MS to originate GPRS services, and monitor the signaling over the Um interface. Ensure that the MS is in the serving cell. Move the MS or increase the power of the target cell to make the receive level of the target cell higher than that of the serving cell. Perform the operations in Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. After detecting signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and an external neighboring cell with better signal strength, the MS sends the PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC. Then, the BSC responds with the PACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message, which contains the SI1, SI3, and SI13 system information about the target cell. In addition, the BSC sends the PACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS, instructing the MS to proceed with the cell reselection procedure.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support NACC to NO(No) and ACKET SI to NO(No). The expected result: Support NACC is NO(No), PACKET SI is NO(No). The cell does not support NACC and PACKET SI STATUS.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC0; SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES;

7-234

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES; MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0; //Verification Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=NO, PKTSI=NO;

7.119 Configuring GPRS


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used. The DPU is installed if the built-in PCU is used. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license has been activated. Other Prerequisites This feature should be supported by the Core Network(CN) and MS. If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Pb Interface. If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP). The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the Transmission Data.

Context
This feature implements mainly three functions: managing radio links and resources, controlling MS access, and providing routing functions for packet data transmission.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters as follows: If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu), and then run the PCU set attr command on the PCU maintenance console to support GPRS. If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) for at least one channel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-235

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3. 4. l

Optional: If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots. Optional: If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by referring to 7.143 Configuring Abis over IP. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. The expected result: The MS downloads or uploads data successfully.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set GPRS to NO(Not support).

----End

Example
/*Activating GPRS*/ //External PCU command SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; PCU SET ATTR 0 460009162963A 1 02187 1 yes 2 255 true Cell-0 //Built-in PCU command SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH; //Deactivating GPRS SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=NO;

7.120 Configruing Network Operation Mode I


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The Gs interface is configured. The Gs interface should be supported by the MSC if the paging co-ordination is supported. One dual-mode MS is ready.

Context
The combination of Network Operation Mode I and Gs interface (the interface between MSC/ VLR and SGSN) supports coordinated paging or CS paging in packet transfer mode.
7-236 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network Operation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I). Use the dual-mode MS to perform PING services. The network sends CS paging messages on the PACCH. The expected result: The paging is successful and the call can be made successfully. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network Operation Mode to NMOII(Network Operation Mode II).

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOI; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOII;

7.121 Configuring EGPRS


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used. The DPU is installed if the built-in PCU is used. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. l l License The license has been activated. Other Prerequisites This feature should be supported by the GSN and the MS. If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Pb Interface. If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP). The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the Transmission Data.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-237

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
Provides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the delay of PS services and the congestion rate, thus improving the service quality and enhancing the user experience.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters as follows: If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu) and EDGE to YES(Yes). If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes). 2. 3. l Optional: If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots. Optional: If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by referring to 7.143 Configuring Abis over IP.

Verification Procedure In the case that the external PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then, start the message tracing over the Um interface on the PCU maintenance console. The result shows that the coding schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are used. In the case that the built-in PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then, start the task Um Interface PS Trace on the LMT. The result shows that the coding schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are used.

Deactivation Procedure In the case that the external PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu) and EDGE to NO(No). In the case that the built-in PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to NO(No).

----End

Example
//Activating EGPRS SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; //Deactivating EGPRS SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;

7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access.

7-238

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites This feature should be supported by the MS.

Context
The extended uplink TBF can shorten the transmission delay and reduce the MS power consumption. The 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH can improve the access performance of the EDGE MS. The BTS takes over the packet and immediate assignments. This can improve the access performance of the MS and shorten the access delay. For PCU commands, see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU.
NOTE

l In external PCU mode, the PCU supports the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS and the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS by default. l In external PCU mode, if you need to disable the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo> g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command. If you need to disable the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo> g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command. After running the command, you should reset the cell.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configure the extended uplink TBF. In external PCU mode, run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0. In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF to a value greater than 0.
NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set EXT_UTBF_NODATA to NOTSEND to reduce the MS power consumption.

2.

Configure the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. In external PCU mode, run the PCU ADD EGPRSPara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-239

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Access to YES(Yes). 3. Configure the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS. In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS. After running the command, you should reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS to YES(Yes). 4. Configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. After running the command, you should reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS to YES(Yes). l Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA to check whether Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF is greater than 0. Use the MS to perform PS services. After transmitting the uplink data to the BSC, the MS does not release the uplink TBF immediately. Instead, it releases the uplink TBF after the duration equal to Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF. Use the MS that supports 11-bit EGPRS to perform PS services. The TBF is set up after the BSC receives the phase-one channel request of the 11-bit EGPRS. Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the ping function. Enabling Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the first ping delay by 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface. Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the ping function. Enabling Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the ping delay by 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface. Deactivate the extended uplink TBF. In external PCU mode, run the PCU set privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0. In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF to 0. 2. Deactivate the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. In external PCU mode, run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the function of 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Access to NO(No).
7-240 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2. 3.

4.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

3.

Deactivate the takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS. After running the command, reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS to NO(No).

4.

Deactivate the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. After running the command, reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS to NO(No).

----End

Example
/*Activating the extended uplink TBF*/ //external PCU mode PCU ADD PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 2000 2400 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=2000; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTUTBFNODATA=NOTSEND; /*Activating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*/ //external PCU mode PCU ADD EGPRSPara 11 la 8 yes unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=YES; /*Activating the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS*/ //external PCU mode PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSDLSHIFT=YES; /*Activating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*/ //external PCU mode PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=YES; /*Deactivating the extended uplink TBF*/ //external PCU mode PCU SET PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 0 2400 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=0; /*Deactivating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*/ //external PCU mode PCU SET EGPRSPara 11 la 8 no unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=NO; /*Deactivating the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS*/ //external PCU mode PCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSDLSHIFT=NO;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-241

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

/*Deactivating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*/ //external PCU mode PCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 //built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=NO;

7.123 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The cell is configured with EGPRS, and the uplink coding scheme of the cell can be changed.

Context
With this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH based on the uplink measurement report from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH coding scheme can quickly adapt to the changes in the radio condition and thus the uplink throughput is increased.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink quality measurements reported by BTS). Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet. After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combined signals to the receive end of the TRX. Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set the transmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet. Use the MS to load files through FTP. Initiate the PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. Trace the result of uplink MCS coding adjustment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

7-242

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplink EGPRS coding scheme decreases.
NOTE

The interference source power cannot be too great. Otherwise, the PS services may fail.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 1(According to downlink quality measurements reported by MS)

----End

Example
//Activating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding SET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=2; //Deactivating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding SET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=1;

7.124 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The PCU type is set to built-in PCU. The cell supports the EGPRS service. An MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service is available. An MS (GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service is available.

Context
l The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system uses the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services and GPRS uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks with the USF should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRS downlink data blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate the EGPRS service from the GPRS service, thus effectively increasing the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-243

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS service and the GPRS service use the same channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire network performance, and enhancing the user experience.

7.124.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service. 7.124.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel. 7.124.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E Down G Up scenario.

7.124.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority. The expected result: The values of Channel Type of six channels are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and the values of Timeslot Priority are EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS Special Channel). l Verification Procedure
NOTE

An MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service and an MS(GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service are available.

1. 2. 3.

Monitor the channels used by the MSs. Use the GSM MS to make a voice call in the cell. Attach the GPRS MS to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation.

The expected result: The GSM MS cannot make a voice call in the cell. The GPRS MS cannot be attached to the GPRS network and the PDP activation fails. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH (PDTCH) and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSSPECH (EGPRS Special Channel).

----End
7-244 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=YES; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; //Deactivation Procedure SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;

7.124.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Configure two EGPRS TRXs for the cell. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., and Administrative State. The expected result: The values of all Administrative State for all the TCHs on the BCCH TRX are Lock(Lock). 4. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type and PDCH Channel Priority Type. The expected result: The values of Channel Type are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate). PDCH Channel Priority Type of four channels is EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority Channel) and PDCH Channel Priority Type of the other four channels is GPRS (GPRS Channel). l Verification Procedure
NOTE

The GPRS MS1 (class10), MS2 (class10), and EGPRS MS1 (class10) are attached to the GPRS cell.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Record the process of configuring devices. EGPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP. GPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP. GPRS MS2 activates PDP and starts DL FTP. EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again after a period of time. Use a drive test tool to record the channels used by the MSs.

The expected result: After EGPRS MS1 activates PDP for the first time, it starts DL FTP and uses the EGPRS preferred channel. After GPRS MS2 starts DL FTP, it shares packet channels with GPRS MS1. The system does notallocate the EGPRS preferred channel to GPRS MS2.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-245

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

After EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is swiched to the correct channel instead of sharing the PDCH with GPRS MS1. The correct channel is the EGPRS preferred channel used by EGPRS MS1. After EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is switched out of the EGPRS preferred channel and then shares the PDCH with GPRS MS1 or GPRS MS2. The EGPRS preferred channel is allocated to EGPRS MS1 again, and EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP on the EGPRS preferred channel. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of the EGPRS-capable TRX, Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority Channel).

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; //Deactivation Procedure SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;

7.124.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E Down G Up scenario.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority. The expected result: The values of Channel Type are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and the values of Timeslot Priority of at least two channels are EGPRSNORCH(EGPRS Normal Channel). 3. l Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G Up Switch to CLOSE(Close).
NOTE

Verification Procedure
Two GPRS MSs (class 8) and one EGPRS MS (class10) are available.

7-246

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1. 2. 3. 4.

Attach GPRS MS1 to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. GPRS MS1 starts UL FTP and uses an uplink channel. The uplink channels are not used. Attach EGPRS MS1 to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP and does not share the channel with GPRS MS1. Attach GPRS MS2 to the GPRS network and initiate the DPD activation. EGPRS MS1 starts UL FTP and share the uplink channel with GPRS MS1. Record the channels used by each MS.

The expected result: After EGPRS MS1 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS1 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1. After GPRS MS2 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS2 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G Up Switch to OPEN(Open).

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=CLOSE; //Deactivation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=OPEN;

7.125 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The Gs interface does not exist. One dual-mode MS is ready.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-247

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
In the case the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is not configured and the MS is in packet transfer mode, the network can send CS paging messages for a user on the PACCH to enable the user in packet transfer mode to respond to the CS paging.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSS Paging Co-ordination to YES(YES). Use the dual-mode MS to perform PING services. The network sends CS paging messages on the PACCH. The expected result: The paging is successful and the call can be made successfully. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSS Paging Co-ordination to NO(NO).

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES;

7.126 Configuring PS Handover


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. l l License The license has been activated. Other Prerequisites The MS supports the PS handover. The SGSN supports the PS handover.
7-248 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The system is configured with GSM or UMTS neighboring cells.

Context
After an NSE is configured to support the PS handover, all the cells related to this NSE support the PS handover. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval when the MS in a cell reselects another cell. l After the intra-RAT PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PS service can be handed over from a GSM cell to another GSM cell under the same or different BSC. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval. After the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PS service can be handed over from a UMTS cell to a GSM cell. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval. After the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PS service can be handed over from a GSM cell to a UMTS cell. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Activate the PFC on the NSE. 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.
NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation when the traffic volume is low.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS Handover Support to YES(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.
NOTE

Activate the PS handover on the NSE. 1. 2.

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation when the traffic volume is low.

Activate the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT Inter-Cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

Activate the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1.

l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-249

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure; otherwise, some messages may not be traced.

Verify that the NSE supports the PS handover. 1. 2. Initiate the SIG message tracing over the Gb interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing SIG Messages on the Gb Interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.

Expected result: In the BVC-RESET message, the PS Handover carried in the Extended Feature Bitmap is 1. Verify that the NSE supports the intra-RAT PS handover. 1. 2. Initiate the PTP message tracing over the Gb interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface. The network conditions for the MS handover from a GSM cell to a neighboring GSM cell are met, and the PS handover request is initiated.

Expected result: The message PS Handover Required carries the Target Cell Identifier IE. Verify that the cell supports the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover. 1. 2. Initiate the PTP message tracing over the Gb interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface. The network conditions for the MS handover from a UMTS cell to the local GSM cell are met, and the PS handover request is initiated.

Expected result: The message PS Handover Request carries the Source RNC Identifier IE. In addition, the message PS Handover Request Ack from the BSC can be viewed. Verify that the cell supports the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover. 1. 2. Initiate the PTP message tracing over the Gb interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface. The network conditions for the MS handover from a GSM cell to a UMTS cell are met, and the PS handover request is initiated.

Expected result: The message PS Handover Required carries the Target RNC Identifier IE. l Deactivation Procedure Deactivate the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT Inter-Cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS Handover Support to NO(No Support).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Deactivate the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1.

Deactivate the PS handover on the NSE. 1.

7-250

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

2. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.

Example
//Activating the PFC on the NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PFCSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0; //Activating the PS handover on the NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0; //Activating the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; //Activating the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; //Deactivating the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT; //Deactivating the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT; //Deactivating the PS handover on the NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=NO; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;

7.127 Configuring PS Power Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504 PS Power Control.

Prerequisite
l l Dependencies on Hardware None Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. This feature cannot be enabled together with the feature GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage. l License The license is activated.

Context
l l l Only PS downlink power control needs to be activated. Activating PS power control enables the transmit power of the TRX to be controlled. In situations that a good link quality can be obtained without the need of maximum transmit power, PS power control helps to reduce the transmit power, thus reducing the entire network interference and increasing the system capacity.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-251

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA to activate the PS power control. Set Support PS Downlink Power Control to YES(Yes). Then, set the following parameters according to the network plan: Code Scheme Statistics Threshold Code Scheme Stable Threshold P0 Target CIR Position Target CIR Offset Max Power Control Fall Step Power Control Precision l Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, set Uplink Fixed MCS Type and Downlink Fixed MCS Type to MCS9(MCS9). Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to perform GPRS services. Trace the signaling over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. The information elements P0 and PR_MODE are carried in the messages PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT, IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT, DTM ASSIGNMENT COMMAND, and PACKET TIMESLOT RECONFIG.
NOTE

Take the message PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT as an example. The value of is-p0 is 1, and p0 and pr-mode are carried in the message. (When PS power control is not activated, the value of is-p0 is 0.)

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA. In this step, set Support PS Downlink Power Control to NO(No).

----End

Example
//Activating PS Power Control SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=YES, MCSSTATTHR=10, MCSSTABTHR=8, DLPCINITPR=DB0, TGTCIRPOS=3, TGTCIROFFSET=2, MAXPCSTEP=1, PSPCPRES=0.6dB; //Deactivating PS Power Control SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=NO;

7.128 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.
7-252 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The cell supports the GPRS and EDGE. The cell is configured with dynamic TCHFs.

Context
With this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performed according to the traffic load in the cell. This feature effectively increases the channel usage, reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, and thus improves the CS access performance and PS retainability performance.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM to set Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, and Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate. The value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate must be smaller than 100. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA to set PS Service Guaranteed Rate. Enable the MS to camp on the serving cell to process PS services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to specify Cell Index of the serving cell and query the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS and the number of TBFs on the PDCHs. Enable another MS to access the serving cell to process PS services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to specify Cell Index of the serving cell and query the number of PDCHs occupied by this MS and the number of TBFs on the PDCHs. Comparing with the preceding query result, you can infer that the two MSs occupy different PDCHs. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM to set Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to 100.

2. l

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3. 4.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPDYNCHNTRANLEV=20,

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-253

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=20, CHIDLHIGHTHR=20, CHIDLLOWTHR=10; SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=64K; //Deactivating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds GPRS SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CHIDLHIGHTHR=100;

7.129 Configuring EDA


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites The cell is configured to support GPRS/EGPRS. This feature is supported by MS.

Context
Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS traffic is higher in downlink than in uplink. In some specific situations (for example, sending large size email through the GPRS/EGPRS network), however, the requirement on uplink bandwidth is stricter. The EDA feature can allocate three or more timeslots for an MS in the uplink. If the high multislot class is supported, five timeslots can be allocated to the MS of high multislot class 34 in the uplink, thus meeting the requirement for higher bandwidth in the uplink. The use of the EDA feature needs the support from the MS. In the radio access capability reported to the network, the MS indicates whether it supports GPRS uplink EDA or EGRPS uplink EDA.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). Start the Gb Interface PTP Trace window on the LMT and use the MS to dial a number (activate PDP context). The expected result: Check in the ACTIVE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message that the value of gprs-extended-dynamic-allocation-capability is 1or the value of egprsextended-dynamic-alloccation is 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of Support EDA.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3.

7-254

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support. 4. 5. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.
NOTE

If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check number of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs (EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

6. 7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Support. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.
NOTE

8. 9.

If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check number of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs (EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

10. Compare the results obtained in Step 5 and Step 9. The expected result: As recorded in Step 9, the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS is greater than or equal to 3, and the uploading speed is improved to a great extent than that recorded in Step 5. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support. ----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:; DSP PDCH: IDXTYPE=BYCELL, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:; //Deactivation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;

7.130 Configuring DTM


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151 DTM.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-255

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the features GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2). l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission mode. Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. DTM should be supported by the MSC, SGSN, and MS.

Context
DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS services and PS services. That is, a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a voice call. In a 3G network, the speech and data services are processed in parallel. In this sense, DTM enables the GSM subscribers to enjoy the services similar to those provided by the 3G network. In addition, the 2G network can complement the 3G network in terms of coverage.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT (Support). Make a CS call. Initiate the operation by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services. Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result. The expected result: PS downloading services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

The following messages are traced: Packet Notification, DTM Request, DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment.

Deactivation Procedure

7-256

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and SUPPORT DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=UNSUPPORT;

7.131 Configuring Class11 DTM


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-114151 DTM and GBFD-119401 EDA. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission mode. Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. DTM should be supported by the MSC and the SGSN. Class11 DTM should be supported by the MS.

Context
Based on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth of the uplink PS services of the MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the channel assignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink PDCHs and one downlink PDCH are assigned to the MS.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-257

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT (Support), and Support Class11 DTM to SUPPORT(Support). Make a CS call. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MSCONTEXT. In this step, specify the IMSI of the user. The expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT (Support), and Support Class11 DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure DSP MSCONTEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIMSI, IMSI="460180122223515"; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=UNSUPPORT;

7.132 Configuring HMC DTM


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404 HMC DTM.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-119401 EDA, GBFD-119402 MS High multislot classes. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission mode.
7-258 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. DTM should be supported by the MSC and SGSN. DTM HMC should be supported by the MS.

Context
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PS services of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHs respectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech + 3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink. The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP specifications are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 3133, 36-38, and 4144. The classes 31-33 are called HMC DTM. For an MS of DTM multislot classes 32-33, the Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) function must be used if the MS requires more than three channels in the uplink.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT (Support), and Support HMC DTM to SUPPORT(Support). Make a CS call. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MSCONTEXT. The expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT (Support), and Support HMC DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure DSP MSCONTEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIMSI, IMSI="460180122223515"; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=UNSUPPORT;

7.133 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data


This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-259

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data of single-timeslot mode should be supported by the MSC.

Context
Huawei GSM BSS supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with a high rate of 14.4 kbit/s for transparent data services.
NOTE

The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, select NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to check the value of Data service allowed. The expected result: The values of both T14_4K and NT14_5K in the Data service allowed parameter are USED. Use an MS to initiate a 14.4 kbit/s circuit switched data service. Then, trace the signaling on the A interface. The expected result: The service is set up successfully. Check the assignment message traced on the A interface, the value of the Channel Type IE shows that the service type is 14.4 kbit/s CS services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, deselect NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DATATRAFFSET=NT12K-0&NT6K-0&T14_4K-1&T9_6K-0&T4_8K-0&T2_4K-0&T1_2K-0&T600 _BITS-0&T1200_75-0; //Verification Procedur LST GCELLOTHEXT:; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,

7-260

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

DATATRAFFSET=NT14_5K-0&NT12K-0&NT6K-0&T14_4K-0&T9_6K-1&T4_8K-0&T2_4K-0&T1 _2K-0&T600_BITS-0&T1200_75-0;

7.134 Configuring Resource Reservation


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
With the resource reservation feature, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for highpriority users to ensure their QoS. l l Channel resources are reserved for high-priority users, thus ensuring the QoS of the VIP users and improving user experience. Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. Using this function, operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities. In this way, the operation revenue is increased.

This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) to better guarantee the benefits of users and improve the user satisfaction.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Grade Access Allow to YES(Yes), and set Highest Priority and Reserved Channel Number to proper values. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Highest Priority to 7 and Reserved Channel Number to 1. Block the TCHs in cell 0 and reserve only one idle TCH. Start Trace BSSAP Message on the A Interface of cell 0 on the LMT. Use MS 1 to make a common call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the CN in the assignment request. The expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure. 5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the CN in the assignment request.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-261

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Grade Access Allow to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the value of Grade Access Allow. The expected result: The value of Grade Access Allow is NO(No). ----End

7.135 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
eMLPP offers a segmentation function. By enabling this function, operators can provide different levels of services for subscribers with different priorities. The eMLPP function is enabled to ensure the speech quality of high-priority MSs when the network is busy.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCBASIC to query the value of A Interface Tag.
NOTE

If the value of A Interface Tag unequal to GSM_PHASE_2Plus, then run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

2. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow EMLPP to YES(Yes) to activate the eMLPP function. Get three test MSs ready, namely, MS 1, MS 2, and MS 3. The priorities configured for these MSs at the HLR in descending order are MS 1, MS 2, and MS 3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1.

7-262

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

2.

Configure data on the MSC side, and ensure that the resources for the MSs with low priorities can be preempted and the MSs with high priorities can preempt these resources. On the LMT, start message tracing over the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related parameters. Start CS message tracing over the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set the related parameters. Use MS 2 and MS 3 to make PSTN calls in the test cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the remaining idle TCHs in the cell. Use MS 1 to make a PSTN call in the cell. The expected result: The call of MS 3 is handed over to another cell or is released. MS 1 occupies the channel of MS 3 and successfully makes the call. The call of MS 2 is not affected.
NOTE

3.

4. 5. 6.

l When the eMLPP function is enabled, a low-priority MS can be handed over to another cell only if neighboring relations are correctly configured. The configuration of neighboring relations is not mandatory for the eMLPP function. l When the eMLPP function is enabled, ensure that the data configuration on the CN side is correct, and the Priority information element carried in the assignment request message sent by the MSC is consistent with the setting on the BSC side. In this case, the resources of MSs can be preempted. The assignment request message is displayed in the window for tracing messages over the A interface.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow EMLPP to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to original value of the step 1 in activation procedure.

----End

7.136 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call.

Prerequisite
l l l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated. The MSC is enabled with the eMLPP function.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-263

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
The Guaranteed Emergency Call feature is introduced to improve the setup success rate of emergency calls to the greatest extent. Therefore, normal communications are ensured in disaster relief activities. This feature has the following characteristics: l l l Emergency calls are preferentially assigned TCH/F in the immediate assignment phase. The system reserves TCH/F for the MS making an emergency call. The MS making an emergency call preempts the channel resources seized by the call with a lower priority.

When this feature is disabled, an emergency call can be preempted by other call in high priority level. when this feature is enabled and there is no idle TCH, an emergency call can preempt the channel resources seized by another call except emergency call.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of Priority of Emergency Call. When the value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15, the functions of reserving TCHs for emergency calls and preempting TCHs are not enabled. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority of Emergency Call to a proper value according to the actual requirements, for example, 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Max Channel Num Reserved for EC to a proper value according to the actual requirements, for example, 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency Call Preemption Permitted to ON(On). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, set Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC to a proper value according to the actual requirements, for example, 15. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of Priority of Emergency Call. The expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to view the value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC. The expected result: The value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC is 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted. The expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is ON (On). 4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLTMR to view the value of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2.

3.

4. 5.

Verification Procedure 1.

7-264

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: The value of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC is 15. 5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in the cell. All the TCHs in the cell are occupied by common calls and there are no idle channels. There exists a call whose priority is lower than the priority of the emergency call and the channel resources of the call can be preempted. The expected result: A call in the cell is released because its resources are preempted. 6. l MS 1 makes the emergency call successfully. In the immediate assignment phase, an SDCCH is assigned and in the assignment phase, a TCH/F is assigned. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority of Emergency Call to 15. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCADto view the value of Priority of Emergency Call. The expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency Call Preemption Permitted to OFF(Off). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted. The expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is OFF (Off). ----End

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2.

7.137 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
When service congestion occurs in the BSC, flow control is started. The calls in the VIP cells or paging of the VIP users are preferentially processed. Thus, the normal operation of the BSC is ensured, and the call setup success rate of the VIP users is not affected.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-265

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL or MOD GCELL. In this step, set VIP Cell to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set Support Priority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes), and set VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value of VIP Cell. The expected result: The value of VIP Cell to YES(Yes).

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCFCPARA to query the values of Support Priority Based Flow Control, VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority. The expected result: The value of Support Priority Based Flow Control is YES (Yes). The parameters VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority are set to some values.

3.

When service congestion occurs in the BSC, check whether the call setup success rate of a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are affected. The expected result: The call setup success rate of a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are normal. No abnormal call drops occur.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set Support Priority Based Flow Control is NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set VIP Cell to NO (No).

----End

7.138 Configuring Network Support SAIC


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware The MS supports SAIC. Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC) is a technique that restraints both intrafrequency and inter-frequency interference when the MS receives signals through a single antenna. SAIC aims to minimize the impact of interference on the receive quality of downlink signals through signaling processing.
7-266 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The MS that supports SAIC has a greater capability of bearing interference than the MS that does not. Therefore, the strategy of power control can be adjusted if the MS supports SAIC, to reduce the transmit power of the BTS and thus to reduce interference in the entire network.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Saic Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to ON(On). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the value of Saic Allowed. The expected result: The value of Saic Allowed is Yes. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR2 to query the value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC. The expected result: The value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC is 1. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC. The expected result: The value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC is 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust. The expected result: The value of Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust is On. 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOCTRL to query the value of MR.Preprocessing. The expected result: The value of MR.Preprocessing is BTS Preprocessing. 6. Initiate a call. Then, query whether the MS supports SAIC by checking the value of the Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance information element in the Mobile Station Classmark 3 message. The expected result: The value of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance is Support SAIC. 7. Check the MS Capability information element that is carried in the channel activation command sent to the BTS by the BSC6900. The expected result: The SAIC support capability is set to 1, which indicates that the MS supports SAIC. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Saic Allowed to NO(No).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-267

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2. 3. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to OFF(Off). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set MR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing(BSC preprocessing).

7.139 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115401 NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on other features None License The license has been activated. Other Prerequisites The MSC supports the LCS. The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context
LCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates an emergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services (VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET AITFOTHPARA command. In this step, set Add TA to A Interface EST IND to OPEN(Open). Enable an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task, and select BSSAP in the test cell. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully. Check that the first message traced through A interface signaling trace contains the APDU information element, which carries TA information of the MS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

7-268

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET AITFOTHPARA command. In this step, set Add TA to A Interface EST IND to CLOSE(Close).

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN; //Deactivation Procedure SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE;

7.140 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402 BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on other features None License The license has been activated. Other Prerequisites The MSC supports the LCS. The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context
LCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates an emergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services (VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).
NOTE

Run the LST GCELL to obtain Operator Name.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-269

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2. l 1. 2. 3.

Run the SET GCELLLCS command to configure the LCS parameters of a cell. Enable an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task, and select BSSAP in the test cell. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully. Check that the Perform Location Request message and Perform Location Response message are traced over the A interface after the MSC is triggered on the MSC side to request location information query. Check that the correct MS location can be displayed on the MSC. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

Verification Procedure

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation Procedure ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER; SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NSLATI=North_latitude; //Deactivation Procedure MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

7.141 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (cell ID + TA)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115403 simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA).

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on other features None License The license has been activated. Other Prerequisites The MSC supports the LCS. The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context
LCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates an emergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services (VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location
7-270 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).
NOTE

Run the LST GCELL to obtain Operator Name.

2. l 1. 2. 3. l 1. ----End

Run the SET GCELLLCS command to configure the LCS parameters of a cell. Start single User CS Trace. Select Location Flag. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully. Check that the MS location information in single user trace messages is correct. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

Verification Procedure

Deactivation Procedure

Example
//Activation Procedure ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER; SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, NSLATI=North_latitude; //Deactivation Procedure MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

7.142 Configuring Lb Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404 Lb Interface.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Others The MSC supports the location service. The MS must support the AGPS location service when the AGPS positioning method is used.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-271

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
The Lb interface is a standard interface between the BSC and the Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC). The main function of the SMLC is to locate an MS based on the measurement results provided by the MS. Huawei BSS equipment supports the standard Lb interface, and thus can be interconnected with the SMLC of other vendors to provide the CELLID+TA and AGPS positioning methods. Figure 7-9 shows the position of the SMLC in the network. Figure 7-9 Position of the SMLC in the network

Generally, one BSC is connected to only one SMLC. When the RAN Sharing feature is enabled, one BSC can be connected to four SMLCs of four different operators. A BSC can be connected to an SMLC in the following ways: l l By adding an Lb interface board TDM or IP transmission can be used over the Lb interface. Without adding an Lb interface board In BM/TC separated configuration mode, if TDM transmission is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the Ater interface board of the BM subrack or on the A interface board of the TC subrack. In BM/TC combined configuration mode, if TDM transmission is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the A interface board. If IP transmission is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the A or Abis interface board of the BM subrack.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure (Adding an Lb Interface Board) 1. 2. l Add an Lb interface board by referring to Adding an Lb interface board. Select an activation procedure according to the transmission over the Lb interface, and then perform the activation procedure.

Activation Procedure (BM/TC Separated Configuration, Lb over TDM, and Lb Interface Configured on Ater Interface Board) 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code to
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-272

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

the signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3). 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.
NOTE

If the BSC6900 has the SMLC function, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC. In this step, set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to the index of an unoccupied signaling link set. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set TC mode to SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE(BSC Interface); set Signalling link code, Ater connection path index, and MTP2 link No. to the values of the unoccupied resources; set Ater Mask to the value negotiated with the SMLC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index and Signalling link set index to the values specified in Step 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 to add an E1/T1 over the Ater interface. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM); set Ater connection path index to the value specified in Step 4; set Subrack No., Slot No, and Port No according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code to the signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer); set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.
NOTE

4.

5. 6.

Activation Procedure (Lb over TDM and Lb Interface Configured on A Interface Board) 1.

2.

If the BSC6900 has the SMLC function, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC. In this step, set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to the index of an unoccupied signaling link set. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC) or TOGETHER(BSC/TC Together).
NOTE

4.

l In BM/TC separated configuration mode, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL (Principal BSC); set Signalling link code, Ater connection path index, and MTP2 link No. to the values of the unoccupied resources; set A interface subrack No., A interface slot No., and A interface port No. according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface; set Ater Mask and A interface timeslot mask to the values negotiated with the SMLC. l In BM/TC combined configuration mode, set TC mode to TOGETHER(BSC/TC Together); set Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to the values of the unoccupied resources; set A interface subrack No., A interface slot No., and A interface port No. according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface; set A interface timeslot mask to the value negotiated with the SMLC.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-273

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

5. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index and Signalling link set index to the values specified in Step 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code to the signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type to M3UA(M3UA). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.
NOTE

Activation Procedure (Lb over IP) 1.

2.

If the BSC6900 has the SMLC function, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC. In this step, set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the value of an unoccupied resource; set OSP index and Local entity type according to the actual situation. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the value of an unoccupied resource; set Local entity No. and DSP index to the values specified in Step 3 and Step 1 respectively; set Destination entity type. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., SCTP link No., and Logic Port Flag according to the actual condition; set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Application type to M3UA(M3UA); set First local IP address, First destination IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to the values negotiated with the SMLC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value of an unoccupied resource. If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP) in Step 3, set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) in Step 3 and Destination entity type is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA SP) in Step 4, set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). Otherwise, set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).

4.

5.

6.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to the values specified in Step 4 and Step 6 respectively. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 6; set Signaling link ID, Subrack No., Slot No., SCTP link No., and M3UA Signaling link name according to the actual situation. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC to query the value of SMLC Mode. The expected result: The value of SMLC Mode is OUTER(Outer).

8.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC. In this step, set DSP index to DSP index of the SMLC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-274

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible. The value of MTP3 DSP state is Available or the value of M3UA DSP state is Available. 3. l Initiate a location service on the LCS client side, as shown in Figure 7-9. The expected result: The target MS is located. Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command. In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT.

7.143 Configuring Abis over IP


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board is in position. The BTS supports IP transmission. l Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. l l License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites When device IP is used in transmission, the BTS is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC. l Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

Context
NOTE

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP. When the layer 2 networking is used on the Abis interface, the BSC and BTS automatically performs the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on links. In this case, the BTS is not allowed to use the device IP address in communication.

With this feature, the BSC is connected to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on the location of the BSC and the BTS. This feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports the IPv4 protocol.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-275

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. l

Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the Equipment Data. Configure the logical data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Logical Data. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Transmission Data. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring to Configuring the BTS Clock. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS Configuration. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. to those of the peer interface board connected to the BTS. Check Port state and Link Availability Status in the command execution result. If Port state is Activated and Link Availability Status is Available, the link is normal.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Verify the control plane on the Abis interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent node is normal. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is functional. If UsageStatus is Normal, the LAPD link is functional.

3.

Verify the user plane on the Abis interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path is available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, the IP path is normal.

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

7.144 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The PEUa/POUc board is in position. The BTS supports IP transmission. l Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
7-276 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l l

License The license is activated. Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

Context
NOTE

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.

A license is required to implement Abis over IP. When TDM transmission is used over the Abis interface, the IP over E1/T1 scheme can be used to carry traffic and signaling data.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. l Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a PEUa/POUc board. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the Equipment Data. Configure the logical data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Logical Data. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Transmission Data. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring to Configuring the BTS Clock. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS Configuration. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check whether the port is functional by viewing Port running state. (2) If the PPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. (3) If the MLPPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link state and LCP negotiated state. (4) If the PPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the PPP link is normal. (5) If the MLPPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the MLPPP link is normal.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-277

Verifying Abis over IP 1.

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

2.

Verify the control plane on the Abis interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is normal. If UsageStatus is Normal, the LAPD link is normal. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to obtain the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent node is normal.

3.

Verify the user plane on the Abis interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path is normal. The IP path is normal if Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0.

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

7.145 Configuring Abis MUX


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604 Abis MUX.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The BTS supports UDP multiplexing. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1. l License The license is activated.

Context
Abis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS serve as transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the transmitting end multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing requirements. Multiple UDP packets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then demultiplexed at the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets. Thus, the transmission efficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable Abis MUX. In this step, set IP MUX Type to ABISMUX.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-278

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command to display the application of Abix MUX. The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable Abis MUX.

----End

7.146 Configuring A over IP


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602 A over IP.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board is in position. Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), and GBFD-115701 TFO. l l License The license is activated. Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks. l Other Prerequisites When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC.

Context
A over IP supports only the IPv4 protocol. When A over IP is enabled, the functions of the TCS are taken over by the MGW, and the BSC does not perform transcoding. The A interface uses IP over FE/GE transmission.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-279

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3. 4.

Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board by referring to Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP). Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board by referring to Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node. Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board by referring to Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP). Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. to those of the peer interface board connected to the BTS. The expected result: Port state is Activated, and Link Availability Status is Available. That is, the links carried on the port are normal. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to display the setting of Status of ETHTRK. The expected result: Status of ETHTRK is UP, which indicates that the link aggregation group is normal. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRKLNK to display the setting of Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port. The expected result: Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port is UP, which indicates that the sub-port for the link aggregation group is normal.

5. l

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Verify the control plane on the A interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCP DSP state. The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that the SCCP DSP is normal. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings of Operation status and Activated status. The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status is Activated. That is, the link set is normal. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whether Operation state is Normal. The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTP link is normal.

3.

Verify the user plane on the A interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and bandwidths by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greater than 0. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting of Operation state. The expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0.

7-280

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware The PEUa/POUc board is in position. Dependency on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), and GBFD-115701 TFO. l l License The license is activated. Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. The PEUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks. l Other Prerequisites When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC.

Context
When this feature is enabled, the traffic and signaling data can be carried by the PPP based IP transmission over the A interface. The port of the BSC can be E1, T1, or STM-1.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board or Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board. Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP). Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node. Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

3. 4. 5. l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-281

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1.

Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.. The expected result: Port State. is normal. (2) Verify state of the links. The link is a PPP link. a. b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the value of Local IP address obtained in the preceding sub-step, and set Destination IP address to the value of Peer IP address obtained in the preceding sub-step. The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets. The link is an MLPPP link. a. b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link state and LCP negotiated state. The expected result: Both Link state and LCP negotiated state are available. c. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the value of Local IP address, and set Destination IP address to the value of Peer IP address. The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.

2.

Verify the control plane on the A interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCP DSP state. The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that the SCCP DSP is normal. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings of Operation status and Activated status. The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status is Activated. That is, the link set is normal. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whether Operation state is Normal. The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTP link is normal.

3.

Verify the user plane on the A interface. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greater than 0. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting of Operation state.

7-282

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End This feature does not need to be deactivated.

7.148 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The Core Network (CN) supports UDP multiplexing. l Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. l l License The license is activated. Others When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC.

Context
When this feature is enabled, multiple Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets are multiplexed onto one UDP packet. In this way, the proportion of the packet header to the total packet decreases, and thus the A interface transmission efficiency is improved.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX. In this step, set IP MUX Type to UDPMUX. Repeat this step if this feature is to be enabled on the A interfaces between the BSC and multiple CN devices.
NOTE

Max subframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum Delay Time [ms] must be set as required.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of UDP MUX for A Transmission. The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.

l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-283

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable IP MUX.

7.149 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The DPUc or DPUf board is in position. The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, GOUc, PEUa, or POUc board is in position. The MSC supports this feature. In addition, the configuration of this feature is complete. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Initial Data Preparation The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. A over TDM transmission is used.

Context
This feature enables TDM transmission and IP transmission to be used simultaneously over the A interface on the BSC side. This feature is applicable to the scenario where GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP network. Whether the user plane on the A interface uses TDM transmission or IP transmission is determined by the MSC in the assignment procedure or in the incoming BSC handover procedure.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a DPUc or DPUf board. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCTYPE. In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No. to those of the DPU board. In addition, set The type of TC resource to ITC (Packet Conversion). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, GOUc, PEUa, or POUc board. Configure A over IP transmission. When IP over FE/GE transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations by referring to 7.146 Configuring A over IP. When IP over E1/T1 transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations by referring to 7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1.
7-284 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

3. 4.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

5. 6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear type to MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA). In addition, specify Net PRI as required. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for A Interface User Plane to TDM_IP, and set Report BSS Transmission Capability to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the settings of MTP3 DSP state and M3UA DSP state. The expected result: MTP3 DSP state and M3UA DSP state are both Available. Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Make a call in the cell. The call is successfully established. Observe the speech codec list Information Element (IE) is correctly carried in the Cm Service Request message on the A interface. The expected result, "full-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE are both 1.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3.

When "codec-type" is cs-data, "pcm-over-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE are both 1.

4.

View the assignment request message. The expected result: The circuit-identity-code IE is carried when the Core Network (CN) instructs the user plane to use TDM transmission, as shown in Figure 7-10. Figure 7-10 Assignment request message in TDM transmission

The aoip-transport-layer-address-mgw and speech codeclist-msc-preferred IEs are carried when the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, as shown in Figure 7-11. Figure 7-11 Assignment request message in IP transmission

5.

Check whether the assignment complete message carries the related IEs. The expected result: When the CN instructs the user plane to use TDM transmission, the assignment complete message does not carry the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE. When the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, the assignment complete message carries the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-285

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Change the TDM/IP dual transmission mode over A interface to TDM transmission. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for A Interface User Plane to TDM, and set Report BSS Transmission Capability to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set Net PRI to MTP3_FIRST(MTP3_FIRST).

3. ----End

7.150 Configuring Gb over IP


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603 Gb over IP.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board is in position. The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd board is configured. The SGSN supports Gb over IP. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated. Other Prerequisites A cell is activated and supports GPRS.

Context
Gb over IP enables operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR) between the BSC and the SGSN.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, or GOUc board. Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/ GOUc Board. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this step, specify Operator Name and SGSN Node ID. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add an NSE. In this step, specify NSE Identifier, Subrack No., Slot No., Subnet Protocol Type, Operator Name, SGSN Node ID, and Subnetwork Configure Mode. Configure the NSVL. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL to add an NSVL on the BSC side. In this step, specify Local NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Local IP Address, Local UDP Port No., Subrack No., and Slot No..
7-286 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

When port IP addresses are used for the communication, Local IP Address is set to the port IP address of the interface board in Step 2. When device IP addresses are used for the communication, Local IP Address is set to the device IP address of the interface board in Step 2.

(2) Optional: When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC (Static), run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE to add an NSVL on the SGSN side. In this step, specify Remote NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Remote IP Address, and Remote UDP Port No.. 6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC to add a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC). In this step, specify PTP BVC Identifier. In addition, set Cell Name to the name of the GPRS cell that needs to be bound, and set NSE Identifier to that of the NSE added in Step 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., Source IP address, and Destination IP address.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1.

l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is DYNAMIC(Dynamic), you need to set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and Destination IP Address to the same value as Server IP in ADD NSE. l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC(Static), you need to set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and Destination IP Address to the same value as Remote IP Address in ADD NSVLREMOTE.

The expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which indicates that the IP link on the Gb interface is functional. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GBIPROUTE. In this step, specify NSE Identifier and Local NSVL ID, or specify NSE Identifier and Remote NSVL ID. The expected result: IP Path State is Normal, which indicates that the IP path at the service layer on the Gb interface is functional. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to check whether SIG BVC State is Normal. In this step, specify NSE Identifier. The expected result: SIG BVC State is Normal, which indicates that the SIG BVC on the signaling plane of the Gb interface is normal. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End This feature need not be deactivated.

7.151 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118609 IP Fault detection based on BFD.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc board is configured on the Abis/A/Gb interface. The device connected to the BSC supports BFD.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-287

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Dependency on Other Features The features that this feature depends on are configured. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP.

Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by periodically transmitting BFD packets between two nodes. With this feature, IP route reselection is triggered when the gateway or the peer entity is faulty, thus avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop. BFD applies to the following scenarios: l l When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) through a router, BFD detects whether the router is available. When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly, BFD detects whether the peer device is available.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set the parameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detect local ip based on the actual networking.
NOTE

l If the Ethernet ports work in active/standby mode, set Check mode to CHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT; if the Ethernet port works in independent mode, set Check mode to CHECK_ON_INDEPENDENT_PORT. l If Check type is set to SBFD, the single hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Peer IP address to an IP address that is on the same network segment as the local IP address. l If Check type is set to MBFD, the multi-hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Multi hop BFD detect local ip to the device IP or port IP if the local board, and set Peer IP address to an IP address that is on a different network segment from the local IP address.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query the value of Check state. The expected result: The value of Check state is UP or DOWN.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STP IPCHK to stop the function of IP Fault Detection based on BFD.

----End

7.152 Configuring Ethernet OAM


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM.
7-288 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board is configured for the Abis or A interface, or the FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board is configured for the Gb interface. The interconnected transmission devices support the Ethernet OAM protocol. l Dependency on Other Features The features that this feature depends on are configured. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP. l Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated.

Context
As a layer-2 protocol, Ethernet OAM can report the status of the network at the data link layer. Thus, the network is monitored and managed more effectively. The BSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.1ag).

Procedure
l Activating the Ethernet EFM OAM function 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT EFMAH to activate the Ethernet EFM OAM function. After EFM OAM is enabled, ALM-21371 ETHOAM 3AH Discovery Failure is reported if the transmission link is faulty or the peer end does not support the EFM OAM function. After EFM OAM is enabled, the alarm ALM-21374 ETHOAM 3AH Remote Loopback is reported if the loopback is successful because the loopback operation blocks the ongoing services. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA EFMAH to deactivate the Ethernet EFM OAM function. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMD to add a maintenance domain (MD) of Ethernet OAM. In this step, set MD INDEX, MD LEVEL, and MD NAME. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMA to add an Ethernet OAM maintenance association (MA). In this step, set VLAN ID, MA Index, and MA Name, and set MD INDEX to the value specified in Step 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add a Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance association End Point(MEP). In this step, set MEP ID, set MEP Type to LocalMep(LocalMep) and Port Type to ETHER, and set MA Index to the value specified in Step 2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-289

Verifying the Ethernet EFM OAM function 1.

2.

Deactivating the Ethernet EFM OAM function 1.

Activating the OAM 1AG function 1.

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features


NOTE

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The value of MEP ID at the interconnected device must be the same as that at the BSC6900.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT CFMCCMTST to activate the unidirectional connectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity between the local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MA Index to the value specified in Step 2 and MEP ID to the value specified in Step 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING MAC. In this step, set MA Index and MEP ID to the values specified in the ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the MEP ID of the peer device. The expected result: The number of received packets is the same as the number of sent packets.

Verifying the Ethernet OAM 1AG function 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command TRC MAC. In this step, set MA Index and MEP ID to the values specified in the ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the MEP ID of the peer device. The expected result: "Succeed in tracing the destination address" is displayed in the result.

Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 1AG function 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA CFMCCMTST to deactivate the unidirectional connectivity test of Ethernet OAM. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMEP to remove an Ethernet OAM MEP. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMA to remove an Ethernet OAM MA. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMD to remove an Ethernet OAM MD.

----End

7.153 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B and BTS3900E. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other Prerequisites The initial parameters required for BTS automatic planning algorithm are set in online mode through the M2000 client.
7-290 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
l The compact BTS refers to the BTS3900E. If the feature is applied to the BTS3900E, a maximum of two carriers can be configured and the cells of the BTS3900E are configured in O2 mode. The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E can connect with the BSC automatically with the network automatic detection feature. Operators do not need to configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration and planning of the BTS39000B and BTS3900E. This feature can be applied in newly deployed or swapped sites. By using this feature, site deployment duration is decreased and operator intervention is reduced. As a result, OM costs are reduced. Before the automatic planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm must be configured in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS adjacency information, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS GSM automatic planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide. If the version of the BSC is V900R012 or later vesions, the BSC supports the automatic configuration and automatic planning of 128 BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode, and the M2000 supports the automatic configuration and automatic planning of 512 BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode.

l l

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to establish the BTS in automatic planning mode. The established BTS is enabled with the automatic planning feature by default. The automatic planning algorithm switch and automatic optimization algorithm switch are set to ON.
NOTE

l The established BTS that is in automatic planning mode enables the automatic planning feature automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first automatic planning scan succeeds, the BTS does not enable the automatic planning feature automatically after the BTS is powered off again or reset. If the site data needs to be planned again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN. l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO. l For the BTS3900E, set BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and set Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch ,Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switchand ,andCapacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to ON. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically. l For the BTS3900B, set BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM, and set Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch,CGI and RAC Plan Switch,and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically.

2. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.

Verification procedure

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-291

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that CGI and RAC Plan Switch, Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch, and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch are set to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to NORMAL.

Deactivation procedure 1.

CAUTION
1. After BTS Configuration Mode is set to NORMAL, all the automatic planning and automatic optimization switches are deactivated. 2. The deactivation of the feature during the automatic planning will result in the reset of the BTS. ----End

Example
// Activation procedure ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="pico", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.101.101", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="10.161.30.1", MAINDEVTAB="1111222222333333", CELLNAME="pico_cell0", TYPE=DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=1, MASTERIPADDR="127.0.0.1"; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CELLNAMELIST="pico_cell0", // Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico"; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

7.154 Configuring PICO Synchronization


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware Neighboring cells of the BTS3900B are available and the neighboring relations are configured. This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B. l l Dependency on Other Features None License None

7-292

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

Context
l l The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. In the GSM network, the 13 MHz frequency synchronization is mandatory among multiple BTSs to maintain the network QoS, such as the MS handover success rate. The clock synchronization function of the BTS3900B implements the Um frequency synchronization with the neighboring macro BTSs through software. The output synchronization clock is 13 MHz. After the feature is activated, you do not need to configure a clock server for the BTS3900B.

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type to UM_CLK(Um Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK, and then check thatClock Type is set to UM_CLK(Um Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).

Verification procedure 1.

Deactivation procedure 1.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=UM_CLK; // Verification procedure LST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK;

7.155 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other Prerequisites The M2000 supports the PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-293

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Context
l l The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature is license-controlled. The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. Pico auto-planning indicates that the BTS3900B scans the uplink and downlink frequencies of operators according to the frequency band capability of the BTS3900B. The M2000 evaluates the interference condition of each frequency according to the scanning result. In addition, considering the neighboring relationship of the BTS3900B, the M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the frequency of the BTS3900B. PICO Dual-band Auto-planning supports the 900 MHz/1800 MHz and 850 MHz/1900 MHz dual-band scenarios on the basis of the original single-band auto-planning function. PICO auto-planning helps operators to implement fast network deployment and flexible network adjustment and reduce the workload of manual configuration. Before the auto-planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm should be set in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS neighboring relations, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS3900B GSM auto-planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide. The auto-planning function is mostly used in the site setup scenario. During the execution of the auto-planning function, the services within the network coverage of the BTS3900B are disrupted.

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the auto-planning BTS3900B, and set Is Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support). The added BTS3900B is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. In addition, the auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch are set to ON, and the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch is set to NO(NO) by default. You can run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG to modify the status of the switches.

7-294

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


NOTE

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l The added BTS3900B that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning function automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scan succeeds, the BTS3900B does not enable the auto-planning function automatically during the subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needs to be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN. l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Then, set the related auto-planning algorithm switch, auto-optimization algorithm switch and Frequency BandAdaptation Allowed switch according to the actual conditions. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically. The Frequency BandAdaptation Allowed switch has impacts on the auto-planning result. Operators can determine whether to enable the switch according to the actual conditions. For details, see the following note. l Operators can select appropriate planning modes to perform auto-planning according to the actual conditions. The BTS3900B supports the following planning modes: l If the BTS3900B is configured with one or two TRXs in band A, the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch is invalid. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 or O2 site in band A according to the number of configured TRXs. l If the BTS3900B is configured with two TRXs and the two TRXs are in band A and band B respectively, the BTS3900B will scan the frequencies of band A and band B. The frequency bands and site types of the frequencies planned by the BTS3900B, however, vary with the status of the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch. a. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to YES(YES): The M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the working frequency according to the reported scanning results of the two frequencies. The frequency band where the frequency exists is the working frequency band of the BTS3900B. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 site in corresponding frequency bands b. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to NO(NO): The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O2 site in dual-band. The M2000 selects the BCCH frequencies in low frequency bands (such as 900 MHz or 850 MHz) and selects the TCH frequencies in low frequency bands or high frequency bands.

2. l 1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG and check that BTS Configuration Mode is set to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).

Verification procedure

Deactivation procedure 1.

CAUTION
The deactivation operation during the execution of the auto-planning function will result in the reset of the BTS3900B. ----End

Example
// Activation procedure ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="pico", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC,

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-295

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=SUPPORT, TYPE=DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=1; SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FREQSELFADAPT=YES; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico"; // Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico"; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

7.156 Configuring PICO USB Encryption


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption.

Prerequisite
l l The license of this feature is activated. The M2000 supports the PICO USB Encryption feature.

Context
l l The PICO USB Encryption feature is license-controlled. The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. During the local commissioning for BTS3900B setup, the USB devices are required to save configuration files. With the PICO USB Encryption feature, the encryption software is used to encrypt configuration files on the M2000 side, and the configuration files are decrypted on the BTS side. In this case, the configuration files in the USB are not displayed in the plain tests, thus preventing potential risks caused by information leak. The USB encryption operation is performed on the M2000. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

7.157 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode.

Prerequisite
l l l Dependency on Hardware Currently, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E support the sleeping mode feature. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated.

Context
l The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. The PICO Sleeping Mode feature helps to save the site energy by enabling or disabling the cells in a period. When the BTS3900B is used at night when the traffic is unavailable in the scenarios, such as offices, warehouses, and exhibition
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-296

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

halls, users can specify the period for enabling or disabling the PICO cells, such as, 00:00 to 6:00 am. In this period, the power amplifiers of all the carriers (including BCCH carriers) in the cells are shut down. l When the PICO Sleeping Mode feature takes effect, the PICO cells do not provide radio network services.

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Enable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time.
NOTE

When Enable Turning Off Cell is set to SLEEPING, the BSC6900 disables the cell within the disabling period unconditionally and enables the cell within the enabling period unconditionally. Currently, the Enable Turning Off Cell parameter of only the BTS3900B and BTS3900E can be set to SLEEPING.

Verification procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING, and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is within the period specified by the two parameters. Wait for about five minutes and run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH to check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set to Yes, it indicates that the PICO Sleeping Mode feature is effective. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING, and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is beyond the period specified by the two parameters. Wait for about one minute and run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH to check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set to No, it indicates that the cell is enabled. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE.

2.

3.

4.

Deactivation procedure 1.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=SLEEPING, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=10&00, TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=12&00; // Deactivation procedure SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-297

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.158 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other The M2000 supports the PICO Automatic Optimization feature.

Context
l l The PICO Automatic Optimization feature is license-controlled. The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. During the operation of the BTS3900B, the automatic optimization task is created on the M2000 and the BTS3900Bs to be optimized and the counter thresholds are specified. When the working frequencies are severely interfered, the M2000 triggers the BTS3900B to restart the uplink and downlink frequency scan. In addition, the M2000 selects the working frequency with the minimum interference for the BTS3900B through the automatic optimization algorithm. Through automatic optimization of working frequencies, the BTS3900B can shield itself from the frequencies that are severely interfered. In this case, the communication quality within the coverage of the BTS3900B and the KPIs are improved significantly. In addition, the handover success rate of the MS in the coverage of the BTS3900B is increased and the call drop rate is reduced. The progress and result of the PICO Automatic Optimization feature can be viewed on the M2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN), BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM (BTS3900BGSM), and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to ON(ON). Then, set the related auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch according to the actual conditions. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG and check that Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch is set to ON(ON).

Verification procedure 1.

l
7-298

Deactivation procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to OFF(OFF).

Example
// Activation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=ON; // Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=OFF;

7.159 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware This feature is supported by only the Compact BTS. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other Prerequisites The initial parameters required for BTS auto-planning algorithm are set in online mode through the M2000 client. Before this feature is configured, the BTS has performed automatic configuration and planning. The automatic optimization task of the GSM BTS is created on the M2000 client before the feature is activated. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

Context
l l l The Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning feature is license-controlled. The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E. According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output power of the TRX in real time to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the network. A cell is initially configured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the traffic volume, another TRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs share the 30 W power.
NOTE

After the feature is activated, the M2000 measures the traffic volume of the BTS within 24 hours, and then compares the measurement result with the threshold of the actual traffic volume. If the traffic volume of the BTS exceeds the threshold, the BTS adds a TRX automatically for expansion.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-299

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch is set to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to OFF.

Verification procedure 1.

Deactivation procedure 1.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=ON; // Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=OFF;

7.160 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware This feature is supported by only the BTS3900E. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other Prerequisites The scanning frequency set and neighbor cell list are configured on the M2000 in advance. The parameters related to automatic optimization are set on the M2000 in advance.

Context
l The Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature is licensecontrolled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-300

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l l

The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E. Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning The automatic neighboring cell planning feature is mostly applied in the site deployment scenario. The automatic neighboring cell planning feature indicates that the M2000 triggers the BTS3900E to perform downlink frequency scan. The BTS3900E reports the information about the neighboring cells to the M2000. Then, the M2000 configures the scanned cells as the neighboring cells of the BTS3900E. In addition, the M2000 adds the cells of the BTS3900E in the scanned cells to the neighboring cell list to set up the bidirectional neighboring relation. If the scanned cells are beyond the serving area of the M2000, the M2000 can set up only the unidirectional neighboring relation and prompt users to manually configure neighboring cells.

Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization The automatic neighbor cell optimization feature is used during the operation of the BTS. During the operation of the BTS3900E, the automatic optimization task is created on the M2000. With this feature, the M2000 determines that redundant neighboring cells exist in the BTS3900E or certain neighboring cells are missed according to the analysis of the measurement reports. Then, the M2000 triggers the neighbor cell optimization process automatically and updates the neighboring relation.

The Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature can improve network quality, increase handover success rate, and reduce call drop rate automatically, thus reducing the workload of manual configuration and improving OM efficiency. The progress and result of the automatic planning and optimization can be viewed on the M2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

Procedure
l Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the BTS3900E in auto-planning mode. The added BTS3900E is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. In addition, the related auto-planning algorithm switch and autooptimization algorithm switch supported by the BTS3900E are set to ON. You can run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG to modify the status of the switches.
NOTE

l The added BTS3900E that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning function automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scan succeeds, the BTS3900E does not enable the auto-planning function automatically during the subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needs to be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN. l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO. Then, set Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON. Then, run the RST AUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically.

2. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.

Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-301

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and set Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that Neighbor Cell Plan Switch and Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch are set to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, Neighbor Cell Plan Switch and Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch to OFF.

Verification procedure 1.

Deactivation procedure 1.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="micro", BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.101.101", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="10.161.30.1", MAINDEVTAB="1111222222333333", CELLNAME="micro_cell0", TYPE=DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=1, MASTERIPADDR="127.0.0.1"; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CELLNAMELIST="micro_cell0", SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, NBRCELLSWITCH=ON, NBRCELLOPTSWITCH=ON; // Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro"; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

7.161 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The solar controller is connected to the BTS. Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Compact BTS Timing Power Off feature. l l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other Prerequisites The version of the solar controller is POWER2000 V1R1C04. The time of the solar controller is consistent with that of the BTS3900E.

Context
l The compact BTS is the BTS3900E. Within the coverage of the BTS3900E, if the BTS3900E uses solar boards to supply power, users can set the enabling and disabling time
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7-302

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

of the BTS3900E on the BSC when the traffic is unavailable or is light. By using the solar controller, the BTS3900E can enable or disable automatically in the specified periods, thus reducing the power consumption of the site, the number of solar boards, and construction cost. l The BTS3900E does not provide services when the Compact BTS Timing Power Off feature takes effect.

Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled toYES and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, and set Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the actual conditions.
NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSPWR to query the power information about the BTS.

Verification procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set BTS Index to the index of the BTS to be verified, Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES, and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, and set Power-off Start Time and Poweroff End Time according to the verification time at the site to ensure that the verification time is within the period specified by Power-off Start Time and Poweroff End Time. On the main interface of the LMT, click Alarm. The Alarm tab page is displayed. Double-click OML Fault on the Fault tab page under Browse Alarm. The Alarm Detailed Information dialog box is displayed. Check Alarm Cause of Location Info, if Alarm Cause is displayed as Green Base Station Power-off, it indicates that the BTS3900E is powered off.
NOTE

2. 3. 4.

The OML Fault alarm is generated after the BTS is powered off. Thus, check the alarm after Power-off Start Time.

Deactivation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO or set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES and BTS Power-off Enabled to OFF.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=ON; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=OFF;

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-303

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7.162 Configuring Local User Management


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706 Local User Management.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware The BTS3900E is in IP over FE transmission mode. Dependency on Other Features None License The license of this feature is activated. Other The PC installed with the Local User Management software is in normal communication with the BTS3900E.

Context
l l l The Local User Management feature is license-controlled. Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Local User Management feature. This feature can be used to deploy a special commercial mode. When the BTS3900E is used in rural areas, operators can contract the BTS3900E to entrepreneurs. The entrepreneurs manage the local users through a PC and provide the registration and deregistration services, local services, public network services, and local services in singlesite mode. The entrepreneurs gain profits by increasing the number of local users. The entrepreneurs are responsible for registration and communication charging (including charging strategies) of local users. The transmission in rural areas is unstable. This feature ensures that the local user management can be performed even if the transmission is disrupted. In addition, the communication and charging between local users are supported. The BTS3900E contracted to the entrepreneurs can also provide services for public network users of operators. In this case, the communication requirements of public network users can be ensured when the BSC transmission is disrupted. l l The calls between local users support only full rate. When the transmission on the Abis interface is disrupted, the BTS3900E enters the singlesite mode. The handover procedure lasts for six minutes, during which services are disrupted. During the communication between local users, only the reporting of the original measurement report is supported.

Procedure
l
7-304

Activation procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local call support flag to YES(YES). Local services and public network services Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local call support flag is set to YES(YES). Use MSs to perform the service dialing test. Expected result: The call services between local services, between public network users, and between local users and public network users are normal.
NOTE

Verification procedure 1. 2.

The local signaling process of call services between local users is different from the common call process. You can observe the signaling information through message tracing on the Web LMT.

1. 2.

Local services in single-site mode Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local call support flag is set to YES(YES). Disconnect the BTS3900E from the BSC and wait for six minutes. Then, perform the local service dialing test. Expected result: The call services between local users are normal. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local call support flag to NO(NO).

Deactivation procedure 1.

----End

Example
// Activation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=YES; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=NO;

7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate VGCS/VBS.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The test cell is configured with the VGCS function and VGCS ID at the MSC. Non-single channel originating is configured at the MSC. VGCS and VBS are enabled for the corresponding IMSIs at the HLR. Two test MSs, MS 1 and M2, that support VGCS and VBS are available. l l l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated. Other prerequisites
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-305

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

The test cell has idle TCHs. The channel state monitoring of the test cell is started. For details, see Monitoring Channel Status.

Context
Compared with the GSM system, the GSM-R provides new features, such as VGCS, VBS, and enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) service. The GSM-R can provide diversified voice dispatch services required in the private network. The cell does not support the VGCS/VBS by default, that is, the default value of NCH Occupy Block Number is 0. Configure the VGCS/VBS by setting NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0, the BSC6900 informs the MS of the NCH information in system information type 1. The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call after receiving the message indicating that the system supports the VGCS/VBS.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block.
NOTE

l NCH Occupy Block Number cannot be set to 0. The sum of NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the value of CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC to query the value of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. l After the command is executed, the BSC6900 sends related messages to the MS. VGCS and VBS can be originated in the group only after the MS receives these messages.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLGSMR to check that NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0. That is, the VGCS or VBS is successfully configured in the test cell.

Verification Procedure Verifying VGCS 1. 2. Use MS 1 to perform VGCS in the test cell, and ensure that the service is performed properly. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP. The expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack, VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, VGCS/VBS Assignment Result, and VGCS/ VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface. 3. 4. Check the status of TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for VGCS, another TCH is occupied and that the TCH is released five minutes later. Use MS 2 to perform VGCS with the same VGCS ID as MS 1 in the cell. The expected result: MS 2 is notified that the VGCS is ongoing. After MS 2 is added to the VGCS call, you can see that the current VGCS ID is displayed on the screen of MS 2. 5. Press the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink, and check the traced messages displayed in the A Interface Trace window and those displayed on the screen of MS 1. The expected result: The messages Uplink Request, Uplink Request Ack, Uplink Request Confirmation, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on the

7-306

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

A interface. The phone number of MS 2 is displayed on the screen of MS 1. In addition, you can hear the voice from MS 2 on MS 1. 6. Press the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink, and at the same time press the PTT key on MS 1 to preempt the uplink. Preemption rejection is displayed on the screen of MS 1.

Verifying VBS 1. 2. Use MS 1 to perform VBS in the test cell, and ensure that the service is performed properly. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP. The expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack, VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result are traced on the A interface. 3. 4. Check the status of TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for VBS, another TCH is occupied. Use MS 2 to perform VBS with the same ID as MS 1 in the cell. The expected result: You can see that MS 2 is notified that the VBS call is ongoing. After MS 2 is added the VBS call, you can see that the phone number of MS 1 is displayed on the screen of MS 2 and you can hear the voice from MS 1 on MS 2. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number to 0.

7.164 Configuring GSM-T Relay


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The MS, MSC, and HLR need to support this feature. The BTS has been upgraded to a version that supports trunking services. The MS supports trunking services. l l Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
If a BSC supports GSM-T Relay, the BSC is connected to both the public MSC and the trunking MSC. By routing trunking services to the trunking MSC, the BSC separates the networking of trunking services and point-to-point call services.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-307

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a signaling point of the trunking MSC. In this step, set DSP index according to the network planning, and set DSP type to A(A) and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In this step, set CN Node Index, DPC Group Index, and Operator Name according to the network planning; set MSC ID to a value that identifies a trunking MSC; set DSP index to the value specified in Step 1; set Default DPC to NO(Not Default DPC), Trunking MSC to YES(Yes), and Support Paging Message from Trunking MSC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index according to the network planning. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 4 and set TC mode based on the subrack combination mode. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to the index of the signaling link set added in Step 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number of the target cell to a value that is not less than 1. On the LMT, start the A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DPC of the trunking MSC. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the target cell specified in Step 7. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is displayed. Initiate a successful VGCS call. Then, check the messages traced on the A interface. The expected result: The A interface signaling of the VGCS initiating MS is displayed in the A interface tracing window. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Trunking MSC to NO(No).

2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

7. l

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

3.

7.165 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware None
7-308 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

l l

Dependency on Other Features None License The license is activated.

Context
Huawei II handover algorithm will traverse all the handover types in the handover decisionmaking phase. In the process of traversing the handover types, Huawei II handover algorithm does not execute a handover immediately but creates a candidate target cell list when the triggering conditions of the handover are met, compared with the common handover algorithm. After all the handover types are traversed, the intersection of the candidate cell lists that meet the handover triggering conditions is selected as the final target cell list. Huawei II handover algorithm, which is different from a common handover algorithm, considers comprehensively all handover decision-making results so that the final handover decision-making result is more accurate. Huawei II handover algorithm is classified into emergency handover, intra-cell handover, and inter-cell handover. l l l The emergency handover is classified into quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover. The intra-cell handover is classified into handover between TCHF and TCHH. The inter-cell handover is classified into interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, edge handover, fast-moving micro cell handover, better cell handover, and SDCCH handover.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-309

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

CAUTION
l After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successfully performed, penalty is applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to the old cell. l In Huawei II handover algorithm, the serving cell must not be selected as the target cell of bad quality handover. l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-sited neighboring cell is lower than or equal to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the neighboring cell is prohibited. l An interference handover can be an intra-cell handover. However, when intra-cell handover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified duration. In Huawei II handover algorithm, only the serving cell can be selected as the target cell of interference handover. l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same underlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handover of a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell on the network. l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered between the enhanced dual-band network cells. l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, the penalty is applied on all the neighboring micro cells. l Huawei II handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover, interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, edge handover, fast-moving micro cell handover, better cell handover, handover between TCHF and TCHH, and SDCCH handover. l Load handover is not treated as an independent handover type for handover decision-making. The load handover decision is made in the network adjustment phase. The selection of a target cell should be processed by the better cell handover. That is, the load handover is triggered when the triggering conditions of load handover and better cell handover are met simultaneously. l Better cell handover is an optimization of inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in Huawei I handover algorithm. It is specific to Huawei II handover algorithm.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2. 3.

7-310

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

4. 5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). Activating the quick handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes) and set Chain Neighbour Cell Type according to the actual situation. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to YES(Yes). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration according to the actual situation.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value need to be set by running the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL Frequency Adjust Value based on the frequency offset information reported by the BTS. 6. Activating the TA handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set TA HO Allowed to YES(Yes). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set TA Threshold according to the actual situation. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Penalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO according to the actual situation. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set TA HO Watch Time and TA HO Valid Time according to the actual situation. 7. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set BQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes). (2) Optional. For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual. Threshold according to the actual situation. (3) Optional. For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL Qual. Limit for AMR HR according to the actual situation.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-311

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Penalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO according to the actual situation. (5) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set TA HO Watch Time and BQ HO Watch Time according to the actual situation. 8. Activating interference handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Interference HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Intracell HO Allowed and Forbidden time after MAX Times according to the actual situation. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Inter-layer HO Threshold, Interfere HO Static Time, and Interfere HO Valid Time according to the actual situation.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold according to the actual situation.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis according to the actual situation. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR according to the actual situation. 9. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set No Dl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit according to the actual situation. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Filter Length for TCH Qual. and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. according to the actual situation. (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set UL BQ HO Static Time and UL BQ HO Last Time according to the actual situation. 10. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell) and then set Cell Inner/ Extra Property, Same Group Cell Index Type, Same Group Cell Index, and Same Group Cell Name according to the actual situation. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA. In this step, set Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious Overload Threshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of
7-312 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells, and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries according to the actual situation. 11. Activating the edge handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Load Handover Support to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HO Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Valid Time. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Intercell HO Hysteresis, Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time, and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time according to the actual situation. 12. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Layer of The Cell according to the actual situation.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell according to the actual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MS Fast-moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fastmoving Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO according to the actual situation.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Inter-layer HO Threshold according to the actual situation.
NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold according to the actual situation.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, HCS HO Watch Time, and HCS HO Valid Time according to the actual situation. 13. Activating the better cell handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Better Cell Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and then set Pathloss Ho. Enable according to the actual situation. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Better Cell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time according to the actual situation. 14. Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-313

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), Allow AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes), Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), and Allow Non-AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes). Then, set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, F-H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, F-H Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, F-H ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, F-H Ho Stat. Time, F-H Ho Last Time, AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, H-F ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold, H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, HF Ho Stat. Time, H-F Ho Last Time, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, NonAMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold according to the actual situation. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(Yes). (3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set Speech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3. (4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. 15. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set SDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes). (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed according to the actual situation. l Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the value of Current HO Control Algorithm. The expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). 2. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Select BSSAP in the Trace Type area. The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover performed message to the MSC. In the case of a quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. In the case of a TA handover, the handover cause value is distance. In the case of a BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or downlink-quality. In the case of an interference handover, the handover cause value is uplinkquality or downlink-quality. In the case of a no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality. In the case of an enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value is better-cell or traffic.
7-314 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

In the case of a load handover, the handover cause value is traffic. In the case of an edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or downlink-strength. In the case of a fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. In the case of a better cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. In the case of a handover between TCHF and TCHH, the handover cause value is downlink-quality. In the case of an SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

7.166 Configuring Handover Re-establishment


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment.

Prerequisite
l l l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features None Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated. Other prerequisites An available neighboring cell is configured for the test cell. A TRX in the test cell supports handover re-establishment.

Context
When receiving the Error Indication message from the BTS during a handover, the BSC attempts to re-establish the call on the original channel instead of treating it as a call drop. Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits: l l Reducing the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction Improving network KPIs

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-315

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2 Re-establishment to YES(Yes). Configure two cells: cell 0 and cell 1. Configure these two cells as neighboring cell of each other. The two cells are operating normally on the same frequency band. On the LMT, open the Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box of cell 0 and cell 1. Use the test MS to make a cell in cell 0. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set both Better Cell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time to 1, and set PBGT HO Threshold to 64. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step, set both T200 FACCH/F and T200 FACCH/H to 5, set N200 of FACCH/Half Rate to 30, and set N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to 34. Rapidly decrease the BTS transmit power in cell 0 to initiate a better cell handover to cell 1. After the handover command is delivered, an Error Ind message is received from cell 0. The MS cannot receive the handover command. Then, increase the transmit power in cell 0. The transmission of the Error Ind message indicates that the number of timer T200 expires exceeds N200 plus one. View the result of the RSL message tracing on the Abis interface of cell 0. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The following messages can be traced on the Abis interface of cell 0: Handover Command, Error Indication, Establish Request, and Establish Confirm. The call of the MS is normal.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

7. 8.

9.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2 Re-establishment to NO(No).

----End

7.167 Configuring RAN Sharing


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing.

Prerequisite
l Dependency on Hardware The MSC is configured with two PLMNs, PLMN A and PLMN B. PLMN A belongs to operator A, and PLMN B belongs to operator B. Two test MSs are get ready. MS 1 is a subscriber of operator A and MS 2 is a subscriber of operator B. l
7-316

Dependency on Other Features


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

None l l Dependency on License The license for this feature is activated. Other prerequisites A BTS is configured with two cells, cell 1 and cell 2. The two cells operate normally and have idle channels.

Context
With the RAN sharing function, different operators with independent core networks (CNs) can share the resources (such as BSC, BTS, antenna, and transmission resources) in a GBSS network.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RAN Sharing to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Operator Type to PRIM(Primary Operator) (assume that PLMN A belongs to the primary operator), set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC according to the actual conditions of PLMN A, and set other parameters according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR again. In this step, set Operator Type to SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that PLMN B belongs to the secondary operator), set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC according to the actual conditions of PLMN B, and set other parameters according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of the operator of PLMN A and set other parameters according to the actual conditions. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE again. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of the operator of PLMN B and set other parameters according to the actual conditions. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING. In this step, select the test BTS and set Sharing Allow to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Operator Name of cell 1 to the name of the operator of PLMN A. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSP Code of cell 1 to the OSP allocated to the BSC6900 by the operator of PLMN A. Similarly, configure the attributes of cell 2. On the LMT, open the Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface dialog box and select RSL. On the LMT, open the Tracing Messages on the A Interface dialog box and select BSSAP. Use MS 1 to access cell 1 and make a call to a fix phone. The call is set up successfully. Check the signaling procedure of cell 1 in Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface and Tracing Messages on the A Interface. The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of a mobile-originated call of MS 1 is displayed.
Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-317

3.

4. 5.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

7 Configuring GBSS Features

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4.

Use MS 2 to access cell 2 and make a call to a fix phone. The call is set up successfully. Check the signaling procedure of cell 2 in Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface and Tracing Messages on the A Interface. The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of a mobile-originated call of MS 2 is displayed.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Operator Name of cell 2 to the name of the operator of PLMN A. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSP Code to the OSP allocated to the BSC6900 by the operator of PLMN A. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING. In this step, select the test BTS and set Sharing Allow to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of the operator of PLMN B. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNOPERATOR to remove the operator whose Operator Name is SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that the operator of PLMN B is the secondary operator). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RAN Sharing to NO(No).

6. ----End

7.168 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell.

Prerequisite
l l Dependency on Hardware None Dependency on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117401 MSC Pool and GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. l l License The license is activated. Others If the routing of an MS needs to be selected by the CN, then the location areas that MSs can access need to be configured at the HLR. Operators A and B are configured. Both operator A and operator B have enabled the features MSC Pool and SGSN Pool in their networks.

Context
The RAN Sharing feature enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per BTS basis whereas using their respective core network (CN) equipment. With this feature, different operators cannot share the same cell.
7-318 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

7 Configuring GBSS Features

The MOCN Shared Cell feature enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per cell basis while using their respective CN equipment.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCN Switch to CNSEL(CN Select) or BSCSEL(BSC Select), and then set Re-Routing Occasion, Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List, and Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell named CELL1. In this step, set MOCN Sharing Cell to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRA to add a routing sharing area. In this step, set Routing Sharing Area Code and Routing Sharing Area Description. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD LAOPMAP to add the mapping be